Pathfinder Wiki - User contributions [en]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Sanding Block

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

A '''sanding block''' is a block used to hold sandpaper. In its simplest form, it is a block of wood or cork with one smooth flat side. The user wraps the sandpaper around the block, and holds it in place. Fancier versions use clips, teeth or clamps to hold the paper in place. Commercial versions can be constructed of various materials. They are usually sized to hold a quarter or half sheet of sandpaper. Some versions use the sandpaper belts intended for a power belt sander. Sanding blocks are helpful because they prevent the "waves" created by plain sandpaper.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Rasp

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

[[Image:Wood rasp.jpg|thumb|right|250px|Wood rasp]]
A '''rasp''' is a woodworking tool used for shaping wood. It consists of a point or the tip, then a long steel bar or the belly, then the heel or bottom, then the tang. The tang is joined to a handle, usually made of plastic or wood. The bar has had sharp teeth cut into it. Rasps generally cut more coarsely than files. They are useful for rapidly removing wood from curved surfaces. They remove less wood than a drawknife, so they are easier to control. Even though rasps leave very coarse finishes, the cut-away areas can be easily smoothed with finer tools, such as files.

There are several types and shapes of rasps. There is a half round, round and flat. The several types of rasps are bastard, cabinet and wood (finest to coarsest). All these varieties can be used to make different shapes.

A similar tool to a rasp is a '''surform file'''; it has coarse, individual teeth like a rasp for cutting wood. The difference being that the surform has a small hole near each of the teeth to allow shavings to pass through and prevent clogging. Surform tools come in different styles and shapes including file-plane, round file and shaping/shaving tools.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Plane

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

A hand plane is a tool for shaping wood. Planes are used to flatten, reduce the thickness of, and impart a smooth surface to a rough piece of lumber.

Hand Planes are one of the most satisfying tools to operate. Clamp the wood securely to a bench, and then push the plane along the grain. The blade should be adjusted so that it takes a thin shaving off the plank. A sharp, well adjusted plane will remove a continuous shaving the entire length of the board. Pay attention to how the grain runs - if the grain dives into the board, make sure the plane's blade does not break the shaving off below the surface. If this happens, try planing in the other direction (see illustration).

[[Image:Planing_wood_with_the_grain.PNG|300px]] [[Image:Planing_wood_against_the_grain.PNG|300px]]

Once the blade has been removed from a plane, it can be sharpened in the same fashion as a chisel. It should be sharpened frequently, as this will greatly improve its performance.

A plane should be stored on its side to respect the blade. You should also be very careful to not plane into a nail or a screw, as doing so will put a nasty notch in the blade.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Knife

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

[[Image:Chisel.jpg|thumb|500px|Carving knives, chisels, and gouges]]
The primary tool for wood carving is a carving knife. You can use a pocket knife as well, and many people do. To sharpen a knife, hold the blade at about a 15° angle and scrape it along a whetstone as if you were trying to shave off a thin layer of the stone. Be sure to sharpen both sides.
 
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Gouge

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

A gouge is a chisel with a curved blade. If pushed along a piece of wood, it would plow out a U-shaped channel. Gouges are sharpened with a slipstone, which is a whetstone with a curved edge.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Coping saw

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

[[Image:Coping saw.JPG|thumb|250px|Coping saw]]
Coping saws are very useful for removing bulk. A carving can often be roughed in with a coping saw, and once the shape is cut out, knives, chisels, and gouges can be used to clean it up and do the final shaping. Coping saw blades can be sharpened with a triangle file, though they are cheap enough that they ore more frequently replaced when dull.

The blade can be installed on the coping saw so that it cuts on either the pull stroke or the push stroke. Experiment to see which you like better. To make a cut, clamp the piece to a bench or hold it firmly with your free hand or knee. Align the blade with the pencil mark you have made which will guide the cut. Gently work the saw up and down to make the cut. You may have difficulty at first, and this does take a little practice to master. But once you have it down, it is not all that difficult. Follow the line until the cut is complete.
 

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking Tools/Chisel

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

A chisel is best used with a mallet. Chisels can be used for removing great quantities of wood. They can cut across the grain or slice along its length. Chisels are sharpened much the same way as knives, but the angle is a bit steeper, ranging from 20° to 35°. Often they are sharpened at two angles, such as 25° for most of the length of the blade, and 35° near the edge. This allows the blade to be resharpened by only honing a small portion near the cutting edge.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Communications/Wigwag Code

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

In order to send Morse Code via wigwag flag, one must obviously first learn Morse Code. See section a for details. Second, one must know how to transmit dots and dashes with the wigwag flags. The sender holds two flags, one in each hand. The "rest" position is both flags straight up. To send a dot, the flag on the right is lowered straight out to the right and then raised again. To send a dash, the left flag is lowered straight out to the left and then raised again.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book]]

AY Honors/Woodworking/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1934|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Tell how the following processes are related to lumber and how each process is done: ==
=== Growing Trees ===
Lumber comes from trees, so in order to get lumber, a tree must be cut down. Before a tree can be cut down, it must be grown. Many areas are managed forests, where once the trees have been harvested for lumber, new trees are planted to take their place. Doing so make lumber a sustainable resource. The science of growing trees is called forestry.

=== Harvesting of Trees ===
Harvesting of trees is the practice of cutting them down in order to convert them into lumber. There are several approaches to this, including clear cutting and selective cutting.

When a forest is clear cut, all woody plants are removed. The larger ones are cut into 16' sections and used for making lumber. Contrary to popular belief, clear cutting can actually be beneficial to the forest, as it simulates the effect of a natural forest fire. The trees that are planted in the clear cut will receive more light, and thus produce more lumber more quickly. However, the clear cut should be replanted with the same species of trees that were harvested from the area. Clear cutting is often done during a season on several small tracts of land in a larger forest. This staggers the harvest so that it can be more easily sustained over long periods of time.

Selective cutting is the practice of only removing mature trees from a forest. This has a lesser impact on the forest, but it takes longer to produce lumber and it is more labor intensive than clear cutting. Selective cutting preserves other aspects of the forest though, including its beauty, and its role as a wildlife habitat.

=== Milling ===
Milling lumber is the process of sawing logs into boards. This is usually done at a saw mill. There are many ways to cut a log into boards, and the method chosen affects the quality of the lumber and the amount of lumber that can be obtained from the log. Quarter sawing produces the highest quality lumber, but it does not produce as much lumber as other methods (such as flat sawing). In quartersawn lumber, the log is first divided into quarters, and then each plank is sawn from that such that the growth rings go through the plank perpendicular to the plank's face.

[[Image:Quartersawn.png|300px|Quartersawn Lumber]]

In flat sawn lumber, All the cuts are made in the same direction. Thus, the growth rings penetrate the board at many different angles. This method of cutting produces the most lumber from a log, but that lumber will be far more susceptible to warping and cupping.

[[Image:Flatsawn.png|320px|Flatsawn Lumber]]

=== Curing/Seasoning ===
Curing and Seasoning lumber are two words for the same process. It is the process of drying lumber after it has been milled. When timber is first cut, over 50% of its weight is water. As the lumber dries, it changes shape. If it is dried unevenly, it will warp, twist, and crack (cracking is also called "checking"). This is because as the lumber dries, it shrinks. If it dries unevenly, it will also shrink unevenly. To season lumber, it must be allowed to dry evenly. There are several ways to accomplish this, but the two most common are air drying and kiln drying. After the lumber is milled into rough boards, it is stacked horizontally in layers. Each layer is separated by "stickers" which are small pieces of wood about an inch thick, an inch or two wide, and as long as the stack is deep. Stickers are placed on the floor first, and the first layer of lumber is stacked on top of it. More stickers are placed on top of the first layer directly above the stickers on the floor, and another layer of lumber is placed on them. This is repeated until there is a large stack of lumber. Separating the lumber like this allows air to circulate evenly, and thus, the lumber will dry evenly. Kiln dried lumber is stacked in a kiln (a type of oven) in the same way as air dried lumber.

=== Grading ===
The quality of lumber is widely variable. The difference between the wood suitable for making shipping crates and pallets and the wood suitable for making furniture and toys is fairly large. Grading lumber is the process of assigning a quality figure to it - not unlike grading a school paper or a test. Lumber is graded based on the poorest side of the lumber, and on the yield the lumber is expected to produce (that is, how much of the wood can be converted into boards verses how much will be thrown away).

There are four basic grades of lumber, and even these grades have sub-categories. The basic grades are listed here from the highest quality to the lowest quality:

'''FAS ''' is short for "'''F'''irsts '''a'''nd '''S'''econds." Lumber of this grade is at least 83% clear (free from all defects such as stains, splits, worm holes, knots, etc.) on its poor side.

'''No. 1 Common''' is the next grade of lumber. It is often used in furniture making. It must be 67% clear on its poor side.

'''No. 2 Common''' must be at least 50% clear on its poor side. It is often used in cabinet making and in millwork (molding, baseboards, and other trim). This grade of lumber is excellent in applications that will be finished with paint (as opposed to a natural finish).

'''No. 3 Common''' is the lowest grade of lumber. There are two sub-categories called 3A and 3B. 3A must be at least 33% clear, while 3B must be at least 25% sound (rather than clear). 3A is often used for flooring, while 3B often used for making pallets and crates.

References:

[http://www.woodweb.com/knowledge_base/Basic_lumber_grades.html Basic Lumber Grades]

[http://www.woodweb.com/knowledge_base/Understanding_Hardwood_Lumber_Grading.html Understanding
Hardwood Lumber Grading]

=== Sizing ===
Once lumber has been milled and cured, it is sized. There are three common methods of sizing lumber. The first and most common is dimensional. The most well known of the dimensional sizes is the 2 by 4 (2x4). Other sizes include the 2x6, 2x8, 4x4, etc. Before a 2x4 is sized, it is 2 inches thick and 4 inches wide. The lumber is then planed so that the edges are smooth and the thickness is even. The planing process removes about a half inch of lumber, so the finished 2x4 is really 1.5 inches thick by 3.5 inches wide. It is still called a 2x4 though, because that's much easier than calling it a 1.5 x 3.5.

The second sizing method is known as quartering. Rough sawn lumber is sized in quarter inch increments. A one inch thick, rough sawn plank is called four-quarter, and this is written as 4/4. Rough sawn lumber is also available in 5/4, 8/4, and 10/4 sizes. These are 1.25", 2", and 2.5" thick respectively.

The third sizing method is the board foot method. A board foot of lumber is one inch thick, 12 inches wide, and 12 inches long. In other words, a board foot of lumber contains 144 cubic inches of wood. Even if the plank is not 12 inches wide or one inch thick, it is still sold by the board foot. One way to calculate how many board feet are in a plank is to first calculate the number of cubic inches (width times thickness times length, all in inches) and then divide that by 144.

==2. Collect and label five different kinds of wood used in woodworking. Tell the advantages and disadvantages of each. ==
'''Pine'''
Pine is the most commonly available wood in North America. Its primary advantage is that it is relatively cheap. This is because it grows rather quickly. Another characteristic of pine is that it is soft. This can be both an advantage and a disadvantage. The advantage of a soft wood is that it is easy to work. The disadvantage is that it can break easily; delicate joinery that works fine in hardwoods will not hold up in pine.

'''Oak'''
Oak is a very common hardwood. It is a tough wood that holds up well when stressed. It was often used in shipbuilding because of this toughness. Additionally, oak is fairly workable up until it is seasoned. Seasoned oak is ''very'' hard, which makes it difficult to cut, bore, plane or drive a nail through. This is an advantage in the finished product, but a disadvantage when trying to make something. When using oak, it is best to use unseasoned wood, and let it season once the object has been made.

'''Maple'''
Maple is a light colored wood that can be found with highly figured grain. Figured grain is difficult to work with, but makes for a beautiful piece of furniture. Maple is also great for toy making because it does not easily splinter and stands up well to the abuse of even the most destructive of children. Maple is also commonly available, and thus, is relatively cheap for a hardwood.

'''Walnut'''
Walnut is a dark hardwood. Its color is one of its chief advantages, and is probably wood most often "copied" by staining lighter, cheaper woods. Walnut also has figured grain and is fairly hard. It holds detail well, so it can be used in making intricate joints. It is also relatively expensive for a native hardwood.

'''Cherry'''
Cherry is another hardwood that is commonly used in furniture making. Its color starts off as a medium brown and then slowly turns to a dark, beautiful reddish hue over time. It takes a nice finish, and has no need for stain. It is a little cheaper than walnut, but still fairly expensive.

'''Poplar'''
Poplar is classified as a hardwood, but it is relatively soft (though still harder than pine). Because of its softness, it is easy to work.

'''Elm'''
Elm is a hardwood that is highly resistant to splitting. Because if this, it was the only wood used to make the hubs of wooden wagon wheels. It has a highly figured grain that entwines, and tangles itself in all directions - this is what makes it so difficult to split, but it also makes it difficult to plane.

==3. List the basic hand and power tools necessary to do woodworking. Know how to safely use each tool and how to keep it in proper working order, including sharpening, if applicable. ==

Technically, no power tools are necessary for woodworking - everything can be done with handtools. Power tools can certainly make the job easier, but they are a relatively recent tool to arrive on the woodworking scene.

=== Handsaws ===
Handsaws are tools used for cutting wood. Handsaws come in many varieties, including the crosscut saw, rip saw, coping saw, tenon saw, backsaw, and dovetail saw. Each has its own special use. A crosscut saw is used for cutting across the grain of a piece of lumber. A rip saw is used for cutting along the grain. A coping saw is used for making curved cuts. A tenon saw is used for cutting tenons and other fine work. A backsaw is commonly used with a miter box and for small cutting jobs. A dovetail saw is used for cutting dovetail joints.

To use a crosscut or a rip saw, place the board on a supported surface at thigh-height (between the knee and hips). Grip the saw with the right hand (assuming right-handedness) and use the left knee to hold the board in place. Align the right shoulder, arm, and hand so that they are in line with the cut to be made. Begin with light strokes, noting that the saw cuts on the push stroke. As the cut progresses, keep an eye on the line, pulling the blade toward it. If this is to be a "finished" cut, you can score a "V" along the line first with a carton knife, and let the blade ride in the V groove. Score another line along the bottom of the board to prevent tear-out.

A saw is sharpened with a triangle file. The teeth of a rip saw (which cuts along the grain) are sharpened perpendicular to the blade. The teeth of crosscut saw are sharpened at an angle. Try to match the angle already ground into the teeth.

Maintain your saws by keeping them dry and sharp. Many tools (including saws) can be kept in great condition by wiping them down with a cloth and oil (or WD40) after each use. Coping saw blades can be obtained cheaply enough that it is easier to replace them than it is to sharpen them.

=== Chisels ===
Chisels can be used for making a variety of cuts in wood, from mortise and tenon joints to dovetail joints. They are often struck with a mallet or a hammer, but sometimes they are pushed by hand (watch for fingers!) to pare a joint or to smooth it. Chisels are also used to remove wood for recessing a hinge. To do this, the outline of the hinge is first scored with a knife, and then the wood is pared away with the chisel.

To cut a mortise, choose a chisel that is as wide as the desired mortise. Mortises should only be cut so that they are parallel to the grain of the wood. Mark the mortise out, and then place the chisel perpendicular to the grain, such that it covers the width of the mortise. Strike it with the mallet. Then move the chisel about an eighth of an inch (2-3mm) farther down the mortise and repeat. Each "bite" of the chisel will go a little deeper. When you get to the end of the mortise, reverse the chisel and take bites in the other direction (still perpendicular to the grain, but heading back toward the other end of the mortise). Continue until the mortise reaches the desired depth. Always cut the mortise first, and then size the tenon to fit.

To sharpen a chisel, hold it at a steady angle and drag it along a whetstone. If you use a grinder, be careful to not overheat the tip of the chisel as this will cause it to lose its tempering. It is better to sharpen them by hand with a whetstone, as it is very easy to overheat the blade with a grinder.

Store chisels in a way that will protect the cutting edge, either by covering them, or placing the edge where it will not come into contact with anything of equal (or greater) hardness than the blade. Like saws, chisels can be wiped down with cloth and oil to keep rust away.

=== Hand Planes ===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Woodworking Tools/Plane}}

=== Clamps ===
Clamps are used to hold a piece of wood in place while it is being worked, or to hold pieces of wood together after gluing them until the glue cures.

Clamps come in many varieties, including C-clamps and furniture clamps. Some say that it is nearly impossible to own too many C-clamps. When using a C-clamp in wood working be careful to not overtighten it. The clamping surface can easily leave a circular impression on the wood. If you need to get it really tight, place a piece of scrap between the clamping surface and your piece.

Furniture clamps (also called bar clamps) often have padded clamping surfaces, so making unwanted impressions on the wood is avoided. These are used for clamping large boards together, usually edge-to-edge.

Clamps can be periodically wiped down with a cloth and oil to keep rust at bay.

=== Drills, Bits, and Braces ===
Drills, Bits, and Braces are used for boring holes in wood. A brace and bit is the "old-style" cordless drill. It is hand-powered. The brace holds the bit, and the woodworker's hand cranks it, inducing a rotation in the bit. To drill a clean hole with either a brace and bit or a drill and bit, hold the bit perpendicular to the board and start drilling. You can start a pilot hole with a nail or a punch first to keep the bit from wandering. There are two ways to prevent tear-out when boring a hole. The first method is to support the board and drill into the supporting material. For this to work, the board and its support must be firmly clamped together. The second method can be used if you have a bit with a point that is much narrower than the hole's diameter (such as a spade bit, a brad-point bit, or a bit with a screw-lead). Using such a bit, drill through the material until the tip comes through the other side. Then turn the board over and place the bit in this hole. Continue drilling toward the center.

=== Power Tools ===
Power Tools should be used with much care. It is difficult to cut a finger off with a hand saw, but a power saw can do this in an instant, and before the careless operator even feels any pain, a severed finger can drop to the floor. Power tools can greatly speed production of wood projects though, so it's certainly worth having them around. Read the owner's manual carefully before operating any piece of power equipment. Pay special attention to safety features, and do not try to defeat them! Pathfinders below the age of 16 should not use power tools. Remember, power tools are not required for woodworking, they only speed it along.

==4. Explain the following joints: ==
=== Butt ===
A butt joint is the simplest of all joints, formed by butting two pieces of wood together and then joining them. But because glue will not hold to end grain, it is a joint that must be held together by mechanical fasteners such as nails or screws.

[[Image:Butt_joint.png|350px|Butt Joint]]

=== Dado and groove ===
[[Image:Dado joint.png|right| Dado Joint ]]
A dado and groove joint is formed by milling a slot (or dado) in one board, and inserting another board into that slot. The width of the dado should be equal to the width of the board that will be inserted into it. The dado is an excellent joint for joining plywood shelves to the upright sides of a bookcase. In this case, the dado should be cut into the side, and the shelf should be inserted into the dado. Such a shelf will support a lot of weight without relying on the strength of a mechanical fastener. A butt joint would likely fail in this situation, with the nail or screw splitting out the top of the shelf.

The dado can also be used in regular lumber as long as the dado runs along the grain - otherwise, any glue used to secure the joint would have to adhere to the endgrain. Plywood presents alternating layers of endgrain and straight grain to all three surfaces of the dado, and there is generally enough straight grain in the joint that gluing it works well. Dado and groove joints can be held together with mechanical fasteners (nails or screws), or without them (assuming enough non-endgrain surfaces in the joint).

=== Dovetail ===
[[Image:dovetail.png|right|300px|Dovetail Joint]]
A dovetail joint is made by making "tails" in one piece of wood, and "pins" in the other. In the diagram here, the tails are made in the board on the left, and the pins are made in the board on the right. This joint is very strong and will only pull apart in one direction. It is often used for making drawers and boxes. When making a drawer, the pins are cut in the drawer front, and the tails are cut into the drawer sides. This will prevent the joint from pulling apart when the drawer is opened. A drawer facing is then glued to the front to hide the joint, or the joint can be modified to hide them inherently (these are called "blind dovetails").

To make the joint, cut the tails first. Lay them out with a bevel gauge, and saw from the edge to the line. Remove the waste with a chisel. Then lay this board on top of the board that will have the pins and line them up. Mark the pins with a knife. Then saw the pins with a dovetail saw (or a backsaw). The waste on either side of the pins can be removed with a saw. The waste between the pins can be removed with a chisel or with a coping saw. Assemble the joint to test it for fit, and pare the joint with a chisel if necessary.

In the illustration, the endgrain is colored orange. When gluing a dovetail joint, don't bother applying any glue to the endgrain surfaces. Note that the top surface of the pins (brown) are not endgrain, nor are the surfaces they mate to on the tails.

=== Dowel ===
[[Image:Dowel_joint.png|right|Dowel Joint]]
A dowel joint is formed by drilling holes in the two pieces to be joined, and inserting dowels (small wooden rods) into these holes. The dowels are coated with glue prior to insertion. This is most commonly done with butt joints and miter joints, as the addition of the dowel greatly increases their strength by providing gluable surfaces to the joint.

The most difficult aspect of making a dowel joint is lining the holes up on the two pieces of wood and making sure that the holes go in at a 90 degree angle. This can be done more easily with the aid of a doweling jig. A doweling jig resembles a clamp with a guide hole drilled into it. It is clamped to the board which will eventually accept the dowel, and the hole is drilled by inserting the bit into the guide. A doweling jig will ensure that the hole is drilled at a consistent distance from the board's facing edge and that it is made at a 90 degree angle. The woodworker is still required to ensure that when multiple holes are used (recommended to prevent the joint from twisting), they are drilled the same distance apart.

=== Lap ===
[[Image:Lap_joint.png|350px|left|Lap Joint]]
A lap joint is made by overlapping two boards. Wood is removed from the joint so that each board contributes about half of the wood in the joint. Lap joints can be made to join boards at a 90 degree angle (as shown), no angle at all (that is, splice two boards into a longer one), or the two boards can form a cross. This joint is ideal when you need to bring two boards together but keep them in the same plane. It is very strong even without mechanical fasteners as there is a lot of gluable surface area in the joint.

The laps can be cut with either a saw, or a with a saw and a chisel. Large lap joints should be cut with only a saw, but they can be trimmed with a chisel. A dovetail saw or a backsaw works well for both cuts.

=== Miter ===
[[Image:Miter_joint.png|350px|right|Miter Joint]]

A 90 degree miter joint is formed by cutting the two boards at a 45 degree angle and joining them. The choice of a miter joint is purely aesthetic. Miter joints are easy to cut with a power miter saw, but difficult to cut by hand. A miter box can help, but the angle of the cut must be very nearly perfect, or the joint will either not be 90 degrees, or it will show a gap. The gap can be eliminated by "kerfing in" the joint. Kerfing in a joint is done by clamping the two pieces together and then running a fine-toothed handsaw down the joint. Ideally, the saw should remove wood from both pieces. This procedure can be repeated until the woodworker is happy with the fit, but keep in mind that every time this procedure is performed, the board gets a little shorter. For this reason, it is best to cut the miter joint first, and then cut the piece to length. If both ends of the board are to be mitered, the board should be cut a little long and then tuned to length by kerfing it in.

Miter joints must be reinforced or they will not hold (once again, endgrain comes into play). Usually the pieces are fastened to some underlying structure so that the miter joint is not subjected to stress, nor is it relied upon for structural integrity. In other cases, the joint itself can be reinforced using dowels (as in a dowel joint) or some similar mechanism.

=== Mortise and Tenon ===
[[Image:Mortise_and_tenon.png|250px|right|Mortise and Tenon]]

The mortise and tenon joint is a strong joint used to join two pieces of wood usually at a 90 degree angle. The mortise is a hole cut into one of the pieces, and the tenon is shaped to fit snugly into this hole. The tenon is usually narrower than the rest of the piece that it is cut into. The joint may be glued, pinned, or wedged to lock it in place.

The mortise is usually cut first, and its width is equal to the width of the chisel used to cut it (see the section on chisels). The tenon is then sized to fit the mortise, and it is cut with a tenon saw, dovetail saw, or backsaw. The first cuts are made along the grain and are called the cheek cuts. The final cuts are made across the grain and are called the shoulder cuts. The tenon can be pared with a chisel to tune the fit.

=== Rabbet ===
[[Image:Rabbet.png|200px|right|Rabbet Joint]]

A rabbet joint is very similar to a dado joint, except that the groove is cut at the edge of the board. This groove is called a rabbet. It is also sometimes called a rebate. A rabbet joint is often used for joining the back to a cabinet or bookcase. It can be glued, held on with mechanical fasteners, or both. The rabbet can be cut in either or both pieces to be joined.

A rabbet joint can be made with a table saw or a router. It can also be made with a rabbet plane. The blade of a rabbet plane comes all the way to the edge of the tool so that it can remove wood from the corner of the rabbet.

==5. Know the characteristics of and how to work with the following: ==
=== Hardboard ===
Hardboard (also called Masonite) is an engineered wood product made by turning wood chips into long fibers by steaming them. These fibers are then heated and pressed into a solid board. Hardboard is sold in 4'x8' sheets of various thicknesses in the United States. It is an extremely stable material, expanding and contracting very little with changes in temperature and humidity. It is highly homogeneous, having no distinct grain. Because of its lack of grain it behaves very differently as compared to regular lumber.

Hardboard has high bending strength, but has very little structural strength, so it cannot be used in many applications where plywood or regular lumber are more suited. It can be used for building arches, and its strength can be improved by laminating several sheets together. Hardboard is often used as drawer bottoms, or as the back of cabinets, etc.

=== Particle Board ===
From [http://www.wikipedia.com Wikipedia], the free encyclopedia.

Particle board (sometimes called chipboard) is a material manufactured from wood particles (for example, wood chips, sawmill shavings, or even saw dust) and a synthetic resin or other suitable binder, which is pressed and extruded. Particle board is very dense, heavy, and flat. It is used as a cheaper and less durable substitute for solid wood or plywood. Particle board is very prone to expansion due to moisture.

Particle board should not be used in applications where it is likely to get wet. It is generally not used in furniture making unless it is covered with a veneer (or in inexpensive furniture, a vinyl covering similar to wallpaper). It is not generally finished with stain, varnish, or paint, as aesthetics are not high on its list of characteristics. It is, however used in the hidden portions of woodworking projects such as drawer backs and sides.

=== Plywood ===
From [http://www.wikipedia.com Wikipedia], the free encyclopedia.

Plywood was the first type of engineered wood to be invented. It is made from thin sheets of wood veneer, called plies, which are stacked together with the direction of each ply's grain differing from its neighbors by 90° (cross-banding). The plies are bonded under heat and pressure with strong adhesives, usually phenol formaldehyde resin, making plywood a type of composite material.

A vast number of varieties of plywood exist, tailored for all manner of conditions and uses. Softwood plywood is usually made either of Douglas fir or spruce, pine, and fir. Decorative plywood is usually faced with hardwood, including red oak, birch, maple, lauan (Philippine mahogany) and a large number of other hardwoods.

Plywood production requires a good log, called a peeler, generally straighter and larger in diameter than that required for processing by a sawmill. The log is peeled into sheets of veneer which are then cut to the desired dimensions, dried, patched and glued together to form the plywood panel. The panel can then be patched, resized, sanded or otherwise refinished, depending on the market it was intended to be sold in.

The most common varieties of softwood plywood comes in three, five or seven plies with dimensions of 4 feet × 8 feet. Each ply is 1/8 inch.

A common reason for using plywood instead of plain wood is because plywood is more stable and because it is less prone to change (shrink, twist or warp). Plywood is stronger than particle board and hardboard, and because the outer layers can be made from fine hardwoods, it is often used in furniture making. It is suitable for natural finishing or painting.

==6. Know at least two ways to finish the edges of plywood. ==

Unfortunately, some layers of plywood often have knots in them, and the knots fall out before the layers are glued together. This leaves a void. In furniture-grade plywood these voids will be confined to the inner layers. In order to finish the edge of plywood, you can either fill these voids with a wood putty, or you can cover the edges with a band of material - typically, a veneer or a thin strip of wood. Some veneers are made expressly for this purpopse, and they come with an adhesive on one side. By heating the veneer, the adhesive is activated. When it cools, the adhesive bonds to the edge of the plywood. If you plan to use a natural finish, banding works best, because wood putties and wood tend to take natural finishes unevenly. This results in a splotchy finish where the wood putty stands out rather than concealing the defect. Either method can be used if you plan to finish with paint.

==7. Demonstrate the proper technique of gluing and clamping wood. ==
The first rule of gluing wood joints is that glue does not stick to end-grain. Most woodworking joints were in fact designed to avoid the application of glue to an end-grain surface. Evaluate your joint first, and find two non end-grain surfaces that will come into contact. After making a test fit, apply glue to one of these surfaces. Spread the glue in a thin layer, being careful to not use too much glue. Then clamp the two pieces together. Use enough clamping pressure so that the pieces are held firmly together, but do not use so much force that all the glue is squeezed out of the joint. Once clamped, the pieces should be left alone until the glue sets. Setting times vary from one glue to the next, so read the instructions on the glue container.

==8. Choose a plan for and complete an article of household furniture, such as a small table, footstool, writing desk, or bookcase. List the materials needed for your project. ==
There are thousands of plans available on the Internet, and many of them can be downloaded for free. Others are offered for a fee. You can also find plans in books and in woodworking magazines (although the magazines tend to have more complex plans). Choose plans that are simple. Although the instructor may be an experienced woodworker, the student is often not. Avoid complicated joints such as dovetails and mortise and tenons. Butt joints, dados, and lap joints are within the reach of a 12 year-old, so steer your Pathfinders to projects that use them. Use lots of pine. Pine is relatively inexpensive, and using it makes it a lot easier to start over. It can be heartbreaking to watch a youngster destroy an expensive piece of wood, and the temptation to salvage it (and thus ruin the project) can be overwhelming. Save complicated projects and expensive hardwoods for after the Pathfinder develops some skill.

[[image:Sm_table_complete.jpg|240px|right|Small Table]]

The table described here has been successfully constructed by a group of Pathfinders ranging from Friend to Guide. It is relatively inexpensive, as seven tables can be constructed from a single sheet of plywood, five 8-foot 2x4's, some plywood banding, 28 1/2" #8 woodscrews, seven dozen 1.5" #8 woodscrews, some flat metal brackets, and some 3/8" dowels. Seven is a good number of Pathfinders for two instructors to handle in this honor. More Pathfinders (or fewer instructors) and it is difficult to give them the attention they'll need to execute the project successfully.

=== Preparations by the Instructor ===
The instructor should rip the 2x4's into 2x2's, and perhaps crosscut them into 30" lengths (although this can be left to the Pathfinder). These 2x2's will make the legs of the table, and the instructor should make sure the legs are square (that is, each side should be 1.5" or 1.25" wide - the exact measurement is immaterial so long as it is the same on all four sides).

[[image:Sm_table_parts.jpg|240px|right|Small Table Parts]]

The instructor should also cut the plywood into squares. For seven tables, 14 12"x12" squares (for the bottom and middle shelves) and 7 14"x14" squares should be made (for the tops). These should be made from furniture-grade plywood with a hardwood veneer. Birch veneer works well for this.

=== Cut the corners ===
The Pathfinder should mark the corners of the shelves by measuring in 1 inch from each corner and drawing a line across the corner. If the shelves are square, this should make a perfect 45° angle. Do not cut the corners off the 14"x14" tabletop. Save the corners, as they can be used to correct a common mistake (discussed below).

=== Notch the legs ===
The pathfinder should then cut two notches in each of the four legs in the three steps shown below:

[[image:Sm_table_cut_legs.jpg|350px|Cutting the Notches]]

'''1:''' Mark a pencil line one inch from the corner edge of the leg. Do this on two adjacent sides.

'''2:''' Measure the width of the plywood and mark where the notches are to be cut with a square. It is better to mark all the legs at the same time, making sure leg bottoms are flush and the notches all line up. Once all the notches have been marked, a notch can be made by cutting two kerfs (saw cuts) through the corner of the leg stopping when the line is reached. You may wish to score the notches with a carton knife before using the saw. Make the first score on the line, holding the knife at a 90° angle. Then make a second score at a steeper angle next to the first score line, but towards the middle of the notch so that the two make a V. Remove wood from the V. This will give you a defined groove for the saw blade to ride in. Pay close attention to ''both'' lines when cutting, and be sure to take the width of the kerf into account when making the cuts. The width of the notch should equal the width of the plywood.

'''3:''' Use a 3/4" chisel and a mallet to remove the wood between the kerfs. Do not try to remove all the wood at once, but rather, remove a quarter inch on the first three passes, and an eighth of an inch on the final passes. Pay attention to the pencil lines.

=== Attach the Shelves===
The next step is to attach the shelves to the legs. This can be done using dowels or screws. In either case, drill holes into the leg from the outside, centered on the notches. Put the shelf into the notch, and drill a hole into it, using the hole in the leg as a pilot. If using dowels, use the same sized bit (sized for the dowel, 3/8" recommended). If using 1.5" #8 screws, use a 1/8" bit, and then counter sink the hole in the leg 1/2" to 3/4" deep. The screws can be covered with dowels or with wood putty (but don't use wood putty unless you plan to paint).

=== Correcting Problems ===
If the notches are too wide, use a chisel to shear a ply off the corners that were removed from the shelves and wedge it beneath the shelf. Note that this is a corrective procedure only - it is much more desirable to cut the notches to the proper width. Using this technique pretty much decides that the table will be finished with paint instead of with a natural finish, but it can still come out looking pretty good. If the notches are not wide enough, use a chisel to widen them a bit. Don't overdo it.

If the notch is too wide to be corrected with a single ply from a corner, discard that leg and start over. That's why the legs are made from 2x4's - you can get six legs from a single 2x4, so each leg will run you about 50 cents (in 2005 anyhow).

Once both shelves have been attached to all four legs, the screws can be covered with dowels (if the screws were countersunk) or with wood putty.

=== Fasten the Top ===
Finally, it is time to add the top. The easiest way to do this is by using flat metal brackets. Look for them in the fastener department of the hardware store. Basically, they should be pieces of steel about 3/8 inch wide and 2 inches long, with holes drilled in either end. At least one of these holes should be countersunk, or they should be countersunk on opposite sides of the bracket.

[[Image:Leg_bracket1-4.png|600px|thumb|1. Bore first hole; 2. Overlap second hole; 3. Connect the channels; 4. Attach the bracket]]

 

Mill a groove into the top of the leg to accept the bracket. This can be done with a 3/4" spade bit or auger. Drill into the endgrain no more than an eighth of an inch, centered on the leg. Drill a second hole overlapping the first, and make sure the edge of the hole extends over the inside corner of the leg top. If necessary, chisel out a channel between the two holes and then lay the bracket in the channel. The brackets should point towards the center of the table top.

Attach the brackets to the legs using 1.5 inch #8 screws. Make sure that bracket is oriented such that the ''other'' hole will be countersunk when a screw is passed through it into the bottom of the tabletop.

Once the brackets are attached, turn the top upside down (choose the best surface for the top), and place the rest of the table on top of it. Center to the best of your ability. The table top is oversized to hide any "unsquareness" of the rest of the table. If the unit will not lay flat on the table top, mark the underside of the tabletop where the screws are touching it. This can be done by daubing a little wood putty on the screw head. Remove the unit and drill a small hole no more than a quarter inch deep into the underside of the table top. It helps to wrap a piece of masking tape around the drill bit at the desired depth so the woodworker can stop when the tape reaches the wood. Replace the unit on the table top again.

Drive screws through the brackets into the underside of the table. Again, use #8 screws, but remember that the table top is only 3/4" thick. Play it safe and use 1/2" long screws.

=== Finishing ===
The only thing that remains is to finish the plywood edges and paint (or use a natural finish). Use veneer banding for this, following the instructions on the label. Trim the edges of the veneer off with a carton knife or a chisel. Sand the table and apply two coats of paint or stain and varnish.

If this is a first-time project, the Pathfinder is likely to achieve better results with paint than with stain and varnish. If painting, go back over the piece and cover all screw holes and imperfect shelf joints with wood putty. Woodworking masters eschew wood putty, but it is appropriate for the novice. Wood putty and paint can cover a multitude of woodworking sins!

=== Leveling ===
If the table needs to be leveled, place it on a flat surface such as a workbench or a table covered with hard board or cheap plywood. Have one of the longer legs hang off the edge while the other three are in contact with the flat surface. Use a saw to cut the bottom of the offending leg off by laying the blade on the flat surface and drawing it into the leg. This '''will''' mar the surface of the table unless a "flush cut" saw is used, but executed properly, it is by far the easiest way to level a table or a chair.

==9. Know and use the proper steps in finishing a wood project with either natural finish or stain. ==
The first step in finishing a wood project is to make sure all the surfaces are smooth. This is most commonly done by sanding the surfaces with sandpaper, starting with rougher paper (80-100 grit) and then progressing though successively finer grits (often to 220 grit). Sanding is only necessary if the surface is not already smooth, and some tools (notably planes and cabinet scrapers) will leave a sufficiently smooth surface so that sanding is unnecessary. In fact, sandpaper was patented in the United States in 1834, and woodworking had been going on for millennia prior to that!

The next step in finishing is to remove all dust and dirt from the surface. This can be done by wiping the wood down with a tack cloth, or with a soft cloth which has been wet with mineral spirits. Tack cloth is a soft cloth that has been treated with various finishing compounds (such as mineral spirits and varnish) so that it is slightly sticky or "tacky." It picks up any wood dust it comes into contact with.

Once the surface has been prepared, it can be stained. This can be done by wiping the stain on with a soft cloth (wear vinyl gloves) or with a paint brush. Read the instructions on the can. Staining wood can even out its color. It generally does not fool an experienced woodworker into thinking pine is really walnut or cherry. Staining is optional.

Once the project has been stained (if staining was desired), it can be coated with a finish such as varnish, polyurethane, or tung oil. The purpose of these finishes is to reduce the absorption of moisture. Some finishes do this better than others. Recall that as wood absorbs moisture, its shape changes, so limiting the amount of moisture the project can absorb is a very desirable thing to do.

These finishes are applied again with either a soft cloth (wear gloves!) or a paint brush. You can also buy finishes in spray cans. Several coats are applied, but remember that it is always better to apply several thin coats rather than a few thick ones. Again, read the instructions on the can. Some finishes require that the product dry completely between coats, and others do not.

Make sure the finish is applied in a dust free environment, and do not stir varnish prior to its application, as this will only introduce bubbles which will appear in the finished product. If you do get bubbles, they can be rubbed out between coats with very fine sand paper or with steel wool. The final coat should not be sanded but should rather be polished with a soft cloth.

==10. Do two of the following: ==
=== Make a project with a door or lid with inset hinges. ===
=== Make a scale model of a house or building with a cutaway view showing the interior detail.===

'''One way to do this is to create a 1:20th scale model that looks much as a real house does before it has siding and a roof put on it'''. Use balsa wood, a sharp razor blade, and balsa glue.

Create a house plan (keep it simple). You may use typical houseplans that are available in Houseplan magazines and books or create your own.

In order to achieve greatest accuracy, it is recommended that you draw out the scale model to full size grid-paper. Make sure to mark all doorways, windows, entries, and stairs.

Determine what balsa wood sizes will represent each of the standard stud sizes.

'''Another option''' is to build a doll house out of wood. These are usually 1:12 scale models, and make a great gifts! Doll House kits are available for sale online.

'''Purchasing the kit or the balsa wood can be rather expensive'''. Talk with the hobby shop in your town before beginning! They'll probably help you make the wisest financial decisions. This would be a great project to work on as a class or unit!

=== Assist in making and/or repairing wooden toys for needy children. ===
Any toys you make can be included in the packages that are often delivered to needy families during the Pathfinder's Can Collecting activity.

[[Image:Toy_tugboat_illustration.png|250px|right|frame|Tugboat]]
'''Tugboat''' 
An easy toy to make is a small tug boat. This can be made from two pieces of scrap wood and a dowel - dimensional lumber (2x4's) works great for this. The bottom piece makes the boat's hull and deck, and the top layer makes the cabin. Cut the hull to shape with a coping saw and smooth with a rasp. Before cutting the cabin to its final dimensions, drill the hole for the smokestack. It's a lot easier to drill into a large piece of wood than it is to drill into a small piece. You could also clamp the cabin in a vise for drilling. If desired, bore the hole at a slight angle (about 5°) so the smokestack tilts back. Glue the smokestack dowel into the cabin, and glue the cabin onto the hull. If you use a waterproof glue such as epoxy, the glue joint will be strong enough to not require further reinforcement. Otherwise, reinforce the cabin/hull joint with screws through the bottom of the hull into the cabin. Make sure the screw is well recessed so that it does not scratch the floor (or table) when the tug is dragged around. Optionally, you can drill a small hole straight down through the deck near the front of the boat, and drill a larger hole into the hull from the bottom so that it meets the small hole. Pass a rope through the hole and tie a knot in it to keep it from pulling through the smaller of the two holes. It would be easier to use an eye screw, but this may present a choking hazard to small children. Sand well, and finish with colorful paint.

'''Car''' 
Another option is to make Pinewood Derby cars. See the instructions in the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Arts and Crafts/Pinewood Derby|Pinewood Derby]] section of the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Arts and Crafts|Arts and Crafts]] chapter of this book.

=== Make a project using dowel, miter, or mortise and tenon joints. ===
=== Make a project using curved cuts, or beveled or rounded edges. ===
==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Welding/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1978|Vocational|General Conference}}

==(Instructor Required) ==
The Welding Honor is perhaps of all the AY honors, the one with the greatest potential to cause injury. '''''Do not attempt to teach yourself how to weld.''''' An experienced instructor is absolutely required for this honor.

==1. Identify all parts of the following: ==
===a. Welding and cutting torches ===

A welding torch has a nozzle with one hole. The torch body mixes oxygen and acetylene, and you get your flame.

A cutting torch has several nozzles arranged in a circle, which emit an oxygen/acetylene mix (like the welding torch). In the center of this circle of nozzlesis a larger hole where only oxygen is emitted. The outer holes heat the steel, and the inner hole cuts.

===b. Oxygen and acetylene gauges and their differences ===

The pressure regulators enable the user to reduce the high pressure contained in the cylinder to a usable working pressure. There are several handling and set up procedures that are important to the overall operation of the pressure regulator. The pressure regulator on each tank shows two things:

* Cylinder pressure (How much gas is in the cylinder)
* Working or line pressure

Installing the regulators

* Before installing the regulator, crack the cylinder valve to clean out any dirt or dust.
* Mount the regulator onto the cylinder.
* Ensure that the oxygen pressure regulator is on the oxygen tank.
* Do not over tighten regulator nut.
* Before opening the cylinder valve ensure that the pressure regulator screws are released (turned out).
* Never use oil or grease on the regulators.
* Frictional heat as a result of high pressures can cause oil to ignite and possibly cause an explosion.

===c. Oxygen and acetylene hoses and their differences ===
Oxygen hoses are green. Acetylene hoses are red.

;Hoses:
The oxy acetylene welding hoses are made out of a durable rubber that is designed to withstand different pressures. There are several things to remember about the hoses:

* Red = Fuel
* Green = Oxygen
* Do not kink hoses
* Keep hoses away from work area
* Wrap hoses when not in use
* Keep hoses away from sparks and hot metal

;Hose fittings:

* Acetylene fitting are notched
* Acetylene fittings are left hand thread
* Oxygen fittings are smooth
* Oxygen fittings are right hand thread
* Both tanks should always be fitted with anti flash back arrestors

===d. Oxygen and acetylene tanks and their differences ===
The oxygen and acetylene cylinders are designed to hold high-pressure gases. There are some important things to remember when using these cylinders:

* Cylinders must always be stood upright and be secured by a chain
* When not in use (regulator mounted) they must always have a valve protection cap in place
* Cylinders should be stored in a cool dry place away from direct sunlight or extreme cold

;Oxygen Cylinders:
* Usually black in colour, smaller in diameter and taller than Acetylene
* 2200 PSI when full
* The cylinder valve must be opened fully (double seated valve) or it could leak!
* You should not run an oxygen tank below 50 PSI.

;Acetylene Cylinders:
* Usually red , large in diameter and short
* 250 PSI when full
* The cylinder valve should only be opened ¼ of a turn.
* The acetylene cylinder should never be laid down as this will result in the gas becoming unstable.
* You should not run an acetylene tank below 50 PSI.

==2. Explain the safe working pressures of oxygen and acetylene, as per your instructor's directions, for various procedures. ==
When welding and brazing with an oxy-acetylene torch, acetylene should be set at 5psi. Oxygen should be set at 5 or 6psi, but no more.

When cutting with an oxy-acetylene torch, acetylene should again be set at about 5psi. Oxygen, however is set much higher, about 25psi, when cutting.

===OXY ACETYLENE START UP PROCEDURE:===

These steps must be followed to ensure safe usage of this equipment.

# Make sure pressure regulator screws are released (turned out) on both tanks.
# Standing to the side of the regulator, Slowly open the oxygen cylinder valve fully
# Standing to the side of the regulator, Slowly open the Acetylene cylinder valve ¼ turn
# With the welding or cutting adjustment valves open, quickly adjust the working pressure to the desired amount

===OXY ACETYLENE SHUT DOWN PROCEDURE:===

After the equipment has been used these steps must be followed to ensure safe storage:

* Close both cylinder valves
* Open the welding or cutting attachment valves to release regulator pressure
* Release pressure regulator adjustment screws
* Wrap up hoses

====PROCEDURE:====

Setting up the torch:

# Make sure the regulator adjusting screws on both the oxygen and acetylene regulators are backed out fully counter – clockwise
# Open the acetylene cylinder valve ¼ to ½ turn
# Open the torch acetylene valve about ½ turn. The acetylene valve lines up with the red hose
# Turn the acetylene regulator adjusting screw clockwise until 5 pounds pressure is read on the low pressure gauge
# Close the torch acetylene valve
# Open the oxygen cylinder valve all the way until the valve stops Stand out of the way of the gauges when opening the oxygen bottle to prevent serious injury if the regulator valve fails
# Open the torch oxygen valve about ½ turn The oxygen valve lines up with the green hose
# Turn the oxygen regulator adjusting screw clockwise until 5 pounds pressure is read on the low pressure gauge
# Close the torch oxygen valve
# Before lighting and using the torch, check the system for leaks
# Close the cylinder valves. If a cylinder gauge shows a pressure drop, there is a leak.
# If a leak is indicated, listen, smell and touch around all fittings and hoses, or use soapy water to find the leak.

====LIGHTING & ADJUSTING:====

*Proper eye protection must be worn (shaded torch welding / cutting glasses)
*Proper non – flammable coveralls must be worn
*Remove butane lighters from pockets

# Put on proper eye protection and protective clothing
# Open the torch fuel valve no more than ½ turn
# Position the tip of the torch down and away from your body and hold the striker in your other hand so only the head of the striker is in front of the torch tip Practice using the striker with the fuel shut off
# Use the striker to light the torch Never use a lighter, matches, or other burning material to light the torch
# Adjust the torch fuel valve until the flame gives off little black smoke
# Slowly open the torch oxygen valve to create a neutral flame

Neutral flame: (equal amounts of oxy/acetylene) has a rounded white inner cone used for fusion welding steel.

Carburizing flame: (less oxygen) has a longer feathered blue inner cone a slightly carbonizing flame is used for brazing.

Oxidizing flame: (excessive oxygen) has a short pointed white inner cone used for special purposes such as brazing with bronze filler rod.

====SHUTTING DOWN:====

# Shut off the torch fuel valve first, which immediately extinguishes the flame
# Shut off the torch oxygen valve
# Close the acetylene cylinder valve
# Close the oxygen cylinder valve
# Bleed the acetylene line by opening the torch acetylene valve until the pressure reads zero on both the high and low pressure gauges (If the torch will be left for more than a few minutes and then reused, both lines must be bled before lighting the torch again)
# Turn the acetylene pressure regulating screw counter – clockwise all the way out
# Close the torch acetylene valve
# Bleed the oxygen line by opening the torch oxygen valve until the pressure reads zero on both the high and low pressure gauges
# Turn the oxygen pressure regulating screw counter – clockwise all the way out
# Close the torch oxygen valve

'''There will be no horseplay.'''

==3. While blindfolded, demonstrate ability to hook up an entire oxyacetylene kit, including tanks, gauges, hoses, and torches, and light the same.** ==
==4. As per your instructor's directions, weld two mild steel test plates (1/8 inch x 1 inch x 8 inches) (0.3 cm x 2.5 cm x 20.3 cm) in horizontal, and vertical positions.==
==5. Use a cutting torch and demonstrate your skill by making one 12 inches (30.5 cm) straight-line cut, one circle cut of at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) in diameter and one 3 inch (7.6 cm) star cut. The cuts are to be made on mild steel plate at least 1/4 inch (0.6 cm) thick. ==
==6. Demonstrate your ability to braze a cast-iron object with at least 1/4 inch (0.6 cm) double bevel butt weld 2 inches (5 cm) long.==

==7. Explain the safety precautions and safety equipment normally used in electric welding in relation to eyes, hands, and exposed skin areas. Why should the tank valves never be oiled? ==

===SAFETY EQUIPMENT===

The correct safety equipment must be used when using the oxy acetylene equipment or electric welding.

* Wear shaded safety glasses
* Use gloves during torch operation and when handling hot metals
* Follow all safety rules for this and all other equipment

===OXY-ACETYLENE SAFETY===

* You must be trained and authorized before using the oxy-acetylene torch
* Make sure you do not have a lighter in your pocket – they can explode!
* Ensure gas bottles are upright and secure at all times
* Do not allow oil or grease to come in contact with hoses or equipment
* Perform all welding and cutting in the welding area – ventilation must be turned on
* Approved goggles and spark resistant clothing must be worn when using the oxy-acetylene torch
* Do not weld or cut a closed container
* Make sure the work area is clear
* Open the cylinder valves slowly – stand to the side!
* Light the torch with the striker – do not use a match or a lighter
* When welding, bend the end of the rod to identify the hot end and to prevent eye injury
* When finished turn off the torch valves, turn off cylinder valves, then go back to the torch and bleed both lines
* Keep the cylinder caps on when not in use

==8. Explain the difference between oxyacetylene and electric arc welding. ==
Oxy-acetylene welding uses two gases in the process of producing a weld. Acetylene, which is the fuel and is the main source of heat, and oxygen, which is a propellant.

Electric arc welding does not use gas to produce a weld like oxy-acetylene welding does. Electric arc welding uses an electric current to produce its welds. A clamp, with the one side of the current flowing through it, is attached to a base plate. Then the another clamp/nozzle, with the other side of the current flowing through it, is held in a hand. A filler rod is then used to complete the circuit and create the heat needed to heat the pieces of metal being joined and melt the filler rod (used to bind the pieces of metal together).

==9. Demonstrate ability to select from an electrode guide the proper amperage and electrode for various types and thicknesses of metal. ==
==10. Demonstrate ability to weld flat, vertical, horizontal, and overhead on (1/8 inch x 1 inch x 8 inches) (0.3 cm x 2.5 cm x 20.3 cm) mild steel test plates. ==

==Note: An instructor is a must. Welding is a very critical and serious skill to learn and is not a home-type course. Welding essentially takes the place of bolts and rivets, and if not properly done, is most dangerous. Example: A trailer hitch not properly bonded, or machinery exposed to the strain of pull or weight, is an invitation to disaster.==

==Note: ** This requirement demonstrates one's skill in working in darkness, such as in an emergency. All acetylene connection threads are left-handed, while all oxygen connection threads are right-handed. ==

==References==
* [http://www.tpub.com/content/construction/14250/ Steelworker, Volume 1], A U.S. Navy Training Manual. As an original document produced by the U.S. government, this publication is in the public domain and has a lot of information that should be incorporated into this text.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Video/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:43Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|Unknown|Unknown|Vocational|South Pacific Division}}

==1. Be familiar with the type of videos available. Know the difference between VHS-C and Video 8 tapes.==
[[Image:VHSC.jpg|thumb|200px|VHS-C tape]]
'''VHS-C''' - [[W:VHS-C|VHS-C ]]is the compact VHS format introduced in 1982 and used primarily for consumer-grade compact camcorders. The format is based on the same videotape as is used in VHS, and can be played back in a standard VHS VCR with an adapter. Though quite inexpensive, the format is largely obsolete even as a consumer standard and has been replaced in the marketplace by digital video formats, which offer smaller form factors and better video quality.

The magnetic tape on VHS-C cassettes is wound on one main spool and used a sort of a gear wheel which moves the tape forward. It can also be moved by hand and so is the spool. This development hampered the sales of the Betamax system somewhat, because the Betamax cassette geometry prevented a similar development.

VHS-C was one of the pioneering formats of the compact camcorder market, and was released to compete with Video8. VHS-C was larger than Video8, but was compatible with VHS tapedecks, making the choice between the two non-obvious, and splitting the market; VHS-C also eventually crowded full-sized VHS camcorders out of the market. A higher quality version of VHS-C was released, based on S-VHS, known as S-VHS-C, that competed against Hi8, the higher quality version of Video8. The arrival on the market of inexpensive S-VHS-C camcorders led to the inclusion on many modern VCRs of a feature known as SQPB, or SuperVHS Quasi-PlayBack, but did not make a significant impact on the market as the arrival of MiniDV as a consumer standard made low-cost, digital, near-broadcast-quality video widely available to consumers, and rendered analog camcorders largely obsolete.

 

[[Image:Video 8 cassette.jpg|thumb|200px|Video-8 tape]]
'''Video8''' - The 8 mm video format refers informally to three related videocassette formats for the NTSC and PAL/SECAM television systems. These are the original [[W:Video8|Video8]] format and its improved successor Hi8 (both analog), as well as a more recent digital format known as Digital8.

Their user-base consisted mainly of amateur camcorder users, although they also saw important use in the professional field.

The format was introduced in 1985, the year that Sony of Japan introduced the Handycam, one of the first Video8 cameras. Much smaller than the competition's VHS and Betamax video cameras, Video8 became very popular in the consumer camcorder market.

 

==2. Identify the following parts on a video camera and know how to use them:==
[[Image:Videocam7b.jpg|thumb|right|300px|Labeled Video Camcorder]]
[[Image:Videocam7a.jpg|thumb|left|300px|Labeled Video Camcorder]]

 

{| border="1" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="5" align="left"
!
* There are many different video cameras and it is likely that no two of them have the controls laid out the same.
* The above is a labeled video camcorder for starters. You should check the manual for your own equipment.
|}

 

===a. Viewfinder===
This is what you look through to see what the video camera is 'seeing'.
===b. Record button===
You press this button to start and to stop recording.
===c. Lens===
The video camera 'sees' through the lens.
===d. Zoom button===
You use this button to zoom in (get a closer view) or zoom out (get a wider view).
===e. Power on/off switch===
This button is the master switch to turn on/off the video camera.
===f. Manual focus and zoom levers/rings===
Some video cameras have a manual focus and/or zoom levers/rings so that you can fine tune the focus.
===g. Tape loading door===
You insert the video tape through this door.
===h. Time lapse switch===
This switch allows you to use the video camera to record short takes (e.g. 5 seconds) every so often.

 

==3. Know what the viewfinder messages mean.==
There are many messages that are seen in the video camera's viewfinder. You should look at the manual that came with your equipment for the unique messages.

Some common messages could include:
* Battery Low : this is the condition where there is little or no charge left in the battery.
* End of Tape : this is the condition where you are getting to the end of the video tape.
* Lens Cover : this is because you did not remove the lens cover on your video camera.
* Pause : this tells you that you are ready to record, ''but not recording yet''.

==4. Identify and change the battery. Know how to charge up the battery and when to replace-recharge the battery. Know how to get the best life from the Ni-cad battery.==
The battery allows you to use your video camera without being connected or wired to a power source. Normally you would use the supplied adaptor which will either charge the battery with the battery still attached to the video camera, or, the battery would be removed an attached to the charger to re-charge the battery.

A Ni-cad battery will get the best life when you keep it fully charged, or, trickle charge (charge a little bit at a time). If it is not going to be used for a long time, it should be discharged down to 40% (although some manufacturers recommend discharging it completely). Your best information would be found in the manual for your equipment.

The [[W:Ni-cad|nickel-cadmium battery]] (commonly abbreviated NiCd and pronounced "nye-cad") is a popular type of rechargeable battery using the nickel hydroxide (NiOH) and metallic cadmium (Cd) as the active chemicals.

The principle advantages of NiCd over other rechargeable types is lower weight for a given quantity of stored energy, good charging efficency, small variation in terminal voltage during discharge, low internal resistance, and non-critical charging conditions.

The abbreviation NiCad is a registered trademark of SAFT Corporation and should not be used to refer generically to nickel-cadmium batteries, although this brand-name is commonly used to describe all nickel-cadmium batteries.

==5. How else can the camera be powered?==
The video camera can also be powered using household electricity. In the photo above (with the labeled parts), you can see a wire leading away from the video camera. An adaptor is attached to the video camera where the battery usually goes, and is provding power to the video camera.

==6. Video a five minute segment then view with your instructor. Discuss your technique including the following and learn how to correct if necessary:==
This is your activity. Here are some comments. Your instructor may have more comments.
===a. Zooming===
Zooming in will get the ''viewer'' closer to the subject. You would do this if there were some detail that the viewer should be able to see. Zooming out will increase the field of view. For example, you might do this to show the relative size of something to something larger. Zooming too fast can sometimes make it difficult to 'view' a video.
===b. Lighting===
Lighting is always important, otherwise the viewer may not be able to see what you are shooting.
===c. Panning===
Panning moves the ''view'' from left to right, or, right to left. If you move too fast, the viewer can experience 'motion sickness'.
===d. Steadiness of camera===
Nobody likes to see a video where everything is jumping and shaking all the time. Keep the video camera steady.

==7. Demonstrate how to set up and use a tripod.==
[[Image:Tabletop tripod002.jpg|thumb|left|100px|Tripod]]
For the most part, the tripod should be level. Some tripods have a leveling bubble to help you.

 

==8. Demonstrate how to edit video using a VCR by editing segment taken for requirement 6.==
Note that most video productions (including amateur productions) are now done digitally rather than with tape. It is far easier to edit video digitally than with an analog VCR, and the results are far superior.

Most digital cameras on the market can also shoot video as can nearly every cell phone on the market. These cameras create files that can be stored on a computer and edited with a wide selection of [[w:Video editing software|video editing software]]. Some may even be included with your computer's operating system.

Here are some links:
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_video_editing_software List of Video Editing software on Wikipedia]
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comparison_of_video_editing_software Comparison of Video Editing software on Wikipedia]

==9. Demonstrate your ability to use titles and design your own by hand or computer.==
Some of the information in Requirement #8 above may also be able to help you with this requirement.

==10. Complete one of the following and show it in a public place. Length of video clip must be 4-7 minutes.==
This is all you. You could take various videos throughout the year and put together a summary to show at the end of the year about what your club has done. Could be a good promotional video. Enjoy!
===a. Object lesson===
===b. Music video clip===
===c. Bible story (dramatized, puppets, acted etc.)===
===d. Nature===
===e. Modern life dilemma===
===f. Advertisement for church program, publication, etc.===

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Upholstery/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|Unknown|Unknown|Vocational|South Pacific Division}}

==1. Know five of the following terms used in upholstery to describe the tools and give their uses: ==
===a. Tack Claw ===
[[Image:Pied de biche tapissier.jpg|thumb|180px|Tack claw]]
A tack claw is a tool used for pulling tacks out of furniture. One end has a handle by which the tool is gripped. The other end has a claw which is wedged underneath the head of the tack. The handle is then either lifted or pushed down, levering out the tack.
{{clear}}

===b. Staple Remover ===
A '''[[W:Staple_knocker|staple knocker]]''' is a tool resembling a screwdriver, used for removing staples and shredded material. It is called a knocker because a hammer can be used to hit the end of it and remove long lines of shorter staples.

===c. Regulator, Mattress Needle ===
[[Image:UpholsteryRegulator.jpg|thumb|right|200px|Upholstery Regulator]]
An '''[[W:Upholstery_regulator|upholstery regulator]]''' is an upholstery tool which smooths irregularities in the stuffing beneath the coverings.

While it looks similar to a needle it is heavier; like needles the regulator comes in various gauges and lengths. It is used to poke through the various layers to adjust the stuffing before the final cover is put in place.

A related tool is the stuffing iron, which is used to push the stuffing into the curves and corners of a piece of furniture; it has a narrow piece of steel with one toothed edge to grab loose stuffing and place it in the hard to reach spots.
<br style="clear:both"

===d. Magnetic Hammer ===
[[Image:Hammer tapissier.jpg|thumb|200px|Magnetic Hammer]]
A magnetic hammer (also called a tack hammer or an upholstery hammer) is a lightweight hammer used for securing upholstery fabric to furniture frames using tacks.

One face of the hammer is magnetized to aid in placement of tacks. Once started, the tacks are driven with the other face. Staple guns have largely replaced tacking as an upholstery technique, except where decorative tacks are used. In the case of decorative tacks, the non-magnetic face of the hammer is often outfitted with a nylon tip so that the tack is not marred as it is driven in place.
{{clear}}

===e. Sharp Knife or “Snap” blade knife ===
[[Image:Utility knife.jpg|thumb|300px|Snap blade knife]]
A snap blade knife is a general-purpose utility knife used for cutting upholstery. When the tip becomes dull, the end of the blade can be snapped off, revealing a sharp, new tip. When the last tip is used, the knife can be refilled with a new blade.

Be careful to properly dispose of the snapped-off tips. They are still sharp enough to pose a danger to anyone who picks it up (either intentionally or not).

{{clear}}

===f. Work Table ===
A work table provides a surface to hold the work at a level that is comfortable for the upholsterer. It should be sturdy and stable.

===g. Industrial Sewing Machine ===
An industrial sewing machine uses a much more powerful motor than a household sewing machine. It also operates much faster and makes more consistent stitches because the parts are precision machined. It is also an order of magnitude more expensive than a household sewing machine.

An industrial sewing machine is needed for upholstery because it is able to sew through heavy material that a household machine would have no hope of accommodating.

Because of its great speed and power, it is important to carefully read the instruction manual for the model of industrial sewing machine before using it. If no manual is available, contact the manufacturer for a replacement.

===h. Sundry Items ===
Sundry items include:
;Tacks: Tacks are used for holding upholstery fabric to the wooden frame of an item of furniture. They can be hidden, or they can be decorative.
;Staples: Staples are much easier to use than tacks, and have largely replaced tacks where they are hidden (such as the underside of a chair or couch).
;Webbing: Webbing is frequently used to form a base that supports a cushion. It is put in place with the aid of a web stretcher.
;Twine: Rather than using thread, upholsterers use twine of various sizes. Number 5 twine is used to lash springs into place. Numbers 3 and 1 are smaller and are used for stitching fabric.

==2. Explain the use of the following items: ==
===a. Webbing ===
Webbing is used in couches and chairs as a base for the seating areas that is both strong and flexible. Many types of outdoor furniture use little more than thin light webbing for the seating areas. Webbing is also used to reinforce joints and areas that tend to flex.

===b. Staples and Tacks ===
Staples and tacks are used for holding fabric in place. Staples are used only where they will be hidden. Tacks are used when the seam will be seen.

===c. Hessian ===
Hessian (also called burlap) is a coarse cloth made of vegetable fibers. In upholstery it is used as an internal layer to hold batting in place. It is also used on the underside of furniture. Hessian is a very strong cloth and is used as a support cloth and as a liner.

===d. Buttoning Cord or Waxed Flax ===
These items are used where very strong twine is needed, such as for holding buttons in place. The wax on the twine helps the twine stay in place as it is tightened.

===e. Calico ===
Calico is a textile made from unbleached, and often not fully processed, cotton. It may contain unseparated husk parts, for example. The fabric is less coarse and thick than canvas or denim, but owing to its unfinished and undyed appearance, it is still very cheap.

===f. Fibre ===
===g. Flock ===
Flocking is a type of texture applied to a surface.

"Flocking" is a decoration process that enhances the way a wide variety of products are experienced by making ordinary surfaces seem far more magical and special. "Flocking" is the process of depositing millions of little individual cut fiber particles (called "flock") onto the surface of an article for the purpose of increasing its value in terms of the tactile sensation, aesthetics, color and appearance, and/or a wide variety of other functions--such as insulation, slip-or-grip friction, etc.

===h. Foam Sheeting ===
===i. Glues ===
===j. Back Tacking Strip. ===
==3. Name two types of material used for upholstery. ==
==4. Explain how to fit the top cover to a lid. ==
==5. What is the name of the material used for the base of lounges and the base of your box etc., and what is its purpose? ==
==6. Name two methods of attaching covers to chairs. ==
==7. Complete a or b: ==
===a. Ottoman ===
===b. Toybox ===
==8. Complete a Feature Panel.==

==References==
* ''Upholstery: A Complete Course : Chairs, Sofas, Ottomans, Screens and Stools'' By David James, published by Sterling Publishing Company, Inc., 1999; ISBN 1861081189, 9781861081186
* [http://www.evenfallstudios.com/woodworks_library/furniture_upholstery_for_schools_1919.pdf Furniture Upholstery for Schools] is a book published in 1919. It is now in the public domain.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Typewriting/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1929|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Show how to clean the type or element properly and change ribbon on a type writer.==
:'''Clean the type or element'''
:* There is/was a fuzzy pink material that you fed into the typewriter and then typed each key several times to clean the type/element.
:* You could dab alcohol on the type/element and brush off the type/element using an old toothbrush.
:* You could use a toothpick to clean the type/element individually, especially to clean out the center of some type/elements like: q, R, o, O, p, P, a, A, d, D, b, B, and some of the other keys.

:'''Change the ribbon'''
:* Some typewriters came with a single spool of ribbon. You would have to open the cellophane pack, put the spool on the spindle, thread the ribbon through the guides and in the ''strike'' area, and catch the ribbon on the take-up spool. Wind the spool(s) somewhat to take up the slack, close it all up, and go wash your hands.
:* Some typewriters came with the ribbon in an enclosed cartridge, so all you had to do was to take out the old/spent cartridge and insert the new ribbon cartridge.

==2. Know the difference between a fabric and a carbon ribbon.==
:*A '''fabric ribbon''' is basically a ribbon of cloth that was soaked (impregnated) with ink and can be re-used until all of the 'ink' is depleted.

:*A '''carbon ribbon''' is basically a 'single use' ribbon. When the typewriter keys struck the ribbon, it transfers the carbon from the ribbon to the paper, and the ribbon now has no carbon (ink) there. Many of us were resourceful, and re-used the carbon ribbon until no more carbon was left.

==3. Identify the following parts of the typewriter and know their function:==
[[Image:Olivetti Lettera 22 by LjL.jpeg|thumb|200px|Typewriter]]
===a. Frame ===
:The ''type'' or ''elements'' and the ''keys'' are attached to the FRAME. The ''shift'' keys moves the FRAME so that the ''upper'' or ''lower'' case letters can be typed.

===b. Keyboard ===
:These are those 'keys' with the letters on them - the Q, W, E, R, T, Y, ...
:Depending on the typewriter you have (if you can find one), there are 26 alphabet keys and some number keys (picture on the right shows only eight - 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9), comma, parentheses, period, and other useful keys. The lowercase "L" was used for one (l) and uppercase "o" was used for zero (O).
===c. Space bar ===
:The wide key in the center (left-right) on the bottom row (closest to you).
===d. Backspace key ===
:This key moves the carriage one position to the left (i.e. backwards, therefore, ''back''space).
===e. Shift keys and lock ===
:The SHIFT keys are on the bottom left and right (sometimes only on one side) that moves the frame up or down so that the CAPITAL letters are typed instead of lower case. The SHIFT LOCK key may also be on one side only and mechanically locks the frame into the UPPERCASE position.

===f. Platen ===
:The roller used in typewriters (and friction-feed printers) to hold the paper in position for the typebars or print head.
===g. Impression control===
:This controlled how soft or hard the typewriter key(s) would hit the paper.
===h. Margin stops ===
:The MARGIN STOPS limited how far you can go to the left or right. When using the CARRIAGE RETURN, the carriage would stop on the left margin stop, which is your left margin (and where you started to type for each line). You would get a ''bell'' shortly before the right margin stop so that you could finish up your word and use the carriage return to get to the next line to continue.
===i. Paper release===
:The PAPER RELEASE ''releases'' the paper from the PLATEN so that you did not have to turn the platen to remove the paper.

===j. Leverline-space lever===
:(maybe the question was supposed to be '''line-space lever''' since there is no mention of the ''carriage return lever'')

:A LINE-SPACE LEVER is otherwise known as a ''carriage return lever''. This 'lever' returns the carriage (and your paper) to the leftmost margin for you to start a new line. You can also use the carriage return lever to advance the paper (and go up, or skip) a line.

===k. Line-finder control===
:Not sure if this is related to the CARDHOLDER where there is usually a horizontal line on the clear plastic, so that you can find the line you want to type on and can correctly position the paper so that you type on the right ''line''.

===l. Paper centering scale===
:There is a guide on the side of the carriage. This guide has markings for different ''widths'' of paper. You would move this guide/scale to the width of your paper (8.5-inch, 11-inch, etc.) and when you aligned your paper to this guide/scale, your paper would be ''centered'' on the platen.

:''(I believe that is only on the typewriters where the carriage did not actually move - i.e. the electric typewriters, where the typing head/element moved, instead of the carriage)''.

===m. Cardholder===
:Paper is more flexible than card stock. The ''cardholder'' is the clear plastic on both sides of the strike area that holds cardstock ''back against the platen'' so that it does not lean forward too much because it is bent/rolled around in the platen.

===n. Paper bail lever===
:The ''paper bail'' is a horizontal bar across the platen with a number of small rollers to hold down the paper. The PAPER BAIL LEVER was on one side of the carriage which ''lifted'' this ''paper bail''.

===o. Pitch selection lever===
:A modern advance in technology introduced selectable "pitch" so that the typewriter could be switched among pica ("10 pitch", or 10 characters per inch) and elite ("12 pitch"), in one document.

:''(This is also in 'newer' typewriters that were usually electric)''.

===p. Margin release===
:The MARGIN RELEASE allowed typing ''beyond'' the right MARGIN STOP so that if you had one or two letters to finish the word, you could do that.

==4. Know how to set tabs for tabulation. Properly type a tabulated page with at least four columns.==
:See Wikipedia about [[W:Tab_stop|tab stops]].

:A tab stop on a typewriter is a location where the carriage movement is halted by mechanical gears. Tab stops are set manually, and pressing the tab key causes the carriage to go to the next tab stop.

:To ''set'' a tab stop, you would advance the carriage to each position where you want the TAB key to stop, and press the ''tab set'' key. When you are typing, you would use the TAB key to advance the carriage to the TAB STOP, type the information, and press the TAB key to advance to the next tab stop.

:For example, you may want to create table data:

Trains Farm Station Suburban Station City Center
------ ------------ ---------------- -----------
Route101 06:30 am 07:00 am 07:30 am
Route102 09:30 am 10:00 am 10:30 am
Route202 12:30 pm 01:00 pm 01:30 pm

:So, you would set the tab stops at the first position for each column, and press the TAB key as you finish the information in each column to quickly advance to the start of the next column.

Tab stop Tab stop Tab stop Tab stop
| | | |
v v v v
 
Trains Farm Station Suburban Station City Center
------ ------------ ---------------- -----------
Route101 06:30 am 07:00 am 07:30 am
Route102 09:30 am 10:00 am 10:30 am
Route202 12:30 pm 01:00 pm 01:30 pm
 
^ ^ ^
| | |
Press TAB key when you finish the text to advance

==5. Show how to center information horizontally and vertically on paper.==
:'''Center information horizontally'''
:*Count the number of spaces that the paper can contain from left to right (example: 80).
:*Count the number of letters for the line you are centering (example: 60).
:*Subtract the 60 from the 80, which results in 20 (for this example).
:*Divide the result (20) by two, which results in ten (10) (for this example).
:*''You would start your typing TEN spaces from the left side of the paper''.

:'''Center information vertically'''
:*Count the number of lines that the paper can contain from top to bottom (example: 66)
:*Count the number of lines you want to type on the paper (example: 50)
:*Subtract the 50 from the 66 which results in 16 (for this example)
:*Divide the result (16) by two, which results in eight (8) (for this example).
:*''You would advance the paper EIGHT lines down from the top before you start typing''.

:'''You have to do BOTH of the above to center information HORIZONTALLY and VERTICALLY'''.

:''Through trial and error, you will learn that there are half steps and other neat stuff you can do to get the information as centered as possible''.

==6. Show how to construct block and indented style letters.==
:In the '''block form''', everything starts on the left margin.

Al Dubewe
123 Main Street
Anytown, State 12345
 
May 22, 1901
 
Bigman Oncampus
Chief Bottlewasher
Antique Typewriter Company
1616 Pennsylvania Avenue
Mytown, Yourstate 99999
 
Dear Bigman Oncampus,
 
This is a letter in block form. No lines are indented. Your name and contact
information is above and on the left, as is the date.
 
A new paragraph simply skips a line.
 
And then we have the closing paragraph here.
 
Sincerely,
 
''Your Signature''
 
Your name
Your title

:In the '''indented form''', you would indent each paragraph.

Al Dubewe
123 Main Street
Anytown, State 12345
 
May 22, 1901
 
Bigman Oncampus
Chief Bottlewasher
Antique Typewriter Company
1616 Pennsylvania Avenue
Mytown, Yourstate 99999
 
Dear Bigman Oncampus,
 
In the indented form, each paragraph is indented. Again, your name and
contact information is at the top, and either centered, or indented on the
right side.
Each new paragraph is indented.
 
Sincerely,
 
''Your Signature''
 
Your name
Your title

==7. Operate a typewriter at a speed of forty words a minute on new material for five minutes with no more than five errors.==
:Practice makes perfect. This is your opportunity to show off what you have learned. Enjoy!

==Historical Notes==
''Typewriting'' was one of the first AY honors, being introduced in 1929. It was discontinued in 1956 and then reintroduced as an antique honor in (anyone know when???).

==References==
* http://staff.xu.edu/~polt/typewriters/
* [http://www.typingtest.com/default.asp Online Typing Test]
* [http://homepage.mac.com/sljohnson/typewriter/hermes/Hermes30308XX.html Labelled Hermes typewriter]
* [http://groups.yahoo.com/group/TYPEWRITERS/ Yahoo! Groups for Typewriters]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Teaching/Answer Key 2

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1944|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. What education is needed for teaching the following: a. Elementary school, b. Secondary school, c. College==
The requirements necessary to become a teacher vary dramatically from country to country, and in the United States, it varies from state to state. In general, a four year bachelors degree is required to teach elementary school, though often there is no direct "degree" in elementary education. Rather, the education certification is the "minor" one earns while receiving a bachelors' degree. If one is planning to teach in secondary school, the teacher often receives a degree in the subject of interest, and certification (whether denominational and/or state), as a minor or fifth year of education. Both elementary and secondary certifications require student teaching, which is either one-quarter or one-semester in length, depending on the program.

The path to becoming a college professor is much more varied. College professors eventually earn a doctorate in the area of their particular interest and giftedness. However, they may get that degree immediately after they finish a bachelors' or masters' degree, or years later either before they began teaching at a college level or after they have begun their professorship (but usually before they become full professors). College professors are specialists in their field of study, which means they have often been professionals in that field for a number of years prior to entering the college teaching scene.
==2. What is re-certification?==
Recertification is when you have someone’s certification or qualification renewed.
Teacher recertification is the way that teachers keep "current" in the issues that affect their classrooms, their teaching style, and most importantly, their students. Most students think that their teachers get the summer off. In reality, most teachers spend a large portion of each summer attending summer school, taking additional classes that will help them be better teachers. In most cases, re-certification requirements require that a teacher earn a certain number of college credits every three years.

There are a variety of certifications and endorsements available to teachers. In the SDA teaching system, a teacher begins with a basic certification, after three years and some classes and tests, a teacher may receive a standard certification. After a significant number of years and education (usually a masters' degree) a teacher is eligible to receive a professional certification.

==3. Interview at least two teachers with the following questions:==
*'''a. Why did you choose to become a teacher?'''
*'''b. What part of teaching do you like the best?'''
*'''c. What part of teaching do you like the least?'''
*'''d. What do you do to get ready for a school year?'''
*'''e. What do you do to get ready for a school day?'''
*'''f. What teacher-related activities do you do after school is out each day?'''
*'''g. What are some qualities of a good teacher?'''
*'''h. What are the responsibilities and duties of a teacher?'''

When interviewing a teacher, please keep the following tips in mind:

1. Teachers love to tell stories, and love to spend time with people... be prepared to listen!

2. Because teachers love people, they often have a hard time saying "no" or "could we do the interview later?" even when they are really busy and have lots of demands on their time. So, be polite and alert to what might be going on in the teacher's life and try to find a time not too near test week, a holiday, or the beginning or end of a term.

3. Take good notes. Teachers love to see that you care enough to write it down!

4. If your selected teacher is okay with it, record your interview on an audio or video device. This will allow you to go back and "review" what you've learned from the interview.

5. Don't limit yourself to this list of interview questions. Get your heart involved in the interview, and learn what you can about the teacher and what it is like to be one. This is a special one-on-one opportunity you have with a special person. Make the most of it!

==4. Explore the Bible and the book Education by Ellen G. White to learn what teaching methods Jesus used. Present a three-minute oral report on what you learned.==
The Bible can be searched online at http://www.biblegateway.com. The Ellen White writings can be viewed and searched online at http://www.whiteestate.org/search/search.asp

==5. If you are 16 years old or younger, do the following for a minimum of 40 minutes per week for three weeks.==
*'''a. Assist a teacher in designing and preparing a bulletin board.'''
*'''b. Assist a teacher in preparing learning aids.'''
*'''c. With the supervision of a teacher, teach a child or class at least one concept.'''
==6. If you are older than 16 years, do three of the following:==
*'''a. Teach an adult's or children's Sabbath School class for a minimum of six weeks.'''
*'''b. Teach in one day in each department of Vacation Bible School.'''
*'''c. Teach two Honors from the Honors Handbook.'''
*'''d. Assist in teaching requirements for one of the AY classes, culminating in investiture.'''
*'''e. Teach at least one year in an elementary or secondary school or in a college.'''

==Historical notes==
When the original Honor for Teaching was accepted in 1944, it was for adult Master Guides and had only one requirement: "Have five years of professional teaching experience on the elementary, secondary, or college level."- Junior Missionary Volunteer Handbook, revision of 1957.

Many Honors have grown and changed over the years. Today we focus on development that allows our youth to participate in and earn any Honor.

==About the Author==
{{:User:Pathfinders/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Small Engines/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1975|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Describe the design and operation of the two-cycle engine and the four-cycle engine. ==
The four-cycle engine is easier to understand, so it is presented here first. Once the four-cycle engine is understood, it is easier to understand the two-cycle engine.
=== Four-cycle Engine===
[[Image:4-Stroke-Engine.gif|right|Four-cycle engine]]
A four-cycle engine is so named because it makes four strokes to generate power. These strokes are as follows:
# '''Intake Stroke:''' During this stroke the piston moves down in the cylinder, which creates vacuum, drawing air through the carburetor, and sending the mixture of fuel and air into the cylinder. The fuel and air enters through the intake valve which opens at the beginning of this stroke.
# '''Compression Stroke:''' Once the fuel and air have been drawn into the cylinder, the intake valve closes and the piston returns towards the engine's head. This compresses the fuel.
# '''Power Stroke:''' When the piston reaches the top of the cylinder (just before Top Dead Center or TDC), the spark plug fires, igniting the compressed fuel and air mixture and causing an explosion. This explosion causes the gases to expand which powers the piston downwards again. This is where the engine's power comes from.
# '''Exhaust Stroke:''' When the piston reaches the bottom of the cylinder, the exhaust valve opens, and as the piston returns to the top of the cylinder again, the exhaust gases are pushed out. When the piston reaches the top again, the four cycles are ready to repeat.

=== Two-cycle Engine===
[[Image:Two-Stroke_Engine.gif|right|Two-cycle engine]]

'''Power and Exhaust Stroke:''' In a two-cycle engine, the spark plug fires every time the piston reaches the top of the cylinder. This is the beginning of the power and exhaust cycle. As in the four cycle engine, the spark plug firing causes the compressed air/fuel mixture in the cylinder to explode, and the expanding gases drive the piston downward. As the piston goes down, it compresses the air/fuel mixture beneath the piston inside the crankcase. The crankcase is the area beneath the piston, and the cylinder is the area above the piston. When the piston nears the bottom of this stroke, it uncovers an exhaust outlet (port) and it also uncovers a passage between the crankcase and the cylinder. The compressed air-fuel mixture in the crankcase then rushes through this passage into the cylinder, forcing the exhaust gases out of the cylinder through the exhaust port. Some of the air/fuel mixture is also forced out the exhaust outlet, and this unfortunately decreases the engine's fuel efficiency and increases its pollution output. The piston's head is shaped in such a way as to minimize this waste, but it does not entirely eliminate it.

'''Intake and Compression Stroke:''' After the piston reaches the bottom of the stroke, it begins traveling upwards again, compressing the air/fuel mixture that rushed into the cylinder from the crankcase during the previous stroke, and simultaneously drawing more air and fuel into the crankcase. By the time the piston reaches the top of the cylinder, the air/fuel mixture is very highly compressed - much more compressed than it was in the crankcase. Just before the piston reaches the top of the cylinder (TDC), the spark plug fires, beginning the cycle over again. As soon as the air/fuel mixture is ignited, and the piston begins to move down, the pressure change in the crankcase closes the intake valve, which is located in the side of the crankcase, underneath the carburetor. On most 2 cycle engines, a reed valve is used, which is simply a piece of thin spring metal that acts as a one way valve.

Since the crankcase in a 2 cycle engine is used as part of the intake system, it can't be filled with oil like a 4 cycle, so another way to provide oil to the engine has to be used. If adequate oil wasn't provided, the engine would soon get so hot that it would begin tearing itself up, fuse together and destroy itself. This is solved by mixing special oil into the fuel before it is put in the tank. You must use oil labeled for 2 cycle engines, or you will ruin the engine. The normal ratio specified by engine manufacturers is usually between 16/1 and 50/1 (50 parts of fuel to 1 part of oil) depending on the engine. The newer the engine, the higher the ratio (less oil) usually is. On some engines, outboard boat motors especially, Oil Injection is used, where oil from a separate tank is injected into the gasoline just before the carburetor. This results in a cleaner burning engine. Since the oil is burned, this unfortunately increases the pollution levels generated by two-stroke engines as compared to a four-stroke engine.

==2. Name the parts of the two-cycle engine and tell what each part does. ==
#'''Spark Plug:''' The spark plug produces an electrical spark igniting the air/fuel mixture as the piston reaches the top of the cylinder.
#''' Piston:''' The piston travels up and down inside the cylinder. Its downward motion is propelled by an explosion of air and fuel ignited by the spark plug.
#''' Rod:''' The rod connects the piston to the crankshaft.
#'''Crankshaft:''' The crankshaft converts the piston's up-and-down motion into rotary motion and transfers the engine's power to the outside of the engine.
#'''Cylinder:''' The cylinder is the space inside the engine block in which the piston moves. Combustion occurs at the top of the cylinder.
#'''Crankcase:''' The crankcase is the cavity in the engine block beneath the cylinder, and is where the crankshaft is. This is where fuel is drawn into the engine prior to being forced into the cylinder.
#'''Intake Port:''' The intake port is the passage-way between the crankcase and the cylinder.
#'''Intake Valve:''' The intake valve opens to allow the air/fuel/oil mixture to enter the crankcase during the piston's up-stroke, and closes to prevent its escape, and cause it to pressurize during the piston's down-stroke.
#'''Exhaust Port:''' The exhaust port is a hole in the cylinder wall through which the burnt fuel (exhaust) is expelled.
#'''Flywheel:''' The flywheel is a mass attached to the crankshaft. It preserves the engine's momentum, keeping the crankshaft turning between the explosions in the combustion chamber. It also has a magnet in one side, which passes by the magneto, generating the electricity to fire the spark plug.
#'''Magneto:''' The magneto sits next to the flywheel, and has a coil that acts like a generator when the magnet in the flywheel passes it. In older engines, the power from the magneto coil is switched by points, to control the timing of the spark. On newer engines, it uses electronics to control the spark, by sensing where the magnet on the flywheel is.
#'''Fuel Filter:''' The fuel filter captures dirt in the fuel, preventing it from entering the carburetor.
#'''Carburetor:''' The carburetor is the device that mixes the fuel and air together prior to its being transferred into the engine.

==3. List four basic fuels used in small engines, and explain their use. ==
#'''Gasoline''' is the most common fuel for small engines, especially those found on lawnmowers, snowblowers, tillers, and other garden equipment.
#'''Gasoline/oil mixture''' is used in two stroke engines. The ratio of gas to oil is usually in the range of 16:1 to 50:1. Two stroke engines are often found on smaller items such as chain saws and weed trimmers.
#'''Diesel''' fuel is sometimes used in larger "small" engines, such as those found on riding mowers, small tractors, or electric generators.
#'''Nitromethane''' is used for ''very'' small engines, such as those that power Radio Controlled model airplanes.

==4. Show care and safety in fuel handling and storage. ==
References: [http://retail.petro-canada.ca/en/formyhomelifestyle/188.aspx Petrol Canada]

#Store fuel only in government-approved containers.
#Do not leave it in a car or in the back of a truck when filling it - place it on the ground. This will prevent the build-up of static electricity which can ignite the fuel.
#After fueling an engine, wipe up any spilled fuel, and allow any remains to evaporate before starting the engine.
#Always move the engine at least 10 feet from where you filled it, and the gas can before starting it.
#Never add fuel to, or open the filler cap on or near a running engine.
#Do not smoke or allow anyone to smoke within 50 feet of an open fuel tank.
#Do not fill the container more than 90-95% full to allow room for expansion.
#Do not store a fuel container in the trunk of a car, in direct sunlight, or near an open flame or source of sparks.
#Keep the fuel nozzle in constant contact with the container when filling it. Keep the container's nozzle in constant contact with the fuel tank when adding fuel to the engine.

==5. Describe three types of ignition systems. ==
Material for this section was adapted from the Wikipedia article on [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ignition_system Ignition Systems]
===Glow plug ignition===
Glow plug ignition is used on some kinds of simple engines, such as those commonly used for model aircraft. A glow plug is a coil of wire (made from nichrome normally) that will glow red hot when an electric current is passed through it. This ignites the fuel on contact, once the temperature of the fuel is already raised due to compression. The coil is electrically activated for engine starting, but once running, the coil will retain sufficient residual heat on each stroke due to the heat generated on the previous stroke. Glow plugs are also used to aid starting of diesel engines.

===Magneto system===
The simplest form of spark ignition is that using a magneto. The engine spins a magnet (normally cast into the outer edge of the flywheel) past a coil, and also operates a contact breaker called "points", interrupting the current and causing the voltage to be increased sufficiently to jump a small gap. The spark plugs are connected directly to the magneto coil. Magnetos are not used in modern cars, but because they generate their own electricity they are often found on small engines such as mopeds, lawnmowers, snowblowers, chainsaws, etc. where there is no battery, and also in aircraft piston engines.

===Battery Ignition===
Battery ignition systems are very similar to the magneto ignition system, except that electricity is drawn from a battery rather than being induced by rotating a magnet past a coil. The battery is recharged by the engine's alternator. Battery systems are capable of delivering sparks to multiple cylinders which are selected by a rotor in the distributor. The advantage of a battery ignition system is that the timing of the spark may be adjusted to increase the engine's efficiency based on how fast it is turning. Older battery ignition systems used breaker points (often referred to as the "Points") which were opened and closed by a cam run off of the crankshaft to control the timing of the spark. The shortcoming of this system was that the timing stayed the same for all engine speeds, but the engine needs different timing for high speed than at idle. To make up for this, various engines used various systems to adjust the timing, such as vacuum and centrifugal advance, which always had problems. Now almost all engines use Electronic Ignition, which has a sensor on the engine that tells the electronics where the engine is, and how fast it is going, and adjusts the timing accordingly.

==6. Explain why gasoline is an improper cleaning fluid. ==
Gasoline is extremely flammable and dangerous to work with. It is also a carcinogen (cancer-causing agent), so prolonged contact with it should be avoided. It can also damage plastic parts. Gasoline left on parts can burst into flame at the slightest provocation, causing an engine fire. It also has many additives, some of which stay on the part after you clean it. They also soak into your bloodstream.

==7. List two acceptable cleaning fluids for small engines. ==
'''Mineral Spirits''' are often used for cleaning parts. Soaking parts in mineral spriits removes oil and grease without the need for scrubbing. Once the parts are removed from the bath, the mineral spirits quickly evaporate.

'''Environmentally Friendly Alternatives:''' There are many degreasers on the market today, and many of them are billed as "environmentally friendly." Examples include Simple Green, and various citrus-based cleaners containing [[w:en:limonene|limonene]] such as Citrus King, and Orange Power. These cleaners do require scrubbing, but they are all biodegradable.

==8. List and tell how three basic lubrication systems operate. ==
*'''Splash:''' In a splash lubrication system, dippers on the crankshaft are repeatedly submerged and lifted out of the oil in the oil pan. This happens as the crankshaft turns. When the dippers emerge from the oil bath, oil is splashed all about the inside of the chamber where it finds its way to the pistons, rods, and other moving parts. Channels are milled in the crankshaft to direct oil flow from the dippers to the bearings in the crankshaft, as it is vital that these receive plenty of lubrication.

*'''Pressurized:''' In a Pressurized lubrication system, an oil pump sucks oil from the oil pan and forces it through a filter and then on through a system of passageways drilled into various parts of the engine. These passageways are called ''galleries.'' The galleries open to spurt the oil onto critical components such as the bearings. Galleries are also drilled from the main block and from there into the crankshaft's main bearing. This connects to another gallery drilled into the crankshaft itself. The crankshaft gallery supplies oil to the connecting rod bearings.

*'''Combination Splash/Pressure:''' As the name suggests, a Combination Splash/Pressure lubrication system is a combination of the two systems described above. The connection between the rod and the piston, as well as the cylinder walls, are lubricated using the splash method. The main crankshaft bearings, as well as the camshaft, rocker arms, Etc. are lubricated by the pressurized system.

*'''Dry Sump:''' In a Dry Sump lubrication system, there is no oil in the oil pan. It is all stored in a pressurized reservoir, and then fed to the engine by the pump. Galleries are drilled in the crankshaft just as in the Pressurized system. But these galleries are also connected to galleries drilled in the connecting rod, and then through the pistons themselves. Oil is squeezed through these galleries where it spills out onto the cylinder wall.

'''Reference:''' [http://www.tpub.com/content/construction/14264/css/14264_242.htm Integrated Publishing]

==9. List in order the steps of a general trouble-shooting procedure. ==
Remember the acronym '''FAST''' - '''F'''uel, '''A'''ir, '''S'''park, and '''T'''iming.

*'''Fuel:''' Make sure fuel is getting into the combustion chamber. The most obvious thing is to make sure the engine is not out of gas. Then check the fuel lines, making sure they are in good shape and actually connected to what they should be connected to. If the engine is flooded (that is, it has too much fuel in the carburetor), let it sit for a while, and then try starting it again. If the engine has a fuel pump, make sure it's operating. Check that the filter is not clogged. A very common problem with small engines, especially after they have been sitting for a while, is for the carburetor to get clogged, or have the diaphragms get old and stiff. A normal carb is not very difficult to dissemble and clean, and rebuild kits can be obtained for a few dollars and will often solve the problem if you are still having problems after you check everything else. If all of these check out, move on to the next stage in the acronym, which is '''air.'''

*'''Air:''' Make sure the choke is adjusted properly. On an engine with a manual choke, close the choke all the way and open up the throttle. Then try to start it. If it doesn't start after a couple of pulls, open the choke halfway and try again. When the engine starts, open the choke over the next few seconds until the engine runs smoothly. If it still won't start, check that the air filter is not clogged.

*'''Spark:''' Check that you have spark, and that it is a good strong blue spark. You can use a spark tester, unscrew the sparkplug and hold the outer threaded part against the metal of the engine as you crank the engine and watch for a spark, or just hold the end of the spark plug wire 1/8" to 1/4" inch away from the metal of the engine as you crank the engine. Be careful not to touch the metal tip! The shock will really hurt, and it could cause serious injury, especially if you have a pacemaker. If it is an older style engine with points, you should check them. After a while, they can get dirty or corroded, or just wear away. They are often under the flywheel. Electronic ignition engines can have the module burn out. Or you could have a loose wire somewhere, or the kill switch could be shorted.

*'''Timing:''' On small engines, you normally can't adjust the timing, but that doesn't mean it can't be wrong! It is common on certain engines (Briggs and Stratton for instance) for the key holding the flywheel to the shaft to shear, (they are designed to do this to protect other parts of the engine, kind of like a fuse), and when it shears, the flywheel turns on the shaft. so you will still get a spark, but it won't be at the right time. so you should check the flywheel is in the correct position on the crankshaft. Engines that use a point style ignition system sometimes have an adjustment on the points, which are usually under the flywheel.

==10. Demonstrate that you can overhaul, inspect, and properly tune any small engine. ==
Consult with a Qualified Person for this part!
Don't just tear into the family lawnmower, and hope you can get it all back together. You are likely to end up with "extra" parts left over when you are done! (which is not a good thing)

==11. Demonstrate that you know how to test and clean spark plugs and glow plugs. ==
A toothbrush can be a good tool to clean spark plugs. (Don't use it to brush your teeth afterwards though!) You also need to use a spark plug gap gage, or a feeler gage to set the spark plug gap according to the engine specs. When cleaning them, you just need to get all the carbon and soot buildup off. These days, sparkplugs are usually just replaced if they are full of crud.

==References==
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Shorthand/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1929|Vocational|General Conference}}

{|border=1 width=75% cellspacing=1 cellpadding=5 align=center
|
''Having taken (and passed) Gregg Shorthand in (the equivalent of) eighth grade
I am of the opinion that this honor should have been marked '''Instructor Required'''.
As such, I'm leaving this as zero percent complete because in my opinion, it is only
teachable by a versed instructor. I wouldn't change anything below.'' ~lw
|}

==1. Be able to take dictation on new material at 80 words per minute for three consecutive minutes and transcribe accurately the notes taken.==
[[Image:Grggsmry.gif|right]]
There are many forms of shorthand, but the one most commonly used in the United States is ''Gregg Shorthand''. This section presents the ''Century Edition''.

Gregg Shorthand is a phonetic writing system, which means it records the sounds of the speaker, not the English spelling. It uses the ''f'' stroke for the ''f'' sound in ''funnel'', ''telephone'', and ''laugh''. All silent letters are omitted. The image on the right shows the strokes of Gregg Shorthand Simplified. The sounds are represented in this image by the ''International Phonetic Alphabet''. The system is written from left to right and the letters are joined.

*''Sh'' (and ''zh''), ''Ch'', and ''J'' (or ''Dzh'') are written downward.
*''T'' and ''d'' are written upward.
*''X'' is expressed by putting a slight backward slant on the ''s'', though the word beginning ''ex'' is just written ''es''.
*''W'', when in the middle of a word, is notated with a short dash under the next vowel.
*''Q'' is usually a ''k'' with a dash underneath the next vowel.

Many of the letters shown are also what are called "brief forms". For instance, "which" is written as ''ch''. These brief forms are shown on the image to the right. There are several others not shown, however. For instance, "please" is written as simply ''pl'', and "govern" as ''gv''. These brief forms can make Gregg Shorthand much faster.

Another mechanism for increasing the speed of shorthand is phrasing. Based on the calculation that lifting the pen between words has a speed cost equivalent to one stroke, phrasing is the combination of several smaller distinct forms into one outline, for example "it may be that the" could be written in one outline, "(tm)ab(th)a(th)". "I have not been able" would be written, "avnba" (Note that to the eye of the reader this phrase written in shorthand looks like "I-have-not-been-able", and so phrasing is far more legible than a longhand explanation of the principle may lead one to believe).

The vowels in Gregg shorthand are divided into three main groups that very rarely require further notation. The ''a'' is a large circle, and can stand for the ''a'' in "apple", "father", and "ache". The ''e'' is a small circle, and can stand for the ''e'' in ''feed'' and ''help'', the ''i'' in ''trim'' and ''marine'', and the obscure vowel in ''her'' and ''learn''. The ''ī'' represents the ''i'' in ''fine''. The ''o'' is a small hook that represents the ''al'' in ''talk'', the ''o'' in ''cone'', ''jot'', and ''order''. The ''u'' is a tiny hook that expresses the three vowel sounds heard in the words ''who'', ''up'', and ''foot''. It also expresses a ''w'' at the beginning of a word.

There are special vowel markings for certain diphthongs (two-sound vowels). The ow in ''how'' is just an ''a'' circle followed by a ''u'' hook. The ''io'' in ''lion'' is written with a small circle inside a large circle. The ''ia'' in ''piano'' and ''repudiate'' is notated as a large circle with a dot in its center. The ''u'' in ''united'' is notated with a small circle followed by an ''u'' hook above it.

Due to the very simple alphabet, Gregg shorthand is very fast in writing. It takes a great deal of practice, however, to master it. Speeds of 280 WPM (where a word is 1.4 syllables) have been reached with this simple system before, and those notes are still legible to anyone else who knows the system.

[[Image:Eclectic shorthand by cross.png|right]]
This is the Lord's Prayer written in several forms of shorthand. Gregg's is first (although it is an older version) followed by several others.

 

==2. Have available a shorthand dictionary (usually provided by course publishers).==
==Historical Notes==
''Shorthand'' was introduced in 1929, discontinued in 1956, and reintroduced in 1986.
==References==
* Wikipedia article on [[w:Gregg shorthand|Gregg Shorthand]]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Shoe Repair/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1928|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Name at least five essential parts of a shoe and explain their uses.==
=== Sole ===
The bottom of a shoe, which supports the wearer's foot, is named the sole. It usually consists of several layers, and is usually a separate piece from the upper shoe (though not always, as in the case of wooden shoes).

==== Insole ====
The insole is the interior bottom of the shoe, which sits directly beneath the foot. Many shoes have removable and replaceable insoles, and extra insoles are often added for comfort or health reasons. (To control the shape, moisture, or smell of the shoe, for example.)

==== Mid-sole ====
The mid-sole is a layer situated between the in-sole and the out-sole, found in some shoes. Often it will provide cushioning and shape to the in-sole.

[[Image:bristol.zoo.crocshoes.arp.jpg|thumb|right|250px|Shoes made from real crocodile skin, in a conservation exhibit at Bristol Zoo, England]]

==== Outsole ====
The outsole is the layer in direct contact with the ground. The material of the outsole varies depending on the function, dressiness, and quality of the shoe, but is generally very durable material, since it experiences the most stress. Dressier shoes have leather outsoles; casual or work-oriented shoes have outsoles made of natural rubber or a synthetic imitation. The outsole may comprise a single piece, or may comprise separate pieces of different materials. Often the heel of the sole is rubber for durability and traction, while the front is leather for style. Specialized shoes will often have distinct modifications on this design: athletic cleats have spikes embedded in the outsole to grip the ground.

=== Heel ===
Some shoes have a distinctive raised heel; often this is a separate piece from the outsole and can be replaced. Leather was used in the past, and is still used in some performance tennis shoes, but harder materials are usually more desirable. Plastic, rubber, or polymer materials are now also used. Fortified cork is sometimes used in heels or soles so the shoes are lightweight.

=== Vamp, or upper ===
Any shoe also has an upper part that separates the foot from the air, and helps hold the shoe onto the foot. In the simplest cases, such as sandals or flip flops, this may be nothing more than a few straps for holding the sole in place under the foot. Closed footwear, such as boots, sneakers and most mens shoes, will usually have a more complex upper.

=== Laces ===
A shoelace is a long piece of string or cord that hold a shoe closed. Usually it is attached by being threaded through a series of small holes in the shoe, called eyelets. To aid this, many shoelaces are tipped with small solid plastic bits called aglets.

=== Tongue ===
In some shoes and boots the tongue is a flap-like, usually flexible, part that goes underneath the laces.

==2. What is the difference between hand-turned soles, Goodyear welt soles, and McKay sewed soles? Which is the easiest to repair?==
{|
|-
| [[Image:Schusterleisten1.jpg|thumb|250px|Various wooden lasts]]
| [[Image:Goodyear_welt.png|thumb|250px|Goodyear Welt Sole]]
| [[Image:Mckay sewed sole.png|thumb|250px|McKay Sewed Sole]]
|}
===Hand-turned soles===
This type of shoe is built inside-out using a form called a ''last.'' A ''last'' is a foot-shaped tool, traditionally made of wood. After the uppers are made and stitched together, they are removed from the ''last'', turned right-side-out, and the sole is attached. The sole is of one piece - the topside of the sole serves as the insole, and the bottom side serves as the outsole.
===Goodyear welt soles===
In a shoe of this type, the uppers, insole, and midsole are stitched to the outsole. This is the most secure way to attach the sole. The insoles are built into the shoe rather than being inserted after the rest of the shoe has been made. The upper is drawn over the sole and held temporarily while a strip of leather (the welt) is stitched to the upper and inner sole. The sole is hand-stitched through the welt to complete the process. This construction allows multiple sole replacements, extending the life of the footwear.

Because the stitching of the outsole is done completely on the outside of the shoe, this type of sole is easiest to repair.
{{clear}}
===McKay sewed soles===
Ten years after the invention of the sewing machine, Gordon McKay introduced a device for machine-stitching a shoe's upper to its sole. In this type of sole, the insole is attached to the upper while it is still on the last using tacks which are clinched over. The outsole is then sewn to the assembly by McKay's machine. The stitching appears on the inside of the shoe, as do the tacks. This type of construction was common for cheap, lightweight shoes.
{{clear}}
====Curved Needle Machine====
The outsole is attached to the upper with a welt. The curve needle machine allows the soles to be stitched through the goodyear welt without the going through the upper so the shoes can be resoled many times without sewing through the uppers.

==3. Properly wax the thread, and with two needles or waxed ends, mend a pair of shoes that have rips in them. Use the double-stitch method of sewing.==
Shoe repair is best taught by an experienced cobbler. It is not really possible to learn this trade by reading a book - it has to be practiced, and to become proficient takes years. The best approach for meeting this requirement (as well as requirements 4 and 5) is to visit a shoe repair shop as described in requirement 8. Bring a pair of shoes that have rips in them so the cobbler can allow you to practice on ''your own'' shoes rather than on his customer's shoes.

Ripped shoes do not necessarily have tears in the canvas or leather, but may have a burst seam. Almost any pair of "throw-away" shoes you still have in your closet will work for this. Depending on the skill you are able to bring to bear on your first attempt, you may end up throwing them away anyhow. Remember that this is a learning process, and your goal is not necessarily to get a wearable pair of shoes out of your effort, but rather, a working knowledge of shoe repair techniques. If you fail on the left shoe, you may succeed on the right. Or you might go through more than one pair of shoes.

It may be possible to build your Pathfinder group's interest in this honor by showing them some [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6Ha_Z-AA_og&NR=1 shoe repair videos].

==4. Satisfactorily half-sole a pair of shoes by nailing the soles on. Make sure the nails are of the proper length.==
See requirements 3 and 8 for advice.

==5. Fit and attach a pair of rubber heels.==
See requirements 3 and 8 for advice. Here's another Youtube video from Upside Down Shoe Repair:

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aoUKxBxLCpY

==6. What kind of leather should be used in repairing the soles of shoes? How is such leather generally tanned?==
Leather used in shoemaking is divided into two categories: upper leather, and sole leather. Upper leather is used for making the uppers, and is thinner, softer, and more pliable than sole leather. Sole leather is generally made from the hide of a fully-grown cow, taken from the thicker parts of the animal's skin. Upper leather is taken from calves, goats, and other smaller animals with thinner skin.

Back when this honor was originally written, leather was usually tanned by soaking it in a bath with tree bark (usually hemlock or oak). An astringent acid would leach out of the bark, and this acid is what would convert an animal skin into leather, in a process known as ''tanning''.

Sole leather was most often tanned using oak bark. Oak-tanned leather has a light, creamy tan color. It is both firm and flexible.

==7. Specify at least three factors that should be taken into account in the selection of shoes.==
There are many factors to consider when selecting a pair of shoes, including, '''fit''', '''comfort''', '''function''', '''quality''', '''cost''', and even '''moral considerations'''. When considering any of these factors, it is incumbent upon the Christian to practice good stewardship.

===Fit and Comfort===
Possibly the most important factor to consider when selecting a shoe is that it fits properly. Improperly fitted shoes can cause discomfort, soreness, or even injury. Shoes should be comfortable. It is irresponsible to sacrifice comfort for the sake of style, though there are exceptions to this (i.e., the shoe will not be worn for very long and the wearer has no other option, such as serving as the member of a wedding party).

You should have your feet measured every time you buy shoes if they are still growing. Even when they stop growing, it's still a good idea to have them measured occasionally, as their shape may change. There are two parameters that specify the shoe size: length, and width.
====Length====
Shoe size in the United States and Canada is based on the length of the last, measured in inches, multiplied by 3 and minus a constant. This constant differs for shoes intended for men, women and children.

:<math>\mbox{male shoe size} = 3*\mbox{last length}-22</math>

Women's sizes are almost always determined with the "common" scale, in which women's sizes are equal to men's sizes plus 1.5 (for example, a men's 10.5 is a women's 12).

In the less popular scale, known as the "standard" or "FIA" (Footwear Industries of America) scale, women's sizes are men's sizes plus 1 (so a men's 10.5 is a women's 11.5).

:<math>\mbox{female shoe size (common)} = 3*\mbox{last length}-20.5</math>
:<math>\mbox{female shoe size (FIA)} = 3*\mbox{last length}-21</math>

Children's sizes are equal to men's sizes plus 12.33. Thus girls' and boys' sizes do not differ, even though men's and women's do.

:<math>\mbox{child shoe size} = 3*\mbox{last length}-9.67</math>

For the international market, the [[w:ISO 9407|ISO 9407]] standard is used for specifying shoe length.
====Width====
Some manufacturers offer shoes of different width for the same foot length. Such shoes are then also labelled according to the width or girth of the widest part of the foot (typically measured directly behind the toes with the subject standing on both feet and wearing socks or hose).

In the Mondopoint system, the shoe size label can state in addition to the length also the width of the mean foot for which the shoe is suitable, both measured in millimetres.

A number of other ad-hoc notations for width or girth are also used. Examples include (each starting with the narrowest width):

* AAAA, AAA, AA, A, B, C, D, E, EE, EEE, EEEE
* 4A, 3A, 2A, A, B, C, D, E, 2E, 3E, 4E
* N, R, W

None of these designations are formally standardized. The exact foot width for which these sizes are suitable can vary significantly between manufacturers. The A-E width indicators used by some US and UK shoe manufacturers are typically based on the width of the foot, and common step sizes are 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 3/16 inch (5 mm).

===Function===
The next consideration when selecting a shoe is the activity to be performed when wearing the shoe. You would not wear high heels on a backpacking trip, nor would you wear flip-flops to a wedding. Different shoes have different purposes, though thankfully, some are multi-purpose. Here is a list of some of the types of shoes available:
* Dress shoes
* Casual shoes
* Athletic shoes
* Running shoes
* Hiking boots
* Climbing shoes
* Paddling shoes
* Work boots
* Steel-toed boots
* Snow boots
* Golf shoes
* Bowling shoes
* Slippers

===Quality===
If your feet have stopped growing, it makes sense to buy the best quality shoes that you can afford. High quality shoes will not only last longer than cheap ones, they are less expensive in the long run because they will not have to be replaced as often. A low-quality shoe can also make your feet sore or even cause injury by not providing proper arch or ankle support.

If you are buying shoes for a person who is growing quickly, you should still seek a quality shoe, but at this point the goal is match the expected lifetime of the shoe to the amount of time it will fit.

===Cost===
Cost is also a very important consideration. Some shoes are very expensive, not because of their high quality, but because of the name attached to them. Though high quality shoes are usually more expensive than low-quality shoes, this does not mean that all high-priced shoes are also high-quality.

===Moral considerations===
In the late 1990's several shoe manufacturers found themselves embroiled in controversy after it was revealed that they were exploiting sweatshop labor in third-world countries. There are many people who boycott various corporations because of such practices, and there are many people who patronize companies that commit themselves to respecting human rights.

==8. Spend a minimum of five hours observing shoe repair specialists at their work shop.==
You should be able to find a shoe repair shop in the Yellow Pages (or other business directory) under "Shoe Repair." You can also try this web site http://www.vibram.us/repairconsumer/ by Vibram, a shoe repair supplier.

Shoe repair shops are often family-owned businesses, so the chances of speaking to the owner when you enter the store (or call on the phone) are pretty good. It would be better to approach the owner in person rather than calling, as that gives you a better opportunity to present yourself. Wear a class A uniform when you go there to ask permission to observe, and be ready to explain how many Pathfinders will be with you. Let the store owner select a time and date for the five-hour visit. The store owner may also be willing to instruct this honor, so it would be a good idea to make contact before you get started.

Your visit to the work shop will be a good opportunity to meet requirements 3, 4, and 5, but you should probably bring some shoes that need these repairs with you. The owner will certainly not want you experimenting on his customer's shoes! Offer to pay for any materials you use when repairing your shoes.

==9. Write or tell the examiners the proper methods of cleaning and caring for shoes.==
Keep your shoes looking their best by using a cedar shoe tree. These are foot-shaped blocks of cedar wood that fit inside the shoe. Cedar absorbs moisture and salt which can damage your shoes. Clean shoes right away when they become dirty. There are four basic steps in caring for smooth leather shoes: clean, condition, polish, and weatherproof.
;Clean:
First you should lay some newspapers out on your work area and remove the laces from the shoes. Brush the dirt off with a soft brush, and then apply saddle soap or leather cleaner to the shoe with a soft cloth (you can use a shoe shine cloth or an old T-shirt). Work it in, and then start to shine the shoe.
;Condition:
Once the shoe has been cleaned, you can apply a conditioner. You can buy cleaners with conditioners in them, but you'll get better results using a separate conditioner. The conditioner is worked into the leather just as the cleaner was, and it helps to moisturize the leather to prevent cracking. In dry climates, you may need to condition your shoes more often.
;Polish:
Most of us are familiar with the liquid shoe polish products that come in a bottle with a brush built into the lid. These polishes work well enough, but the polish only barely penetrates the surface of the leather and has to be re-applied frequently. It is better to use a show paste, but best to use a shoe cream. Whichever you choose, you will have to match the color of the product to the color of the shoe. Test in an inconspicuous area to make sure that you have a good color match. Apply shoe cream with a soft cloth and rub it in well. Then let it dry thoroughly. Once dry, you can go over it again with a soft cloth to bring out the shine.
;Weatherproof:
If you are more interested in protecting the shoes than in making them look good, you can use beeswax to weatherproof them. Beeswax will change the look of the shoe, but it is most excellent for keeping the water out. This would be a good choice for work or hiking boots. For dress shoes, you will want to use a spray-on product which goes on invisibly. It will protect your shoes from incidental contact with water, but you should not rely on this stuff for wading through puddles.

==References==
*[http://podiatry.curtin.edu.au/shoo.html Curtin Department of Podiatry] Hand-turned soles.
*[http://www.knappstore.com/features.asp Knappstore.com] Explanation of Goodyear welt soles.
*[http://moas.atlantia.sca.org/topics/shoe.htm Shoe Links]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Radio Electronics/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}

== 1. Identify at least 20 symbols used in electronics. ==

[[Image:AY_Radio_Electronics_Symbols.png]]

== 2. Identify the value of resistors by the color code ==

From Wikipedia

The value of a resistor is marked on the device itself by using bands of colors.

[[Image:Resistor_bands.png]]

band '''A''' is first significant figure of resistance value in ohms 
band '''B''' is the second significant figure 
band '''C''' is the decimal multiplier 
band '''D''' if present, indicates tolerance of value in percent (no color means 20%)

Resistors manufactured for military use may also include a fifth band which indicates component failure rate (reliability); refer to MIL-STD-199 for further details.

The Standard EIA Color Code Table per EIA-RS-279 is as follows:
{| border="1" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3"
!Color!!1st band!!2nd band!!3rd band (Multiplier)!!4th band (Tolerance)!!Temp. Coefficient
|- bgcolor = "#000000"
|[[Black]]||0||0||×100|| || 
|- bgcolor = "#B8860B"
|[[Brown]] ||1||1||×101||±1% (F) ||100 ppm
|- bgcolor = "#FF0000"
|[[Red]] ||2||2||×102||±2% (G) ||50 ppm
|- bgcolor = "#FFA500"
|[[Orange (colour)|Orange]]||3||3||×103|| ||15 ppm
|- bgcolor = "#FFFF00"
|[[Yellow]]||4||4||×104||  ||25 ppm
|- bgcolor = "#9ACD32"
|[[Green]] ||5||5||×105||±0.5% (D) || 
|- bgcolor = "#6495ED"
|[[Blue]] ||6||6||×106||±0.25% (C)|| 
|- bgcolor = "#EE82EE"
|[[Violet (color)|Violet]]||7||7||×107||±0.1% (B) || 
|- bgcolor = "#A0A0A0"
|[[Gray (color)|Gray]] ||8||8||×108||±0.05% (A)|| 
|- bgcolor = "#FFFFFF"
|[[White]] ||9||9||×109||  || 
|- bgcolor = "#FFD700"
|[[Gold (color)|Gold]] || || ||×0.1 ||±5% (J) || 
|- bgcolor = "#C0C0C0"
|[[Silver (color)|Silver]]|| || ||×0.01 ||±10% (K) || 
|-
|None || || ||  ||±20% (M) || 
|}

A useful mnemonic for remembering the first ten color codes is "'''B'''etter '''B'''e '''R'''ight '''O'''r '''Y'''our '''G'''reat '''B'''ig '''V'''enture '''G'''oes '''W'''est", where the first letter matches the first letter of the color code, by order of increasing magnitude.

Resistors are measured in ohms, so ''yellow violet red brown'' means 4,700 ohms, 1% tolerance.

== 3. Demonstrate proper soldering techniques ==
Soldering is a way of semi-permanently connecting electronic components together or to a circuit board. It involves heating the solder to its melting point and letting it re-solidify on the components themselves. The heating is done with a soldering iron.

Begin by turning on the soldering iron and waiting until it is hot enough to melt solder. You can test this by touching some solder to the tip of the iron. Clean the tip of the soldering iron by wiping it on a wet sponge. This may be repeated often when soldering a lot of joints.

The connection should also be bright and clean before attempting to solder them. They are often clean enough and require no attention, but if you have difficulty getting the solder to stick, clean them with some solder flux.

Place the tip of the iron on the components you wish to connect and heat them both. Do this while simultaneously touching the solder to the components - do not touch the solder to the iron. The goal is to heat the components to the point where they are able to melt the solder themselves. Otherwise you will end up with a "cold" solder joint which will fail sometime in the future.

If soldering wires, twist them together first. Although solder has a small amount of mechanical strength, it is not sufficient to withstand very much stress. Therefore, it should not be relied upon for anything other than making an electrical connection. If the joint is stressed, it can easily fail.

And always remember - solder is HOT, as are freshly soldered electronic components. Failure to be careful may result in a nasty burn.

== 4. Explain the use and operation of various important components in electronics such as resistors, variable capacitors, fixed capacitors, coils, transistors, integrated circuits, diodes, and transformers. ==
=== Resistor ===
The function of a resistor is to limit the current in a circuit. Resistors can also be combined into "voltage divider" circuits by placing them in series.

=== Fixed Capacitor ===
A fixed capacitor can be used to hold a charge. They are often used to smooth noise out of power supply circuits by placing them in parallel with the power supply. A capacitor cannot pass DC if it is placed in series. This is because the impedance of a capacitor varies with the frequency, and at zero Hertz (DC), its impedance is infinite. Large capacitors have less impendence at a given frequency than a small capacitor, and because of this, capacitors can be used in "frequency selective circuits" such as filters.

The value of a capacitor is measured in farads, or more commonly, in microfarads. A microfarad is a millionth of a farad. Large capacitors have tens or hundreds of microfarads. Smaller capacitors are measured in picofarads (a picofarad is a millionth of a microfarad, or a trillionth of a farad). The microfarad is often abbreviated as μF (sometimes uF) and picofarads are often abbreviated as pF.

=== Variable Capacitor ===
A variable capacitor can be used in a frequency selective circuit where the user has control over the selected frequency. An example of this would be in a radio or television tuner.

=== Coil ===
A coil is also known as an inductor. The impedance through a coil is also frequency dependent, but in the opposite way as in a capacitor. At DC, an inductor has nearly zero impedance, and the impedance increases with higher frequencies. Inductors are often used in conjunction with capacitors in frequency selective applications. They are also often used for filtering out noise from power supplies. Since a power supply is supposed to provide a constant voltage (0 Hertz), an inductor can be placed in series between the supply and the load. The inductor will absorb the higher frequencies so that the load does not see them.

Inductors are measured in henries, which is abbreviated as H.

=== Transistor ===
A transistor has two basic applications - it can be used as a switch and it can be used as an amplifier.

There are two basic types of transistors, bipolar and field effect.

A bipolar transistor has three terminals: the base, the collector, and the emitter. Current flowing from the base to the emitter controls the amount that can flow from the collector to the emitter. If no current flows from the base to the emitter, no current can flow from the collector to the emitter. This is how a bipolar transistor can be used as a switch.

There are two types of bipolar transistors: NPN and PNP. In an NPN bipolar transistor, the current flowing from the collector to the emitter is proportional to the current flowing from the base to the emitter. A small signal can be amplified by injecting it into the base of the transistor. In this case, the current from the collector to the emitter is an amplified version of the current flowing from the base to the emitter.

A PNP bipolar transistor works the same way as an NPN except that the direction of current flow is reversed - that is, it flows from the emitter to the base, and from the emitter to the collector. In the case of a PNP transistor, it helps to think about "pulling" current out of the base rather than "injecting" it into the base.

A field effect transistor is similar to a bipolar transistor. There are two types of field effect transistors (FETs): N-channel, and P-channel. They too have three terminals: the gate, the drain, and the source. If a voltage is applied between the gate and the source of an N-channel FET , the resistance from the drain to the source is reduced. If enough voltage is applied between the gate and the source, current can flow from the drain to the source unimpeded. If no voltage is applied, no current can flow from the drain to the source.

In a P-channel FET, the voltages and currents are reversed - that is, when the gate is more negative than the source, current can flow from the source to the drain.

=== Integrated Circuit ===
An integrated circuit - or "chip" is a collection of transistors and resistors etched into a silicon (or other semiconducting material) chip. Very complicated circuits can be built by combining many transistors onto a single chip. The number of transistors that can be put on a single chip is well over a million.

=== Diode ===
A diode is a device that allows current to flow in one direction, but not in the other. This can be used in constructing an AC to DC converter, or for protecting a circuit from outside voltage sources.

=== Transformer ===
A transformer consists of one or more coils located within close proximity to one another. When current passes through a coil, it generates a magnetic field. When the current varies, so does the magnetic field. When a varying magnetic field is set up near a coil, a current is induced in that coil. By placing two coils in a common magnetic field and injecting a varying current into one (the primary), a proportional current is induced in the other (the secondary). The ratio depends on how many turns each coil has. If a transformer boosts the voltage, it will reduce the current, and if it reduces the voltage, it will increase the current. Thus, the power through the transformer is preserved (other than a loss). Electric companies transmit power by passing the electricity through step up transformers so that less current (but very high voltage) can be transmitted over long distances. Power loss in a transmission line equals the current squared times the resistance, so reducing the current by stepping up the voltage saves a ''lot'' of energy. The voltage is stepped down again before it is delivered to a customer.

Transformers are also used to isolate two circuits so that only AC passes between them and their DC power supplies do not interfere with one another.

== 5. Know and understand Ohm's Law. ==
If a voltage is applied across a resistor, current will flow through it. Ohm's law describes the relationship between this current, voltage, and resistance. It can be written as

<math> V = I R </math>

Where v is voltage (measured in volts), i is current (measured in amps), and r is resistance (measured in ohms). The equation can also be written as

<math> I = \frac{V}{R} </math>

and

<math> R = \frac{V}{I}</math>

Basically, it means that if the voltage is held constant and the resistance is decreased, the current is increased. Or if the resistance is held constant and the current is increased, the voltage will also increase.

== 6. Determine how to correctly place or pin integrated circuits, transistors, diodes, and capacitors in a circuit board. ==
=== Integrated Circuits ===
Integrated circuits usually have some means of indicating where "pin 1" is on the device. Once pin 1 is located, the remaining pins are numbered going counter-clockwise around the device. On a DIP, pin one is located to the left of a notch milled into the top of the IC as shown below:

[[Image:Pin_one_indicator.png|Pin one indicator on an 8-pin DIP ]]

=== Transistors ===
Transistors come in a variety of packages. To determine which pin is the base, collector, and emitter (bipolar transistors) or gate, source, and drain (field effect transistors), refer to the device's data sheet.

=== Diodes ===
A diode is usually marked with a stripe near its cathode. Current flows from the anode to the cathode, but not from the cathode to the anode. The stripe can be interpreted to look like a gate that won't let the current enter.

=== Capacitors ===
Only polarized capacitors are "pinned," and care must be taken to not plug them in backwards. If an electrolytic capacitor is charged in reverse, it can explode. Polarized capacitors are often marked with a stripe showing which terminal is the cathode (negative terminal). Sometimes the stripe will connect the cathode and the anode, but it will have arrows or minus signs on the stripe indicating direction of current flow (anode to cathode). In a schematic, the curved plate of the capacitor represents the cathode and the straight plate represents the anode.

[[Image:Polarized_capacitors.jpg|Polarized Capacitors]]

In the picture above, the cathode of the black capacitor is on the right. The cathode of the blue capacitor is toward the bottom.

== 7. What is meant by a parallel and a series circuit? ==
A series circuit is a circuit in which the components are placed end-to-end. A parallel circuit connects both terminals of two components together.

[[Image:Series_parallel_resistors.png|Series and Parallel Circuits]]

In a series circuit the current flowing through both devices will be equal, but the voltage across them will be different if the resistances are different.

In a parallel circuit, the voltage across the two elements will be identical, but the current divides between them. Some current goes through the top, the rest goes through the bottom.

== 8. From a kit or from scratch make two of the following: ==
Good places to find components for the projects detailed below include [http://www.radioshack.com Radio Shack], [http://www.mouser.com Mouser], [http://www.digikey.com Digikey], and [http://www.jameco.com Jameco]. All of these suppliers will sell to hobbyists in small quantities.

Another option for building these is to buy a kit. You can buy kits for individual projects or you can buy general purpose kits that will let you experiment with many different circuits. Check with Radio Shack to see their current offerings. Electronics kits can also be found at toy stores, especially those that emphasize "learning" toys. Such suppliers include Toys R Us and Imaginarium, both of which offer kits over the Internet via Amazon.

=== Photocell Guard or Counter ===
The Photocell Guard circuit is a photo sensitive switch that will either turn on or turn off some device. In modern terminology, it would be called a photo-sensitive switch. A Photocell Counter is a circuit which counts the number of times a photo-sensitive switch is activated. In modern terminology, it would be called a Photo-sensitive Counting Circuit.

[[Image:Photo_detector.png|Photo Detector]]

In this circuit, R2 is a cadmium sulfide cell (CdS cell) - that is, a light-sensitive resistor. When exposed to light, the resistance of the cell decreases. In darkness, the cell has a higher resistance. R1 and R2 together form a voltage divider circuit. As the light striking CdS cell gets brighter, the voltage at the common terminal decreases. As it gets darker, the voltage increases. This voltage is applied to the positive terminal of a comparator IC. The negative terminal of the comparator is connected to the wiper of a potentiometer which forms a second voltage divider circuit. This voltage can be adjusted by tuning the potentiometer. When the light striking the CdS cell gets bright enough, it causes the voltage on the positive terminal to fall below the voltage on the negative terminal. This causes the output of the comparator to go to zero volts, thus lighting the LED. When it gets dark again, the LED will turn off.

The action of the LED can be reversed (on when dark, off when bright) by reversing the positions of R1 and R2 (the CdS cell), by swapping the positive and negative terminals of the comparator, or by connecting the LED through a resistor to ground instead of connecting it through a resistor to power.

=== Siren ===
[[Image:Siren_circuit.png|Siren Circuit]]
 
The circuit presented here looks intimidating at first glance, but as with most things, when it is broken down into smaller parts, it's a lot easier to understand.

The first thing to note is that this circuit requires a bipolar power supply - that is, a power supply that can provide both positive and negative voltages. This is accomplished here with two batteries. The circuit was tested with voltages ranging from ±4.5V to ±12V, so a pair of 9 volt batteries works pretty well.

Moving to the right we come to an op-amp configured as a low-frequency oscillator. This oscillator, in conjunction with the transistor Q1 controls the frequency of a second oscillator (denoted as the "Audio Frequency Oscillator" in the schematic.

The frequency of the low-frequency oscillator is set by the capacitor C1, and the resistors R1, R2, and R3. When the output of the amplifier (at pin 1) is high, C1 charges through R1. When the voltage across C1 exceeds the threshold voltage on the positive terminal of the op-amp, the output will go low. When this happens, C1 will then discharge though R1 and the voltage at the positive terminal will change to a negative value. When C1's voltage drops below the threshold voltage at the positive terminal, the output switches high again, and the cycle repeats. The threshold voltage at the positive terminal is set by the ratio of R1 and R2, as well as by the output of the amplifier:

<math>V_{thresh} = \frac{R1}{R1+R2} \times V_{out}</math>

If the voltage at the output of the low-frequency oscillator is observed on an oscilloscope, it will be shown as a square wave, oscillating between the two battery supply voltages. If this value were used to drive the base of Q1, the transistor would switch suddenly between full-on and full-off, and this would cause the audio oscillator's frequency to jump suddenly between two values (this makes it sound more like a cell phone ringing than a siren - try it!). To get a siren-effect, we need a smooth frequency transition, so the base of the transistor is driven with the voltage on the capacitor C1 which is a triangle wave.

The next portion of the circuit to consider is the audio frequency oscillator. This circuit is almost exactly the same as the low-frequency oscillator, except that the RC values have been changed so that it oscillates at a higher frequency, and the voltage divider circuit that sets the threshold voltage at the positive terminal (pin 5) is modified. The lower half of this voltage divider includes a transistor. As the transistor turns on, the resistance of the lower half of the voltage-divider is changed, and this will change the frequency of the audio oscillator. Thus, the pitch of the audio will increase and decrease at a rate set by the low-frequency oscillator.

Finally, we come to the power amplifier. This is a simple unity-follower op-amp, and its purpose is to drive the speaker and to isolate it from the audio oscillator. If the speaker were connected directly to the output of the audio oscillator, it would change the characteristics of that section, and we would not hear the siren effect.

=== Simple voltmeter ===
This link has some material on using an LM3914 as a
[http://www.electronics-tutorials.com/devices/lm3914.htm Bar Graph Meter].

Here's another link for building a
[http://braincambre500.freeservers.com/ddv.htm Digital Dashboard Meter].

There are several analog to digital converter (including the MAX136, MAX1496, and ICL7107) chips that will directly drive any of several 7-segment LED displays. A web search of these part numbers (or search for "3.5 digit LED" for other devices) should turn up a data sheet, and most data sheets have "typical application" sections showing how these can be connected.

=== Pressure sensor ===
=== Simple DC power supply ===
[[Image:Simple dc power supply schematic.png|Schematic of a Simple DC Power Supply]]

In this DC power supply, household current (120VAC, 60Hz in North America) is applied to the power cord on the left. The fuse protects the circuit and '''should not be omitted'''. The voltage is then stepped down by the power transformer. Power transformers are available at Radio Shack and at hardware stores (see the doorbell section). Try to select a transformer that will output a voltage close to but a little higher than the desired DC output voltage.

Once the voltage has been stepped down, it goes through a network of diodes set up as a "full bridge rectifier." The diodes direct current to the top of the network and allow it to return through the bottom, regardless of whether the input voltage is positive or negative.

The capacitor then smooths out the voltage. Without the capacitor, the output from the diode network would continually drop to zero, and then rise back up to its peak value. The capacitor averages this out, giving a smoothed DC value.

The next element in the circuit is an LM7805, a 5-volt linear voltage regulator. This can be replaced with similar devices to get different voltages (i.e., an LM7812 for 12V, an LM7809 for 9 volts, etc.). The LM7805 will output a steady 5 Volts as long as the input voltage is sufficiently high. The transformer should be chosen such that the voltage input to the regulator is not much higher than 5V (6V or 7V would be good). Excess voltage is dropped across the device's input and output terminals, and is converted to heat. The greater this voltage, the more heat the device has to dissipate. Since it can only dissipate a finite amount of heat, this in effect limits the amount of power this circuit can provide. Attaching a heat sink to the LM7805 will also help.

The circuit should be mounted in some sort of enclosure to protect the 120VAC input power terminals. The power terminals themselves should be wrapped in electrical tape or in heat shrink tubing for additional protection.

=== Simple transistor radio ===
Although this
[http://www.somerset.net/arm/fm_only_one_transistor_radio.html FM Radio Project] uses only one transistor, it is ''still'' fairly complicated. It might be better to buy a kit for this one. Check with Radio Shack.

== 9. Draw from memory, using proper symbols, the complete wiring diagram of the devices constructed in requirement 8. ==

The easiest way to commit these diagrams to memory is by understanding them. The photocell and power supplies are the easiest to understand, and if both are made, the power supply can be used to power the photocell circuit. The siren and radio circuits are somewhat more complicated, but they are also more rewarding.

== 10. List ten ways electronics are used in everyday life. ==
# Computers - for work and for play.
# Entertainment - Televisions, stereos, video games, toys, etc.
# Medical - Patient monitoring, diagnostics (MRI, CT-scans, X-rays), etc.
# Industrial - motor controllers, robotics, etc.
# Appliances - microwaves, timers, ovens, refrigerators, washing machines, dryers.
# Radio Communications - police and fire radios, CB radios, fleet radios.
# Telecommunications - telephones, fax machines.
# Fire Safety - fire alarms, smoke detectors, sprinkler systems.
# Water Supply - water towers signal pumping stations, etc.
# Security - metal detectors and x-ray machines at airports, anti-theft devices in stores, security camera.
# Music - amplifiers, synthesizers, sound mixers, recording equipment.
# Traffic Control - traffic signals.
# Automotive - Air bags, antilock brakes, diagnostics, electronic ignition, etc.

==Historical Notes==
This honor was original named ''Radio Mechanics''. The name was changed to ''Radio Electronics'' in 1956.
==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Radio - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1956|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Have the Radio Honor ==
{{Ay prerequisite|Vocational|Radio}}

==2. Pass a test and receive your license for the General Class Amateur Radio License. ==

Learn more about the '''General Class''' radio license at [http://www.arrl.org/FandES/ead/classes.html ARRL Website].

[[W:Amateur_radio_licensing_in_the_United_States|Wikipedia]] effectively says that this next level, known as '''General Class''', requires passing of the Technician test, as well as a 35-question, multiple-choice General exam. When you attain a '''General Class''' license, you are granted privileges on portions of all amateur bands, and have access to over 83% of all amateur HF bandwidth.

==References==

* [http://www.arrl.org/FandES/ead/classes.html ARRL Website - Where Do I Start?]
* [[w:Amateur_radio_licensing_in_the_United_States|Wikipedia - Amateur Radio Licensing]]
* [[w:Ham_radio|Wikipedia - Ham Radio]]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Radio/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1928|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Pass a test and receive your license for the Technical Class Amateur Radio License <center>OR</center> Technician Class Amateur Radio License. ==
In order to earn the Technician Class Amateur Radio License, an operator must pass a 35 question exam administered by a Volunteer Examiner Coordinator (VEC). No morse code is required for the Technician Class, but knowledge of FCC regulations and electronics are essential. Study the material presented below, and when you feel you are ready, look over the question pool and take some practice tests:

* [http://www.ncvec.org/downloads/2006tech.pdf Question Pool]
* [http://www.qrz.com/p/testing.pl Practice Tests]

When you can consistently pass the practice tests, chances are good that you will be able to pass the real deal. All you need to do when you are ready is find an amateur license examination session near you. This website will help you locate one:

* http://www.arrl.org/arrlvec/examsearch.phtml

Now, let's learn about Amateur Radio!

== FCC Rules, station license responsibilities==
[[Image:Icom.png|thumb|right|200px|Amateur Radio]]
The FCC Rules and Regulations for the "Amateur Radio Service" is defined in the ''Code of Federal Regulations'' under Title 47, Part 97. Part 97 is the FCC's regulations for all amateur (ham) radio operations. The link for Part 97 is as follows: http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_06/47cfr97_06.html
 

== Control operator duties==
By definition of Part 97.3, a control operator is defined as "An amateur operator designated by the licensee of a station to be responsible for the transmissions from that station to assure compliance with the FCC Rules."

The control operator must be a licenced operator who's license appears in the ULS consolidated licensee database or be "authorized for alien reciprocal operation by §97.107 of part 97."

The control operator is required to monitor transmissions, repair (or have repaired) any equipment that is causing harmful interference, and make sure the transmitting station complies with the rules and regulations set out by the FCC.

A control operator does not have to be the person transmitting, nor does he even have to be in the room to control the radio (If he or she has the ability of remote operation of the station, that is). However, the control operator must be aware of ''every aspect'' of the station at ''all times''. This includes: transmission frequency, power/ output of transmission, radio etiquette, etc.

== Operating Practices ==
It is important that you be polite when talking "on the air." Anyone can listen to your conversations. Don't use inappropriate language (like swearing), don't be insulting, and don't cut other people off. Allow others to join conversations. If it is a personal conversation, maybe you should be communicating via a more secure/ private method.

Other things that you should consider when "on the air" is your power settings, repeater use, and frequency usage. If you are talking on a frequency and someone else starts using the same frequency, don't increase your power until only you and your contact can talk. Be courteous and forgiving, move to a different frequency. You may find that some frequencies have priorities assigned to them. For example, the repeater or frequency that you are using is also used by a group of hams that dedicate some of their time to emergency communications. They have been given priority in message traffic when dealing with an emergency or emergency practice sessions. They have been given the primary assignment for that frequency during those events. Should you find them using the repeater or frequency during an official event, move to a different frequency or repeater. At all other times you, as a secondary user, may use the repeater or frequency without hindrance. Also when using a repeater to talk to someone, see if you can communicate without using the repeater. If so, please move to a frequency other than the repeater. If you cannot communicate without using the repeater, that is alright. The repeater was created for that very purpose (to allow people to communicate over farther distances).

== Radio and electronic fundamentals ==
===Ohm's Law===
[[Image:Ohms law voltage source.svg|right|thumb|200px|A [[W:voltage source|voltage source]], ''V'', drives an [[W:electric current|electric current]], ''I '', through [[W:w:resistor|resistor]], ''R'', the three quantities obeying Ohm's law: ''V = ''IR''.]]
[[W:Ohms_Law|Ohm's law]] states that, in an electrical circuit, the current passing through a conductor between two points is proportional to the potential difference (i.e. voltage drop or voltage) across the two points, and inversely proportional to the resistance between them. In mathematical terms, this is written as:

:<math>
I = \frac {V}{R}
</math>

where I is the current in amperes, V is the potential difference in volts, and R is a constant, measured in ohms, called the resistance. The potential difference is also known as the voltage drop, and is sometimes denoted by E or U instead of V.
 

===Impedance===
[[W:impedence|Electrical impedance]], or simply [[W:impedance|impedence]], describes a measure of opposition to a [[W:sinusoid|sinusoidal]] [[W:alternating current|alternating current]] (AC). Electrical impedance extends the concept of [[W:Electrical resistance|resistance]] to AC circuits, describing not only the relative magnitudes of the [[W:voltage|voltage]] and [[W:current|current]], but also the relative [[W:Phase (waves)|phases]]. In general impedance is a [[W:Complex number|complex]] quantity <math>\scriptstyle{\tilde{Z}}</math> and the term ''complex impedance'' may be used interchangeably; the [[W:Polar coordinates|polar form]] conveniently captures both magnitude and phase characteristics,

:<math>\tilde{Z} = Z e^{j\theta} \quad</math>

where the magnitude <math>\scriptstyle{Z}</math> gives the change in voltage amplitude for a given current amplitude, while the argument <math>\scriptstyle{\theta}</math> gives the phase difference between voltage and current. In [[W:Cartesian plane|Cartesian form]],

:<math>\tilde{Z} = R + j\Chi \quad</math>

where the real part of impedance is the resistance <math>\scriptstyle{R}</math> and the imaginary part is the [[W:reactance|reactance]] <math>\scriptstyle{\Chi}</math>. [[W:Dimensional analysis|Dimensionally]], impedance is the same as resistance; the [[W:SI unit|SI unit]] is the [[W:ohm|ohm]]. The term ''impedance'' was coined by [[W:Oliver Heaviside|Oliver Heaviside]] in July 1886.

The impedance of an ideal resistor is purely real and is referred to as a ''resistive impedance'':

:<math>\tilde{Z}_R = R.</math>

Ideal inductors and capacitors have a purely imaginary ''reactive impedance'':

:<math>\tilde{Z}_L = j\omega L,</math>

:<math>\tilde{Z}_C = \frac{1}{j\omega C} \, .</math>

===Power===
Electric power is defined as the rate at which electrical energy is transferred by an electric circuit. The SI unit of power is the watt. When electric current flows in a circuit, it can transfer energy to do mechanical or thermodynamic work.

In direct current resistive circuits, electrical power is calculated using Joule's law:
:<math>P = VI \,</math>

where ''P'' is the electric power, ''V'' the voltage, and ''I'' the electric current.

In the case of resistive loads, Joule's law can be combined with Ohm's law (''I'' = ''V/R'') to produce alternative expressions for the dissipated power:

:<math>P = I^2 R = \frac{V^2}{R},</math>

where ''R'' is the electrical resistance.

In alternating current circuits, energy storage elements such as inductance and capacitance may result in periodic reversals of the direction of energy flow. The portion of power flow that, averaged over a complete cycle of the AC waveform, results in net transfer of energy in one direction is known as real power (also referred to as active power). That portion of power flow due to stored energy, that returns to the source in each cycle, is known as reactive power.

The relationship between real power, reactive power and apparent power can be expressed by representing the quantities as vectors. Real power is represented as a horizontal vector and reactive power is represented as a vertical vector. The apparent power vector is the hypotenuse of a right triangle formed by connecting the real and reactive power vectors. This representation is often called the ''power triangle''. Using the Pythagorean Theorem, the relationship among real, reactive and apparent power is:
:<math>\mbox{(apparent power)}^2 = \mbox{(real power)}^2 + \mbox{(reactive power)}^2</math>

Real and reactive powers can also be calculated directly from the apparent power, when the current and voltage are both sinusoids with a known phase angle between them:

:<math>\mbox{(real power)} = \mbox {(apparent power)}\cos(\theta)</math>

:<math>\mbox{(reactive power)} = \mbox {(apparent power)}\sin(\theta)</math>

The ratio of real power to apparent power is called power factor and is a number always between 0 and 1.

The above theory of reactive power and the power triangle is true only when both the voltage and current is strictly sinusoidal. Therefore is more or less abandoned for low voltage distribution applications where the current normally is rather distorted. It can still be used for high voltage tranmission applications and, with some care, for medium voltage applications where the current normally is less distorted.

===Passive circuits===
Passive circuits are circuits consisting of only resistors, capacitors, and inductors. Most undergraduate electronics programs dedicate two semesters to the analysis of passive circuits. It is unrealistic to expect to learn even the rudiments of this subject in a single chapter. Instead, we refer you to [[Circuit Theory]] for a more thorough treatment than is possible here.

===Active circuits===
Active circuits contain components that require a power source to operate. Such components include diodes, transistors, integrated circuits (which are constructed from diodes and transistors integrated onto a common substrate), and tubes. Active circuits, like passive circuits, are the topic of at least two semesters of undergraduate study. As such, we refer you to [[Electronics]] rather than attempting to treat this complex topic here.

== Station setup and operation ==
[[Image:Amateurfunkstation.jpg|thumb|right|200px|Amateur Radio station setup]]
 

== Communication modes and methods==
The most common methods of communication are AM (Amplitude Modulation), SSB (Single Sideband), FM (Frequency Modulation), CW (Continuous Wave) also known as Morse Code, and RTTY (Radio Teletype). Of these, the favorites are SSB, FM, and CW. To look at a larger list of ways to communicate as a ham operator, see [[w:List of amateur radio modes|List of amateur radio modes]]. Many of these methods of communications can be used on multiple bands and multiple different frequencies within those bands. Each method has specific frequencies that it is allowed to be used in. For example: on the 2 meter band, frequencies from 144.000-144.100 is specifically for CW, 144.900-145.200 won't allow CW but will let you use FM.

Most ham radio operators use simplex (Radio to Radio) communications for any conversations that they have. This is especially true of hams using hand held transceivers (HTs) on UHF (Ultra High Frequency) and VHF (Very High Frequency). Repeaters are common for use on UHF & VHF. Repeaters are used when hams cannot communicate clearly on simplex. The repeater will receive the transmission signal of one ham and retransmit it at a higher power level to the other ham. Hams that have higher license will operate on HF (High Frequency) and will use SSB and CW to communicate farther distances. HF communications does not require the use of repeaters due to the method of communication. HF operators will often use much more power for distant contacts. HF operators can also use directional antennas to bounce radio waves off the atmosphere, the moon, and even certain satellites.

Because of the type of communications that a Technician License is allowed to use. We will be focusing on FM and CW. FM is one of the simplest forms of communications. To operate FM as a ham radio operator, all one must do is set the desired frequency that you wish to communicate on and press the PTT (Push To Talk) button. Press the PTT button for 1 second and then begin by identifying yourself with your call sign. Don't be frustrated if nobody answers you when you call out over the radio waves, nobody may be listening to that particular frequency. Many people have mobile rigs (ham radios in their cars) and are most often found on the radio on their way to and from work. CW is a little more challenging than FM, but not much. CW requires that you get a ham radio rig that will actually transmit Morse code. You must also get a Morse code key (a device that you use to tap out the code on the radio). CW allows you to operate on frequencies that other modes will not allow.

== Special operations==

== Emergency and Public Service Communications==

== Radio waves, propagation, and antennas==
[[Image:Sv8cri antenna.jpg|thumb|left|200px|Amateur Radio antenna]]
 

== Electrical and RF safety ==

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Printing/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1929|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Know how the following printing devices work:==
===a. Web press===
A web press prints on a continuous paper roll (web). Think of printing newspapers, etc. Sometimes a web press can print on both sides of the paper at the same time, as well as printing in color, and finishing (cutting, folding, punching, etc.)

===b. Offset press===
[[Image:Offset.png|thumb|250px|Offset Lithography Printing Process]]
An 'Offset press' uses an 'offset' roller which transfer the 'inked image' from the plate to the printing surface of the paper.

Offset printing is a widely used printing technique where the inked image is transferred (or "offset") from a plate to a rubber blanket, then to the printing surface. When used in combination with the lithographic process, which is based on the repulsion of oil and water, the offset technique employs a flat (planographic) image carrier on which the image to be printed obtains ink from ink rollers, while the non-printing area attracts a film of water, keeping the non-printing areas ink-free.

See the Wikipedia article on [[W:Offset_printing|Offset printing]] for more.
 

===c. Photocopy machine===
[[Image:Xerographic_photocopy_process_en.svg|thumb|200px|Xerographic Photocopy Process]]
How a photocopier works (using xerography):
#First, the surface of a cylindrical drum is given an electro-static charge by a high-voltage wire called a corona wire. The drum is coated with a photoconductive semiconductor material, such as selenium or germanium.
#Then the light reflected from the scanned original document is beamed in a narrow band onto the surface of the drum. Only the white areas of the original document reflect light. The reflected light then hits the drum, which is specially conditioned to make it photoconductive. This means that wherever light hits it, the positive charges are conducted away to a ground.
#As a result, the white areas of the picture are now neutral, and the black areas remain positively charged, yielding a latent electrical image on the surface of the drum.
#The toner is negatively charged. Therefore, when it is applied to the drum to develop the image, it is attracted and sticks to the areas that are positively charged, just as paper sticks to a toy balloon with a static charge.
#The toner image is then transferred from the drum onto a positively charged piece of paper.
#The drum is then wiped clean and completely discharged by light, before beginning the process again.
#The toner is a dry powder. If copies were to exit the photocopier covered in dry toner it would easily brush off. Toner usually contains a styrene or polyester resin, and with the application of high heat and pressure it melts and binds (or fuses) to the paper.
 

===d. Letterpress===
[[Image:Metal_movable_type.jpg|thumb|130px|Movable Metal Type]]
Think [[w:Johannes_Gutenberg|Gutenberg]].

Letterpress is probably one of the first printing methods. Individual 'letters' are assembled to form words, sentences, and paragraphs into a form and when finished this is tightened/locked and this form is 'inked' and applied / pressed to the paper resulting in the printed page.

You can also research "letterpress" at [[w:Letterpress printing|Letterpress printing]].
 

==2. Know what the reference of pound means in determining the weight of paper. ==
Basically, it is the weight of 500 sheets (a ream) of paper stock, but not in the cut sizes you find for your printer, etc., but in the 'uncut' size as manufactured.

Requirement #5 of Bookbinding [http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Adventist_Youth_Honors_Answer_Book/Vocational/Bookbinding] has an answer for 'pound-weight'. Also, there are several lines here [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basis_weight_of_paper].

==3. Know what the following paper types are used for:==

===a. Offset===
'Offset' paper is an uncoated paper.
===b. Bond===
'Bond' paper is a high quality paper used for a variety of purposes (like in your computer printer or copier). It's name is derived from the original use of such paper for 'government bonds'.
===c. Cover weight===
'Cover weight'. Possibly 'cover stock' which is paper generally used for the cover of books, pamphlets, or other soft covered books.
===d. Index===
'Index' paper. Possibly 'Index Bristol' which is a rather thick paper stock.

==3. Tour a print shop or newspaper company. Write a 300-word report or give a three-minute oral report on the steps taken in the printing process that you observed.==

:Ah! This is your part.

==4. Do some research to learn about the history of printing. Trace the development of printing by learning how printing presses have progressed to the present.==

Try this for a starting point:

: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Printing

==5. Know the different inks available for printing and their characteristics.==
Commercial printing inks.

'''News Ink''': for newspapers and web printing which is fairly soft and flowing.

'''Regular Offset Inks''': for small and large commercial sheet fed presses (for magazines, etc.) (heavy flow).

'''Silkscreen Ink''': for like T-shirts, etc. (liquid).

'''Letterpress Inks''': for letterpress (soft flow).

All are oil based. Even soy based inks are still mostly oil. Mostly linseed oil is used.

There are sub-categories of the regular offset inks for ultra violet printing (which lends itself to resist the sun's deteriotion of some colors), plastic printing, and the latest for waterless printing.

(Many thanks to my uncle in the printing ink industry.)

==6. Know the meaning of the following terms:==
;a. Backing up: Printing things on the back side of a paper after the front side has already been printed.
;b. Blanket: A thick rubber mat that transfers ink to the paper on a printing press.
;c. Bleed: Print that goes all the way to the edge of a sheet as a result of trimming the paper.
;d. Boldface: Typeface or fontwork that is thicker than normal. For example, the word "Boldface" above compared to here.
;e. Camera ready art: Camera ready art is art(work) that is ready for the camera to take a 'picture' onto the plates which will 'print' the printed material.
;f. Caption: Short text describing an image or picture immediately next to the image or picture.
;g. Clip art: This is graphics and other source material (sometimes in a clip art book) that you 'clip' or cut out and 'paste-up' into 'camera ready' work.
;h. Collate: Sorting printed material in a precise order.
;i. Color separations: To print color photos, the pictures must be divided into four colors - red, yellow, blue, and black. These four colors are then printed separately on the same page, with all the other colors being made by combining these four.
;j. Contact print: Much like in photography, this is placing a negative in direct 'contact' with the camera's plate and then exposing this 'sandwich' for a short time to a light source.
;k. Debossing: This is the reverse of 'Embossing' where the image is depressed into the paper surface. In embossing, the image is raised.
;l. Embossing: Imprinting an image by pressing it into the paper forming a raised relief.
;m. Engraving: This is a printing method which uses a printing plate (or die) which has an image cut into the printing surface. (Die: a stamp used to press an image or design). This is a type of 'Intaglio' printing.
;n. Font: The appearance/characteristics of the letters that makes up a typeface. Courier, Times Roman, Arial, are examples of different fonts.
;o. Ghosting: A faint copy of an image appearing on a page where it was unintended.
;p. Intaglio: Intaglio (pronounced in-TAL-yo) is a printmaking technique in which the image is incised into a surface. Normally, copper or zinc plates are used as a surface, and the incisions are created by etching, engraving, or some other method. To print an intaglio plate, the surface is covered in ink, and then rubbed vigorously with a special cloth or with newsprint to remove the ink from the surface, leaving it only in the incisions. A damp piece of paper is placed on top, and the plate and paper are run through a printing press that, through pressure, transfers the ink from the recesses of the plate to the paper.
;q. Jog: Aligning the printed material on two adjoining edges. You would do this, for example, so that you can cut the printed material, bind, or, other finishing tasks.
;r. Matte: A dull, flat ink finish.
;s. Negative: A reverse-color image. In a black and white negative, areas that are supposed to be white are black, and areas that are supposed to be black are white.
;t. Paste-up: 'Paste'-ing clip art, words, pictures, onto a page to create what you want the page to look like, resulting in 'camera ready' work.
;u. Register: To line up a piece of paper for printing so that the printed material is placed in the correct position on the page. This is important especially when printing separate colors in the 4-color process.
;v. Set-off: Unwanted transfer of ink from the top (printed) side of one sheet to the underside of another sheet after having been printed.
;w. Show through: When printing on one side of a page can be seen on the other side of the page.
;x. Thermography: This mostly refers to printing using a special process (ink, dusting powder, and a heat process) to create raised letters on the resulting printed paper. Mostly done on business cards, letterheads, envelopes, invitations.
;y. Water mark: A light design on a sheet of paper which can be easily seen if the sheet is held up to a light. U.S. currency has a lot of watermarking.
;z. Work and turn: The process of printing one side of a paper and then flipping it left-to-right and printing the opposite side using the same guide rails.

==7. Know the difference between half-tones, duo-tones, and the four-color process.==
[[Image:Halftoning_introduction.png|thumb|130px|Left: Shows the half-tone dots when magnified. Right: shows how this would appear normally.]]
'''Half-tone''' : this simulates a continuous shade of an image by using equally spaced dots of different sizes. See the Wikipedia article on [[W:Halftone|Halftone]]

 

[[Image:Volunteer_Park_Blues.jpg|thumb|130px|Duo-tone image made up of blue and black]]
'''Duo-tone''' : is a Half-tone picture made up of two printed colors.
See the Wikipedia article on [[W:Duotone|Duotone]]. This seems to have evolved to also be a generic word for 'color separation' printing like the four color process below. Duo-tone would only be using TWO colors.

 

'''Four-color process''' : is the process of combining the four basic printing colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), to create a picture, image, or colors.

 

==8. Interview a printer to find out the following:==
Go [[W:Interview|interview]] a printer and get answers to the following questions. Enjoy!

*'''a. What education is needed to get into the printing field?'''
*'''b. What advancement opportunities are available in printing?'''
*'''c. What does the future hold for the printing industry?'''
*'''d. What do you do in your business to keep customers happy?'''
*'''e. What career opportunities related to printing are available?'''

==References==
* http://www.printusa.com/glos.htm Glossary of printing terms
* http://www.canadaprintquotes.com/printing101/what_is_a_webpress.asp What is a web press?

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Plumbing/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Make a diagram showing the plumbing system of a four-room house which includes fixtures for the kitchen, bathroom, and laundry.==
[[Image:Plumbing_diagram.jpg]]
This diagram shows the pipes and fixtures involved in plumbing a typical four-room house.

==2. Submit two pieces of iron pipe that you have threaded and connected with proper fitting.==
[[Image:Threading_a_pipe.gif|Threading an iron pipe]]
 
Insert the correct size die into the die stock. Slide the die stock over the pipe and apply pressure with one hand. With the other hand, turn the stock handle slowly clockwise until the die has taken a bite on the pipe. Apply cutting oil to the die as the stock handle is given one complete clockwise turn and backed off a quarter turn. Repeat this action until 1/4 inch of the pipe is beyond the die stock. The pipe is now threaded properly. Turn the handle in a counterclockwise direction to remove the pipe.

==3. Submit a repaired plastic (PVC), iron, or copper pipe, and tell how to repair all three.==
===PVC===
Turn off the water, then cut out the damaged section of pipe using a hacksaw or a handsaw. Then clean the two ends of the existing pipe thoroughly and let it dry. Cut a new piece of PVC pipe the same length as the damaged and removed piece and make sure it is clean too. Apply PVC primer and cement to the ends of the replacement pipe and slide couplings over them, one on each side. Then apply PVC primer and cement to the existing pipes, and join them together. Let the cement cure for the amount of time indicated on the can. Finally, turn the water back on and check for leaks.

===Iron===
In galvanized pipe installations, where the fittings on either side of the leak are not readily available, the leaking section may be cut out. In this operation, one person holds the pipe with a wrench to keep it from turning in the next fitting, and another person cuts a thread on it while it is in place using a hand type of pipe threader. The cutout section is then replaced with a coupling, a pipe section of the required length, and a union.

===Copper===
If a copper pipe leaks, cut out the damaged section and replace it with a new section, using either soldered or compression-type joints. Soldering requires quite a bit of skill, and there is always the risk of setting a house on fire with a soldering torch. Watch where the flame goes at all times. It is easy to get absorbed in watching the solder joint and not notice that the flame is licking a joist behind the pipe. Pay attention!

==4. Demonstrate ability to repair a leaky sink faucet and replace or repair toilet flush mechanisms.==
===Leaky Faucet===
[[Image:Faucet parts.jpg|thumb|300px]]
There are many different types of faucets used in plumbing installations. If you can repair the compression washer faucet, you should have no trouble in repairing other types of faucets. A cutaway view of a compression faucet is shown in the figure to the right. This faucet, with a disc washer and a solid or removable seat, requires frequent attention to maintain tight closure against water pressure.

When a faucet is turned off, the washer on the end of the stem rubs against the seat. Frequent use wears down the washer and eventually causes the faucet to drip. A small, steady leak in a faucet wastes water. The remedy for a dripping faucet is simply to replace the washer. Be sure to replace flat or beveled washers with washers of the same design.

To repair a standard washer faucet, follow the steps below.
# First, shut off the water supply to the faucet and open the faucet all the way.
# Now, remove the faucet handle, bonnet, and stem.
# Next, remove the brass screw holding the washer to the bottom of the spindle. Replace the washer with a new one which is flat on one side and slightly rounded on the other, so it can get both horizontal and vertical pressure and provide a firm seat. Use a good quality hard-composition washer because leather or soft washers do not give long service, particularly in hot-water lines.
# If the brass screw is in poor condition, replace it with a new one.
# Examine the valve seat and repair or replace it with a new one, if necessary, before replacing the spindle; otherwise, a new washer provides adequate service for only a short time.
# Reface or ream solid seats with a standard reseating tool consisting of a cutter, a stem, and a handle. Rotate the tool with the cutter centered and held firmly on the worn or scored seat. Take care to prevent excessive reaming. Remove all grinding residue before reassembly. A solid seat can be replaced with a renewable seat by tapping a standard thread into the old solid seat and inserting a renewable seat.
# Remove renewable seats with a regular seat- removing tool or Allen wrench. When the seat is frozen to the body, apply penetrating oil to loosen it. Faucet seats can usually be tapped, reseated, or replaced without removing the faucet from its fixture.
# To stop leakage at the bonnet, replace the stem packing and the bib gasket.

===Toilet Flush Mechanism===
Before a person can repair anything, he or she must understand how that item is supposed to work. The illustration below shows the steps in a toilet flush mechanism:
[[Image:Flush mechanics.png|thumb|600px|1: Handle is pushed downward 
2: Stopper ball is lifted, opening tank drain 
3: Water level in tank begins to drop 
4: Float ball lowers 
5: Valve opens allowing fresh water in 
6: Water is sprayed into bowl from the top 
7: Water enters tank 
8: Water level continues to drop 
9: Water exits tank and fills bowl 
10: Stopper ball reseats 
11: Water level rises 
12: Float ball rises 
13: Valve closes]]
 
To repair a toilet flush mechanism, remove the tank lid, flush the toilet and observe. See which of the thirteen steps listed above is not happening, try to determine why it is not happening, and address the problem. In some cases it is easier to replace the flush mechanism rather than repair an existing one. The replacement parts are sold in a single package and comes with instructions geared toward a typical homeowner. Since Pathfinders tackling the Plumbing honor are not "typical," this shoud present no problems!

==5. Describe the proper drainage system of the house in #1 and explain the use of traps and vents.==
Drainage systems generally work by gravity. The waste pipes are installed so that they drop at least a quarter of an inch per foot (or 2 cm per meter). Any drains below a building's waste exit point must be drained into a tank equipped with an effluent pump to move the waste out of the building.

Each drain is equipped with a trap. A trap is an S-shaped curve below the drain designed to trap a little water in the drain pipe. Having this water in the drain pipe prevents sewer gases from entering the building.

Drain systems are also vented by running a pipe from the waste pipe through the roof. This is to allow air to enter the drain system so that waste water rushing out of the pipes does not create a siphon and empty the traps. As water rushes through a pipe, it pushes air out in front of it. Air needs to be able to enter the system behind the water or it will pull a vacuum, sucking water out of the traps. A vent supplies this "replacement" air to prevent this from happening.

==6. Have a knowledge of the ordinary hot and cold water system of a house and explain how to make the system safe from freezing if the house has to be left without heat during the winter.==
===Hot and Cold Water systems===
Fresh water enters a house at the main, going through a master shutoff valve. The pipe then hits a tee, with one side feeding the water heater and the other side feeding the cold water taps, toilets, dishwashers, etc. A water heater has two lines coming to it. One is the cold water supply already mentioned. The other is the heated water outlet which feeds all the hot water taps in the house.

===Winterizing===
If a house is to be left unheated over the winter, the plumbing system must be treated beforehand so that the pipes do not freeze and break. One approach to this problem is to shut off the water main and then drain the system by opening all the taps. The problem with this approach is that it can leave water in low spots, and if that water freezes, it can burst the pipe.

Another method is to inject RV antifreeze into the plumbing system. Unlike regular vehicle coolant, RV anti-freeze is rated for use in potable water systems. Thus, it is safe to introduce it into the fresh water supply of a plumbing system. RV antifreeze has a freezing point of -58 °F. To do this, you first shut off the water main. Then put two gallons of RV antifreeze in a five gallon bucket near the washing machine. Disconnect the washing machine's cold water feed, and connect a pony pump's outlet to the faucet. Submerge the pony pump's intake hose in the bucket of antifreeze and turn on the pump. Then go to all the other cold water taps and turn them on. Run them until the pink antifreeze comes out. Lift the lid from the toilet tanks and press the ball cock down until antifreeze enters the tank. Do not flush the toilets yet. Cycle the dishwasher until antifreeze shows up there, cycle it until it pumps the water out. Go back to the basement and open the main valve's waste nut until antifreeze comes out. Now go back to the washing machine, turn off the pony pump, move it to the hot water side, and repeat the procedure with all the hot water taps. Turn off the pump when finished.

Finally, it is time to treat the traps and toilets. Add regular car antifreeze to the toilet tanks and flush, holding down the handle draining out as much of the water from the tank as possible. Pour a cup of antifreeze down each sink drain too so that the traps are treated. Finally, open the water heater's drain valve and all hot water taps which will allow water to drain out of the heater.

==7. Diagram at least one type of passive water heating system, such as the use of solar energy.==
[[Image:Solar water heating schema.png|frame|1. Solar collector; 2. Controller; 3. Pump; 4. Pressure vessel; 5. Water tank with two coils; 6. Other heating source (boiler, heat pump etc.)]]
 

==References==
* http://www.free-ed.net/sweethaven/BldgConst/Plumbing01/
* http://www.tpub.com/content/construction/14265/index.htm
* http://www.contractormag.com/articles/column.cfm?columnid=426 (Winterizing)

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Paperhanging/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. State how to properly choose designs and combinations of wallpaper for the following:==
:You probably should look at this article on Wikipedia about [[W:Interior_decoration|Interior decoration]].

:The way the room is used will largely dictate the designs and combinations of wallpaper that should be used.

:A room theme is a consistent idea used throughout a room to create a feeling of completeness. Room themes can follow period styles. Examples of this are Louis XV, Victorian or Art Deco. The evolution of interior decoration themes has now grown to include themes not necessarily consistent with a specific period style allowing the mixing of pieces from different periods. Each element should contribute to form or function or both and maintain a consistent standard of quality and combine to create the desired design.

:Here are some links: (you may find others)
:* [http://www.doityourself.com/stry/whywallcoverings How to choose wallpaper]

===a. Living room===
:Think about how this room is used. For some homes, this is a formal guest area and used to visit with your guests. Others may emphasize the ''living'' part of this room, and the family may actually use it for daily living.
===b. Dining room===
:Most likely this room will be where you take your meals. So, the theme or pattern should be in harmony.
===c. Bedroom===
:Ah, this would be where you bed down for the night, although, some of you might spend a lot of time cooped up here to stay away from icky siblings.
===d. Bathroom===
:As mentioned earlier, wallpaper may not be happy with the extra moisture in the bathroom.
===e. Kitchen===
:For some homes, this may be the center of all activity.
===f. Children's play room===
:Depending on the age of the children, the wallpaper selection may be different.

===g. Church===
:This is where we worship God. So, think of something that would be in line with the use.

==2. Record in a notebook the answers to the above questions and on #3 include your design, color and material chosen for each room.==
:Well, hopefully you have been diligent and have written into a notebook your answers from Requirement #1 above.

==3. Show proper wall preparation for paper hanging.==
:[[W:Wallpaper|Wallpaper]] requires proper surface preparation before installing/hanging. Wallpaper is not suitable for all areas. For example, in a bathroom, wallpaper may deteriorate rapidly due to the steam from hot baths and/or the moisture in the bathroom. Proper preparation includes repairing defects in the drywall (or plaster), the removal of loose material, or, removing old adhesives. You should also remove light fixtures, towel hangers, wall plates, etc., so as to create a better surface for your work. Don't forget to prime the wall.

==4. Explain how to hang wallpaper. Describe at least two methods. Use one method to paper at least two walls of a home, such as in bedrooms, living rooms, etc. Show proper pattern matching.==
:* Start in a inconspicuous corner. Since it would be difficult to match the pattern once you come back around the room, you want this to be in the most un-noticeable spot.

:* From this starting spot, measure out the width of the wallpaper on the wall from this corner. Come back a 1/4-inch and draw a plumb line on the wall. This plumb line will help line up your first sheet. Also, draw a second plumb line for your next sheet.

:* Roll out your wallpaper and cut the first few strips to length. If you have a pattern to match (edge to edge), make sure that the strips are long enough so that the wall is covered (top to bottom) when the pattern matches.

:* Roll the strips in water, making sure to include all the edges. Fold the top 1/3 of the wallpaper back onto itself (adhesive sides facing each other. Fold the bottom in a similar fashion, overlapping the top slightly. This is called 'booking' the paper, and allows the glue to activate. ''Sometimes, I use an 'adhesive activator' instead, and sometimes I use wallpaper adhesive''. Prepare only a few strips so that the adhesive does not dry out before you are ready to 'hang' the wallpaper.

:* Use the first pencil line as a guide to hang your first strip of wallpaper. Use a squeegee to smooth out the wallpaper and ensure a good attachment to the wall. Cut off the excess wallpaper on the top and the bottom using a sharp knife and a straight edge. You are now ready for the second piece.

:* When hanging wallpaper, I've overlapped the seams as well as butted the seams, and right now I'm reading that the seams should not overlap. When you hang your second, and subsequent pieces, make sure the pattern matches the previous piece. Use a seam roller to work the seams flat.

:* After turning a corner, cut off the wallpaper 1/4 inch after the corner and start a new strip. This will prevent problems like the wallpaper from pulling away at the corner (it shrinks a little after drying).

:* You're going to learn a new routine - cut, wet, book, hang, smooth, trim.

:* Enjoy!

==Historical Notes==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Painting/History}}

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Native Brush Construction/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|Unknown|Unknown|Vocational|South Pacific Division/Island Ed.}}
==1. Assist in setting out the ground of a simple house squarely and accurately. ==
[[Image:Geometry Rectangle.svg|thumb|300px||left|Laying out a rectangle]]
[[Image:Parallelogram.png|thumb|200px|right|Skewed rectangle]]
A house that is "square" is one whose corners form right angles (90°). The house itself can be any type of rectangle or collection of rectangles (it doesn't have to be a square).

To lay out a perfect rectangle, the wall that connects the corners A and B (we'll call that wall AB) must be the same length as the wall that connects corners C and D (which we'll call CD). Further, wall BC must be the same length as AD. But that's just the starting point. Even if all the walls are the proper length, the rectangle can be skewed to form a parallelogram (see illustration)

To correct for this, all we need to do is make sure the diagonals in our rectangle are equal length. The diagonals are the imaginary lines connecting A to C and B to D (that is, AC and BD).

It is best to choose the location of two corners of the house and drive stakes in the ground to mark where they will go. Then take the remaining measurements from these two corners, adjusting the position of the other two corners until the diagonals are equal and the sides are the right length. Then drive these stakes in the ground. Once the stakes have been driven, measure the lines again. If the distances are wrong, start over. If a house is laid out crooked, it will affect every other aspect of its construction, making every job in building it more difficult.
{{clear}}

==2. Assist with choosing and cutting proper timber from the bush for posts, floor, rafters, wall plates, studs, steps and doors. ==
==3. a. Plait local materials for walls. ==
==3. b. Make sections for a wall 1m x 1m and show two different wall patterns.==
==4. Show ability to thatch a roof correctly, especially the ridge and hips using kunai grass, sago palm leaves, coconut palm leaves or any other materials. ==
See the [[../../Arts and Crafts/Thatching|Thatching]] honor for detailed instruction.

==5. Where applicable select, prepare and use vines for tying and lashing.==
==6. Take part in building a house not less than 4m x 2m using native materials. In building the house practice all demonstrations nos. 1-5. Show while building the house that you have taken measures to keep it free from termites.==
==7. Demonstrate ability to name, use and care for the following tools: ax, saw, hammer, chisel, bush knife, ruler and tape spade.==
==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Masonry/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:42Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1937|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Name at least six materials commonly used by masons in the erection of walls or buildings.==
Primary materials include:
# Brick
# Concrete Block (also known as cinder block)
# Poured Concrete
# Stone
# Glass Block
# Tile

Secondary materials include
# Mortar
# Rebar
# Grout

==2. Demonstrate ability to use properly the following:==
=== Plumb line===
[[image:Plumb_bob.jpg|thumb|200px|Plumb Line]]
A plumb line is a string with a plumb bob at the end of it. The plumb bob hangs straight down, so the plumb line can be used to make sure that a wall is perfectly vertical and does not lean in any direction. A perfectly vertical line is said to be ''plumb''.
 

=== Line stretcher (chicken legs)===
A line stretcher is used for guiding the mason when laying brick or other materials in a straight line. Typically, the mason will build up the corners or ends of a wall first, stretch a line between them, and lay the remaining bricks between them. The line stretcher is often set about a sixteenth of an inch away from the wall so that the bricks do not touch it (otherwise they might push the line out).
 

=== Level===
[[image:DetalleNivelDeBurbuja.jpg|thumb|200px|Level]]
A spirit level or bubble level is an instrument designed to indicate whether a surface is level or plumb. Spirit levels feature a slightly curved glass tube which is incompletely filled with a liquid, usually colored 'spirit' (a synonym for ethanol), leaving a bubble in the tube. Ethanol is used because of its low freezing point, −114°C, which prevents it from freezing in cold weather. Most commonly spirit levels are employed to indicate how horizontal (level) or how vertical (plumb) a surface is.
 

=== Trowel===
[[image:Masons_trowel.jpg|thumb|200px|Trowel]]
A trowel is used for applying mortar to bricks, blocks, or other material. It is also used for "throwing a mortar line" - that is, laying a line of mortar atop the surface upon which that the bricks will be laid.
 

=== S-tool===
An S-Tool is more commonly known as a jointer. The purpose of the S-tool is to place the grooves in the mortar between bricks. The concave grooves seen within the mortar lines of bricks are placed there by scraping the S-tool along the mortar well before it sets.

The S-tool should be used sometime between the time that the mortar is placed, and when it begins to harden. If the S-tool is used too late, then it will result in uneven lines throughout the mortar. The mortar will not have a smooth concave surface, and will look very raggedy.

Sometimes an S-tool is not used, and the mortar is placed on in excess; the slapping of the bricks causes it to drip down over the bricks, and it has a very nice effect when the bricks are painted afterwards.
 

=== Mason's hammer===
[[image:Masons_hammer.jpg|thumb|200px|Mason's hammer]]
A Mason's hammer has one flat traditional face and a short or long chisel-shaped blade. It can thus be used to chip off edges or small pieces of stone without using a separate chisel. The chisel blade can also be used to rapidly cut bricks or cinder blocks.
 

==3. Demonstrate a knowledge of building cement characteristics (know how to prevent sweating, cracking, shrinking, crumbling, and loss of strength).==
Properly mixing and curing concrete will address most of the problems listed here. Adding too much water to concrete will cause it to lose strength. Ideally, you should only add enough water to the dry ingredients to make them all slightly wet. It is sometimes necessary to add more water than this so that the concrete can be poured into a form, and in these cases, only enough water to get the concrete to flow should be added.

Once the concrete is wet, it will begin to cure. It must be kept moist while it cures, and this can be accomplished by slowing the evaporation of the water that was mixed into it. Usually, this is done by covering the concrete with plastic sheeting or by spraying it lightly with water as it cures.

Concrete will shrink and expand with temperature, so large slabs must be fitted with expansion joints. These are most commonly seen as the gaps in roadways and sidewalks, but they are also built into walls and other structures as well.

==4. Make usable mortar and state proper proportions of ingredients (lime, sand, etc.).==
There are two basic types of mortar: type N and type S.

'''Type N''' mortar is used for interior work and exterior work that is above grade (that is, not buried). It is made by combining:

* Lime (one part)
* Cement (one part)
* Sand (six parts)

'''Type S''' mortar is used for below-grade applications such as retaining walls and basements. It is made by combining:

* Lime (one part)
* Cement (two parts)
* Sand (nine parts)

Water is added to either of these mixtures and worked in with a trowel or a hoe until it reaches the desired consistency. Both types can be purchased pre-mixed so the mason need only add the water. Mixing is done on a hard flat surface, often in a wheelbarrow or on a sheet of plywood, but more properly in a mortar box.

==5. Lay a straight stone, brick, or block masonry wall at least four feet (1.2 meters) high and ten feet (3.0 meters) long, including an inside or outside corner (surface must be struck and broomed).==
===Brick===
Good bricklaying procedure depends on good workmanship and efficiency. Efficiency involves doing the work with the fewest possible motions. Each motion should have a purpose and should accomplish a definite result. After learning the fundamentals, every builder should develop methods for achieving maximum efficiency. The work must be arranged in such a way that the Builder is continually supplied with brick and mortar. The scaffolding required must be planned before the work begins. It must be built in such a way as to cause the least interference with other crew members.

To efficiently and effectively lay bricks, you must be familiar with the terms that identify the position of masonry units and mortar joints in a wall. The following list, which is referenced in '''Figure 1''', provides some of the basic terms you will encounter.

[[Image:Brick_terms.jpg|frame|'''Figure 1''']]
 
;Course: One of several continuous, horizontal layers (or rows) of masonry units bonded together.

;Wythe: Each continuous, vertical section of a wall, one masonry unit thick. Sometimes called a tier.

;Stretcher: A masonry unit laid flat on its bed along the length of a wall with its face parallel to the face of the wall.

;Header: A masonry unit laid flat on its bed across the width of a wall with its face perpendicular to the face of the wall. Generally used to bond two wythes.

;Row lock: A header laid on its face or edge across the width of a wall.

;Bull header: A rowlock brick laid with its bed perpendicular to the face of the wall.

;Bull stretcher: A rowlock brick laid with its bed parallel to the face of the wall.

;Soldier: A brick laid on its end with its face perpendicular to the face of the wall.

====Bonds====
The term “bond” as used in masonry has three different meanings: structural bond, mortar bond, or pattern bond. Structural bond refers to how the individual masonry units interlock or tie together into a single structural unit. You can achieve structural bonding of brick and tile walls in one of three ways:

*Overlapping (interlocking) the masonry units
*Embedding metal ties in connecting joints
*Using grout to adhere adjacent wythes of masonry.

Mortar bond refers to the adhesion of the joint mortar to the masonry units or to the reinforcing steel. Pattern bond refers to the pattern formed by the masonry units and mortar joints on the face of a wall. The pattern may result from the structural bond, or may be purely decorative and unrelated to the structural bond. '''Figure 2''' shows the six basic pattern bonds in common use today: running, common or American, Flemish, English, stack, and English cross or Dutch bond.
[[Image:Types_of_masonry_bonds.jpg|frame|'''Figure 2''']]
 
The running bond is the simplest of the six patterns, consisting of all stretchers. Because the bond has no headers, metal ties usually form the structural bond.

The common, or American, bond is a variation of the running bond, having a course of full-length headers at regular intervals that provide the structural bond as well as the pattern. Header courses usually appear at every fifth, sixth, or seventh course, depending on the structural bonding requirements. You can vary the common bond with a Flemish header course. In laying out any bond pattern, be sure to start the corners correctly. In a common bond, use a three-quarter closure at the corner of each header course.

In the Flemish bond, each course consists of alternating headers and stretchers. The headers in every other course center over and under the stretchers in the courses in between. The joints between stretchers in all stretcher courses align vertically. When headers are not required for structural bonding, you can use bricks called blind headers. You can start the corners in two different ways. In the Dutch corner, a three-quarter closure starts each course. In the English corner, a 2-inch or quarter closure starts the course.

The English bond consists of alternating courses of headers and stretchers. The headers center over and under the stretchers. However, the joints between stretchers in all stretcher courses do not align vertically. You can use blind headers in courses that are not structural bonding courses.

The stack bond is purely a pattern bond, with no overlapping units and all vertical joints aligning. You must use dimensionally accurate or carefully rematched units to achieve good vertical joint alignment. You can vary the pattern with combinations and modifications of the basic patterns shown above. This pattern usually bonds to the backing with rigid steel ties or 8-inch-thick stretcher units when available. In large wall areas or load-bearing construction, insert steel pencil rods into the horizontal mortar joints as reinforcement.

[[image:Metal_masonry_ties.jpg|right|frame|300px|'''Figure 3''' Metal Masonry Ties]]

The English cross or Dutch bond is a variation of the English bond. It differs only in that the joints between the stretchers in the stretcher courses align vertically. These joints center on the headers in the courses above and below.

When a wall bond has no header courses, use metal ties to bond the exterior wall brick to the backing courses. '''Figure 3''' shows three typical metal ties.

Install flashing at any spot where moisture is likely to enter a brick masonry structure. Flashing diverts the moisture back outside. Always install flashing under horizontal masonry surfaces, such as sills and copings; at intersections between masonry walls and horizontal surfaces, such as a roof and parapet or a roof and chimney; above openings (doors and windows, for example); and frequently at floor lines, depending on the type of construction. The flashing should extend through the exterior wall face and then turn downward against the wall face to form a drop.

You should provide weep holes at intervals of 18 to 24 inches to drain water to the outside that might accumulate on the flashing. Weep holes are even more important when appearance requires the flashing to stop behind the wall face instead of extending through the wall. This type of concealed flashing, when combined with tooled mortar joints, often retains water in the wall for long periods and, by concentrating the moisture at one spot, does more harm than good.

====Mortar Joints and Pointing====
There is no set rule governing the thickness of a brick masonry mortar joint. Irregularly shaped bricks may require mortar joints up to 1/2 inch thick to compensate for the irregularities. However, mortar joints 1/4 inch thick are the strongest. Use this thickness when the bricks are regular enough in shape to permit it. A slushed joint is made simply by depositing the mortar on top of the head joints and allowing it to run down between the bricks to form a joint. You cannot make solid joints this way. Even if you fill the space between the bricks completely, there is no way you can compact the mortar against the brick faces; consequently a poor bond results.
The only effective way to build a good joint is to trowel it. The secret of mortar joint construction and pointing is in how you hold the trowel for spreading mortar.
[[Image:Holding_a_trowel.jpg|right|frame|'''Figure 4''' The proper way to hold a trowel]]

'''Figure 4''' shows the correct way to hold a trowel. Hold it firmly in the grip shown, with your thumb resting on top of the handle, not encircling it. If you are right-handed, pick up mortar from the outside of the mortar board pile with the left edge of your trowel. You can pick up enough to spread one to five bricks, depending on the wall space and your skill. A pickup for one brick forms only a small pile along the left edge of the trowel. A pickup for five bricks is a full load for a large trowel.

 
[[Image:Picking up and spreading mortar.jpg|frame|'''Figure 5''']]
 

[[Image:Poor_mortar_bond.jpg|frame|left|'''Figure 6''' Poor mortar bond]]

If you are right-handed, work from left to right along the wall. Holding the left edge of the trowel directly over the center line of the previous course, tilt the trowel slightly and move it to the right (view 3), spreading an equal amount of mortar on each brick until you either complete the course or the trowel is empty (view 4). Return any mortar left over to the mortar board.

 
{| border="0"
!rowspan="2"|[[Image:Making a bed joint in a stretcher course.jpg|frame|right|'''Figure 7''' Making a bed joint in a stretcher course.]]
|[[Image:Buttering a brick.jpg|frame|left|'''Figure 8''' Proper way to hold a brick when buttering the end]]
|-
|[[Image:Making a head joint.jpg|frame|right|'''Figure 9''' Making a head joint in a stretcher course.]]
|}
 
Do not spread the mortar for a bed joint too far ahead of laying - four or five brick lengths is best. Mortar spread out too far ahead dries out before the bricks become bedded and causes a poor bond. The mortar must be soft and plastic so that the brick will bed in it easily. Spread the mortar about 1 inch thick and then make a shallow furrow in it (Figure 7, view 1). A furrow that is too deep leaves a gap between the mortar and the bedded brick. This reduces the resistance of the wall to water penetration. Using a smooth, even stroke, cut off any mortar projecting beyond the wall line with the edge of the trowel (view 2). Retain enough mortar on the trowel to butter the left end of the first brick you will lay in the fresh mortar. Throw the rest back on the mortar board. Pick up the first brick to be laid with your thumb on one side of the brick and your fingers on the other. Apply as much mortar as will stick to the end of the brick and then push it into place (Figure 8). Squeeze out the excess mortar at the head joint and at the sides. Make sure the mortar completely fills the head joint (Figure 9). After bedding the brick, cut off the excess mortar and use it to start the next end joint. Throw any surplus mortar back on the mortar board where it can be restored to workability.

{| border="0"
|[[Image:Inserting a brick in a wall space.jpg|frame|300px|left|'''Figure 10''']]
|[[Image:Making a cross joint.jpg|frame|300px|right|'''Figure 11''']]
|}

 
'''Figure 10''' shows how to insert a brick into a space left in a wall. First, spread a thick bed of mortar (view 1), and then shove the brick into the wall space (view 2) until mortar squeezes out of all four joints (view 3). This way, you know that the joints are full of mortar at every point. To make a cross joint in a header course, spread the bed joint mortar several brick widths in advance. Then, spread mortar over the face of the header brick before placing it in the wall ('''Figure 11''', view 1). Next, shove the brick into place, squeezing out mortar at the top of the joint. Finally, cut off the excess mortar as shown in view 2.

 
[[Image:Closure joint in header course.jpg|frame|'''Figure 12''']]
 

'''Figure 12''' shows how to lay a closure brick in a header course. First, spread about 1 inch of mortar on the sides of the brick already in place (view 1), as well as on both sides of the closure brick (view 2). Then, lay the closure brick carefully into position without disturbing the brick already laid (view 3). If you do disturb any adjacent brick, cracks will form between the brick and mortar, allowing moisture to penetrate the wall. You should place a closure brick for a stretcher course using the same techniques as for a header course. As we mentioned earlier, filling exposed joints with mortar immediately after laying a wall is called pointing. You can also fill holes and correct defective mortar joints by pointing, using a pointing trowel.

 

===Block===
====Planning====
The first step in laying a block wall is to carefully plan the project. When using concrete block to build a wall, it is important to select the dimensions of the wall based on the size of the block. Standard concrete blocks are 7 5/8" wide, 7 5/8" deep, and 15 5/8" long. Assuming that the mortar joint is 3/8" thick brings the block plus mortar dimensions to 8x8x16". You will want the outside dimension of the wall to be a multiple of a half-block length (minus one mortar joint) so that you do not have to cut blocks to a custom size. The height of the wall should also be a multiple of the block height (including the mortar joint).

====Locate the Corners====
[[Image:Block wall first course.jpg|frame|right|Figure 13: Laying the first course]]
The first step in building a concrete masonry wall is to locate the corners of the structure. In locating the corners, you should also make sure the footing or slab
formation is level so that each builder starts each section wall on a common plane. This also helps ensure that the bed joints are straight when the sections are connected. If the foundation is badly out of level, the entire first course should be laid before builders begin working on other courses. If this is not possible, a level plane should be established with a transit or engineer’s level.

====Chase Out Bond====
The second step is to chase out bond, or lay out, by placing the first course of blocks without mortar (Figure 13, view 1).

{| border="0"
|[[Image:Block wall leveling.jpg|frame|Figure 14: Leveling and plumbing first course of blocks for a wall.]]
!rowspan="2"|[[Image:Checking each course.jpg|frame|Figure 16: Checking each course at the corner.]]
|-
|[[Image:Vertical joints.jpg|frame|Figure 15: Vertical joints.]]
|}

Snap a chalk line to mark the footing and align the blocks accurately. Then, use a piece of material 3/8 inch thick to properly space the blocks. This helps you get an accurate measurement.
====Lay the Mortar Bed====
The third step is to replace the loose blocks with a full mortar bed, spreading and furrowing it with a trowel to ensure plenty of mortar under the bottom edges of the first course (figure 13, view 2). Carefully position and align the corner block first (view 3 of figure 14). Lay the remaining first-course blocks with the thicker end up to provide a larger mortar-bedding area. For the vertical joints, apply mortar only to the block ends by placing several blocks on end and buttering them all in one operation (view 4). Make the joints 3/8 inch thick. Then, place each block in its final position, and push the block down vertically into the mortar bed and against the previously laid block. This ensures a well-tilled vertical mortar joint (view 5). After laying three or four blocks, use a mason’s level as a straightedge to check correct block alignment (figure 14, view 1). Then, use the level to bring the blocks to proper grade and plumb by tapping with a trowel handle as shown in view 2. Always lay out the first course of concrete masonry carefully and make sure that you properly align, level, and plumb it. This assures that succeeding courses and the final wall are both straight and true.

====Build Up the Corners====
The fourth step is to build up the corners of the wall, usually four or five courses high. This is also called laying up a lead. Step back each course one-half block. For the horizontal joints, apply mortar only to the tops of the blocks already laid. For the vertical joints, you can apply mortar either to the ends of the new block or the end of the block previously laid, or both, to ensure well-filled joints (figure 15). As you lay each course at the corner, check the course with a level for alignment (figure 16, view 1), for level (view 2), and for plumb (view 3). Carefully check each block with a level or straightedge to make sure that all the block faces are in the same plane. This ensures true, straight walls.
{| border="0" cellspacing="5" cellpadding="5"
|[[Image:Story_pole.jpg|frame|right|Figure 17: Using a story or course pole.]]
|[[Image:Masonry horizontal spacing.jpg|frame|right|Figure 18: Checking the Horizontal Spacing.]]
|}
[[Image:Masonry between corners.jpg|frame|right|Figure 19: Filling in the wall between corners.]]
A story or course pole, which is a board with markings 8 inches apart (figure 17), helps accurately place each masonry course. Also check the horizontal block spacing by placing a level diagonally across the corners of the blocks (figure 18). When filling in the wall between the corners, first stretch a mason’s line along the extensor block edges from corner to corner for each course. Then lay the top outside edge of each new block to this line (figure 19). How you grip a block before laying is important. First, tip it slightly toward you so that you can see the edge of the course below. Then place the lower edge of the new block directly on the edges of the block below (figure 19). Make all position adjustments while the mortar is soft and plastic. Any adjustments you make after the mortar stiffens will break the mortar bond and allow water to penetrate. Level each block and align it to the mason’s line by tapping it lightly with a trowel handle.

====Installing the Closure Block====
{| border="0" cellspacing="5" cellpadding="5"
|[[Image:Closure block.jpg|frame|right|Figure 20: Installing the closure block.]]
|[[Image:Cut_off_excess_mortar.jpg|frame|Figure 21: Cutting off excess mortar from the joints.]]
|} 
Fifth and last, before installing the closure block, butter both edges of the opening and all four vertical edges of the closure block with mortar. Then, lower the closure block carefully into place (figure 20). If any mortar falls out, leaving an open joint, remove the block and repeat the procedure. To assure a good bond, do not spread mortar too far ahead when actually laying blocks. If you do, the mortar will stiffen and lose its plasticity. The recommended width of mortar joints for concrete masonry units is 3/8 inch. When properly made, these joints produce a weathertight, neat, and durable concrete masonry wall.
 
{| border="0" cellspacing="5" cellpadding="5"
|[[Image:Tooled_mortar_joints.jpg|frame|Figure 22: Tooled mortar joints for weathertight exterior walls.]]
|[[Image:Tooling_mortar_joints.jpg|frame|Figure 23:Tooling mortar joints.]]
|} 
As you lay each block, cut off excess mortar from the joints using a trowel (figure 21) and throw it back on the mortar board to rework into the fresh mortar. Do not, however, rework any mortar dropped on the scaffold or floor. Weathertight joints and the neat appearance of concrete masonry walls depend on proper striking (tooling). After laying a section of the wall, tool the mortar joint when the mortar becomes “thumb print” hard. Tooling compacts the mortar and forces it tightly against the masonry on each side of the joint. Use either concave or V-shaped tooling on all joints (figure 22).
 

[[Image:Installing anchor bolts.jpg|frame|Figure 24: Installing anchor bolts for wood plates.]]
Tool horizontal joints (figure 23, view 1) with a long jointer first, followed by tooling the vertical joints (view 2). Trim off mortar burrs from the tooling flush with the wall face using a trowel, soft bristle brush, or by rubbing with a burlap bag.

A procedure known as pointing may be required after jointing. Pointing is the process of inserting mortar into horizontal and vertical joints after the unit has been laid. Basically, pointing is done to restore or replace deteriorated surface mortar in old work. Pointing of this nature is called tuck pointing. However, even in freshly laid masonry, pointing may be necessary for filling holes or correcting defective joints.

You must prepare in advance for installing wood plates with anchor bolts on top of hollow concrete masonry walls. To do this, place pieces of metal lath in the second horizontal mortar joint from the top of the wall under the cores that will contain the bolts (figure 24, view 1). Use anchor bolts 1/2 inch in diameter and 18 inches long. Space them not more than 4 feet apart. Then, when you complete the top course, insert the bolts into the cores of the top two courses and till the cores with concrete or mortar. The metal lath underneath holds the concrete or mortar filling in place. The threaded end of the bolt should extend above the top of the wall (view 2).
 

==6. Pour a level footing, using hand mixed cement and proper reinforcement.==
{| border=0
|[[image:Typical_footing_form.jpg|frame|Figure 25: Typical footing form.]]
|[[Image:Footing keyway.jpg|frame|Figure 26: Methods of bracing bearing wall footing forms and placing a keyway.]]
|}
 
A footing is a concrete structure upon which a wall is built. Figure 25 shows a typical footing formwork for a bearing wall, and figure 26 shows bracing methods for a bearing footing. A bearing wall, also called a load-bearing wall, is an exterior wall that serves as an enclosure and also transmits structural loads to the foundation. The form sides are 2-inch lumber whose width equals the footing depth. Stakes hold the sides in place while spreaders maintain the correct distance between them. The short braces at each stake hold the form in line. A keyway is made in the wet concrete by placing a 2-by-2-inch board along the center of the wall footing form. After the concrete is dry, the board is removed. This leaves an indentation, or key, in the concrete. When you pour the foundation wall, the key provides a tie between the footing and wall.

Concrete is strong under compression, but relatively weak under tension. The reverse is true for steel. Therefore, when the two are combined, one makes up for the deficiency of the other. When steel is embedded in concrete in a manner that assists it in carrying imposed loads, the combination is known as reinforced concrete. The steel may consist of welded wire fabric or expanded metal mesh, but, more often, it consists of reinforcing bars, or more commonly "rebar."

Before placing reinforcing steel in forms, use a piece of burlap to clean the bars of rust, scale, grease, mud, or other foreign matter. A light film of rust or mill scale is not objectionable. Rebars must be tied together for the bars to remain in a desired arrangement during pouring. Tying is also a means of keeping laps or splices in place. Laps allow bond stress to transfer the load from one bar, first into the concrete and then into the second bar.

Once the forms are in place and the rebar has been laid, it is time to mix the concrete. You can get the dry ingredients premixed and simply add water to it (follow the directions on the bag). Mixing can be done in a wheelbarrow or in a mixer. Use a hoe to work the water into the cement until it is thoroughly worked in. Do not add more water to the mix than the bag indicates is acceptable. Adding too much water will create a weaker concrete. When the mixing is complete, pour the concrete into the forms. You must then consolidate the concrete.

Consolidation eliminates rock pockets and air bubbles and brings enough fine material both to the surface and against the forms to produce the desired finish. You can use such hand tools as spades, puddling sticks, or tampers, but mechanical vibrators are best. Any compacting device must reach the bottom of the form and be small enough to pass between reinforcing bars. The process involves carefully working around all reinforcing steel with the compacting device to assure proper embedding of reinforcing steel in the concrete. Since the strength of the concrete member depends on proper reinforcement location, be careful not to displace the reinforcing steel.

Manual consolidation methods require spades, puddling sticks, or various types of tampers. To consolidate concrete by spading, insert the spade along the inside surface of the forms, through the layer just placed, and several inches into the layer underneath. Continue spading or puddling until the coarse aggregate disappears into the concrete.

====Finishing====
The finishing process provides the final concrete surface. There are many ways to finish concrete surfaces, depending on the effect required. Sometimes you only need to correct surface defects, fill bolt holes, or clean the surface. Unformed surfaces may require only screeding to proper contour and elevation, or a broomed, floated, or troweled finish may be specified.

====Screeding====
The top surface of a floor slab, sidewalk, or pavement is rarely placed at the exact specified elevation. Screeding brings the surface to the required elevation by striking off the excess concrete. Two types of screeds are used in concrete finishing operations: the hand screed and the mechanical screed.

Hand screeding requires a tool called a screed. This is actually a template (usually a 2-by-4) having a straight lower edge to produce a flat surface (or a curved lower edge to produce a curved surface). Move the screed back and forth across the concrete using a sawing motion. With each sawing motion, move the screed forward an inch or so along the forms. This forces the concrete built up against the screed face into the low spots. If the screed tends to tear the surface, as it may on air-entrained concrete due to its sticky nature, either reduce the rate of forward movement or cover the lower edge of the screed with metal. This stops the tearing action in most cases.

==7. Make the forms and lay a piece of concrete walk or floor, using commercially mixed cement. Finish it and rule it.==
The interpretation of "commercially mixed" cement is up to interpretation. If you call a concrete company and have them show up with a cement truck, that is certainly "commercial." But if it's a small job, you may wish to use "commercially mixed" cement available in bags (just add water). It's up to you.

To lay a sidewalk or a floor, proceed as described for a footing, but once the screeding is done, there are additional steps in finishing: floating, edging, and troweling:

===Floating===
If a smoother surface is required than the one obtained by screeding, the surface should be worked sparingly with a wood or aluminum magnesium float. The aluminum float, which is used the same way as the wood float, gives the finished concrete a much smoother surface. To avoid cracking and dusting of the finished concrete, begin aluminum floating when the water sheen disappears from the freshly placed concrete surface. Do not use cement or water as an aid in finishing the surface. Floating has three purposes:
# to embed aggregate particles just beneath the surface;
# to remove slight imperfections (high and low spots); and,
# to compact the concrete at the surface in preparation for other finishing operations.

Begin floating immediately after screeding while the concrete is still plastic and workable. However, do not overwork the concrete while it is still plastic because you may bring an excess of water and paste to the surface. This fine material forms a thin, weak layer that will scale or quickly wear off under use. To remove a coarse texture as the final finish, you usually have to float the surface a second time after it partially hardens.

===Edging===
As the sheen of water begins to leave the surface, edging should begin. All edges of a slab that do not abut another structure should be finished with an edger. An edger dresses corners and rounds or bevels the concrete edges. Edging the slab helps prevent chipping at the corners and helps give the slab a finished appearance.

===Troweling===
If a dense, smooth finish is desired, floating must be followed by steel troweling . Troweling should begin after the moisture film or sheen disappears from the floated surface and when the concrete has hardened enough to prevent fine material and water from being worked to the surface. This step should be delayed as long as possible. Troweling too early tends to produce crazing and lack of durability. However, too long a delay in troweling results in a surface too hard to finish properly. The usual tendency is to start to trowel too soon. Troweling should leave the surface smooth, even, and free of marks and ripples. Spreading dry cement on a wet surface to take up excess water is not a good practice where a wear-resistant and durable surface is required. Wet spots must be avoided if possible. When they do occur, however, finishing operations should not be resumed until the water has been absorbed, has evaporated, or has been mopped up.

An unslippery, fine-textured surface can be obtained by troweling lightly over the surface with a circular motion immediately after the first regular troweling. In this process, the trowel is kept flat on the surface of the concrete. Where a hard steel-troweled finish is required, follow the first regular troweling by a second troweling. The second troweling should begin after the concrete has become hard enough so that no mortar adheres to the trowel, and a ringing sound is produced as the trowel passes over the surface. During this final troweling, the trowel should be tilted slightly and heavy pressure exerted to thoroughly compact the surface. Hairline cracks are usually due to a concentration of water and extremely fine aggregates at the surface. This results from overworking the concrete during finishing operations. Such cracking is aggravated by drying and cooling too rapidly. Checks that develop before troweling can usually be closed by pounding the concrete with a hand float.

==8. Write a paragraph describing the behavior of cement; that is, its reaction to water, its adhesive qualities, how long it takes to set, etc.==
Adding water to Portland cement to form the water-cement paste that holds concrete together starts a chemical reaction that makes the paste into a bonding agent. This reaction, called hydration, produces a stone-like substance — the hardened cement paste. Both the rate and degree of hydration, and the resulting strength of the final concrete, depend on the curing process that follows placing and consolidating the plastic concrete. Hydration continues indefinitely at a decreasing rate as long as the mixture contains water and the temperature conditions are favorable. Once the water is removed, hydration ceases and cannot be restarted. Curing is the period of time from consolidation to the point where the concrete reaches its design strength. During this period, you must take certain steps to keep the concrete moist and as near 73°F (23°C) as practical. The properties of concrete, such as freeze and thaw resistance, strength, watertightness, wear resistance, and volume stability, cure or improve with age as long as you maintain the moisture and temperature conditions favorable to continued hydration. The length of time that you must protect concrete against moisture loss depends on the type of cement used, mix proportions, required strength, size and shape of the concrete mass, weather, and future exposure conditions. The period can vary from a few days to a month or longer. For most structural use, the curing period for cast-in-place concrete is usually 3 days to 2 weeks. This period depends on such conditions as temperature, cement type, mix proportions, and so forth.

==Historical Notes==
''Masonry'' was introduced in 1937, discontinued in 1956, and revised and reintroduced in 1986.
==References==
Much of the material for requirements 5 through 8 was taken verbatim from the U.S. Navy's training manual ''NAVEDTRA 14043''. Since this manual is an original work of the U.S. Federal government, it is in the public domain, meaning it is legal (and ethical) to use it for any purpose (including providing the excellent instruction for this difficult requirement).
* [http://www.tpub.com/content/construction/14043/index.htm US Navy NAVEDTRA 14043, Builders 2&3 Volume 1]
* [[w:Masonry|Wikipedia article on Masonry]]
* http://www.free-ed.net/sweethaven/BldgConst/Masonry/lessonmain.asp?iNum=fra0307
* http://www.quikrete.com/diy/BasicBrickConstruction.html

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Journalism/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Describe the elements of a good lead paragraph and the use and importance of headlines.==
===Lead Paragraph===
The beginning of a news or feature story is called "the lead."
The lead is typically a single paragraph -- occasionally a single sentence -- that summarizes the most important information that the story will convey.
In addition to quickly relaying information, a good lead grabs the reader's attention and convinces them to keep reading.

Occasionally, a story will not begin with the most important information it contains; such information may be relegated to the end of the first paragraph, or even to the second paragraph.
This is called "burying the lead."
A buried lead can be a powerful, dramatic technique to draw readers in -- or a glaring signal to readers that the writer doesn't know what is important about the topic their story covers.

In addition to drawing the reader into the story, a lead -- like all journalistic writing -- must: be clearly written, be free of typographical errors, and use grammar and language appropriate for the venue and audience.

===Headlines===
Text publications use headlines to grab readers' interest and convey the subject of a story, but they must do so even more succinctly than the lead: seldom is a headline more than a single line -- and frequently no more than a handful of words.

While the writer of a story writes its lead, they don't usually provide the headline that gets published.
Story writers often recommend a headline for their story, but these are largely only seen by the publication staff.
Most sizeable publications employ staff specifically to generate headlines after reading the story.
At smaller publications, the editor writes the headlines.

In his textbook on editing, journalist and journalism professor Tom Lieb says that all headlines fundamentally seek either to inform or grab attention.

Informative headlines quickly summarize news, allowing readers to receive facts while they determine which stories to read in detail.
Generally, Lieb says, informative headlines should follow a subject-verb-object model.
Lieb says such headlines should: be active, rather than passive; avoid most auxiliary/"helping" verbs and prepositions, because the reader can immediately figure these out on their own; and be written in present or future tense, to emphasize that the news either is current or addresses something that has not yet occurred.

Attention-grabbing headlines tend to be used for feature articles that are interesting but not of vital importance.
They rely on a variety of literary and/or poetic techniques, such as rhyme, puns, and allusion.
Unlike informative headlines, attention-grabbing headlines may not have a subject, Lieb says.

Regardless of the type of headline, they are specially formatted.
Headlines are always in a different font than that of the story itself. Headlines were historically written in title case, or upstyle, where every word is capitalized except articles and short prepositions.
Most publications today use sentence case, or downstyle, where only the first word and proper nouns are capitalized.

==2. Write a news article of at least three paragraphs, using a good lead paragraph about something interesting that has happened in your church, school, home, or Pathfinder Club.==
Any of these topics should lend itself equally well to a news or feature story.
Because requirement 6 is suited to a feature story, however, Pathfinders who want to get experience with a variety of journalistic writing styles should write a news story to fulfill this requirement.

==3. What are the essentials of writing a good story?==
A journalist must, first and foremost, understand the subject they write a story about. The journalist must also understand their audience so they can decide what information to convey to that audience throughout the course of their story.
The story's lead should convince the audience to read the entire story.
Each paragraph in the story should build on information that preceded it and should also convince the reader to continue reading. Once the story has conveyed all of the information of relevance, it should end.
This method of organizing a story is called the Inverted Pyramid.

For news stories, the journalist should use the Inverted Pyramid so that readers who do not have time to read the entire story can stop at any point with the confidence that they received the most important of the information that the story contains.
In the case of print journalism, the Inverted Pyramid also ensures that any part of the story, or copy, that the editors don't have room to include in the published version is the least important.

For feature stories, especially literary non-fiction, journalists have more latitude to use descriptive and colorful language for the purpose of leaving the reader with a vivid picture and to help maintain their interest in the story.
Journalists must take care not to alter or misrepresent facts, however.

Regardless of the kind of story, a journalist must write the story using the correct and consistent style.
Which style is 'correct' is determined by the publication the journalist writes the story for, and publications of any appreciable size will formally define their style.
In North American news writing, the Associated Press, or AP, style is widely used and many newspapers either use it unchanged, or use it as the basis of their style.
AP style is frequently updated and is published as the book The Associated Press Stylebook and Libel Manual.
A publication that hires a journalist on a staff will provide the style guide.
Journalists who contact a publication about submitting a freelance story should specifically inquire about the style guide.

A style guide addresses grammar, spelling, and word usage, particularly for cases that have confused their journalists in the past.
The style guide should identify the publication's audience, as well, so that the journalist knows what kinds of information need to be included in the story and what does not.
The AP manual also identifies reference resources that its writers are to rely in as sources of facts about particular kinds of information.
For example, it says which dictionary to use for spelling, except for those cases where the AP style guide overrides that dictionary.

==4. Know the difference between passive and active verbs, and give three comparative examples.==
In grammar, the voice (also called gender or diathesis) of a verb describes the relationship between the action (or state) that the verb expresses and the participants identified by its arguments (subject, object, etc.).
When the subject is the agent or actor of the verb, the verb is in the active voice.
When the subject is the patient, target or undergoer of the action, it is said to be in the passive voice.

For example, in the sentence:

:''The cat ate the mouse.''

the verb "ate" is in the active voice, but in the sentence:

:''The mouse was eaten by the cat.''

the verbal phrase "was eaten" is passive.

In a transformation from an active-voice clause to an equivalent passive-voice construction, the subject and the direct object switch grammatical roles.
The direct object gets promoted to subject, and the subject demoted to an (optional) complement.
In the examples above, the mouse serves as the direct object in the active-voice version, but becomes the subject in the passive version.
The subject of the active-voice version, the cat, becomes part of a prepositional phrase in the passive version of the sentence, and could be left out entirely.

Active verbs are generally preferred to passive verbs.
One clue for determining if a sentence is active or passive is the presence of a 'to-be'' verb (such as is, was, were, are, be). If one is found, the sentence is likely to be passive.
To change a sentence from passive to active, figure out who or what is performing the action specified by the verb, and see if you can rearrange the sentence to make the "actor" the subject.
===Examples===
The Pathfinder is encouraged to come up with his own examples, but we provide a few for inspiration:
{|border=1 cellspacing=1 cellpadding=5 width=90%
|-
! Passive Voice || Active Voice
|-
| The Journalism honor was earned by Johnny.
| Johnny earned the Journalism honor.
|-
| Our campfire was built by the Companion class.
| The Companion class built our club's campfire.
|-.
| The Explorers were taught Knot Tying by the Guides.
| The Guides taught Knot Tying to the Explorers.
|-
| Susan was rescued by the lifeguard.
| The lifeguard rescued Susan.
|}

==5. Write to a publisher, requesting story-writing guidelines.==
Story writing guidelines are available free from the following Seventh-day Adventist publishers:

: '''Pacific Press Publishing Association'''
: 1350 North Kings Road
: Nampa, ID 83687
: Phone: 208-465-2500
: Fax: 208-465-2531
: http://www.pacificpress.com/index.php?pgName=newsOLFPTsub

: '''Review and Herald Publishing Association''' 
: 55 West Oak Ridge Drive 
: Hagerstown, MD 21740
: http://www.reviewandherald.org/index.php/general/writers_guidelines.rhpa

==6. Write a story on one of the following:==
*'''a. How your family first accepted Christ, whether it was you, your parents, your grandparents, etc.'''
*'''b. Personal experiences of answered prayer or divine guidance.'''
*'''c. An interesting pet that you have had.'''
*'''d. An experience you have had while at summer camp or on a camping trip.'''
*'''e. When God first became real to you as a friend and personal savior.'''
*'''f. The most difficult thing about being a Christian today.'''
These ideas are almost exclusively suited for feature stories.
Pathfinders who want to write a news story while obtaining this Honor should do so for requirement 3, instead.

==7. Submit a story to a Seventh-day Adventist publication.==
When a Pathfinder considers which publication to write a story for, he or she should keep in mind that Seventh-day Adventist publications exist at all levels within the global church, and for a variety of audiences -- including non-Adventists.
Seventh-day Adventist print publications tend to be printed in magazine format, even if they are actually bi-weekly or monthly newspapers.

Take North America, for example.
The General Conference publishes the Adventist Review and Adventist World.
Various North American Division unions publish magazines, e.g. Atlantic Union Conference's The Gleaner or Southern Union Conference's Southern Tidings.
Individual Adventist institutions often produce their own publications as well.
For example, several academies in the Columbia Union Conference write newsletters that cover major events at their school; while those schools frequently published and circulated these newsletters in the past, they are now included in the Union's publication, Visitor.
Adventist academies and colleges generally have a student newspaper, and many churches also have newsletters, which contain information of interest to the local congregation.
Some of these publications exist both online and in print, while others only get published in one medium.

Not all Seventh-day Adventist publications specifically target Seventh-day Adventists.
The magazine Liberty, for instance, targets issues of religious freedom in the United States and is sent by the church to all members of Congress.
Various healthcare organizations affiliated with the Seventh-day Adventist church may generate publications for readers in their area.
The magazine Listen encourages children and young adults to live a drug- and alcohol-free life; it regularly features stories about non-Adventists, and focuses on an Adventist message without limiting its audience to Adventists.

==8. Know how to write a cover letter to the editor for submitting your story or article and write a cover letter to the editor to include with your story or article.==

==9. What education is helpful for getting into the career of journalism?==
Those who want to pursue a career in the field of journalism from the time they enter the workforce are best served by studying the subject at the undergraduate level.
Curricula for such college programs typically require that students take courses in mass media, communications theory, communications law, ethics, newswriting, feature writing, non-fiction writing, persuasive writing, desktop publishing, online publishing, statistics, computer-assisted reporting, and editing.
Journalism degree requirements typically also include at least one practicum/internship.
Schools that offer undergraduate degrees in the field of journalism frequently require the student to obtain a second major, e.g. a journalism student might also study business if they want to write for business media or religion if they want to write for religious media.

Within the Seventh-day Adventist educational system in North America, Andrews University, Pacific Union College, Southern Adventist University, Southwestern Adventist University, Union College (Lincoln, Nebr.), Walla Walla University and Washington Adventist University all offer an undergraduate degree either in journalism proper or in communications with a concentration/emphasis in journalism; most offer journalism as a minor area of study, as well.
La Sierra University's Department of English and Communication offers some journalism courses -- but neither a degree nor a concentration in the subject.
A multitude of public and private universities in North America offer similar courses and degrees.

Graduate degrees in journalism exist, though almost exclusively outside the Seventh-day Adventist education system.
Many professional journalists do study journalism at the graduate level, and degrees are offered both at the masters and doctoral level.

A Pathfinder need not wait until college to begin testing the waters of the pool that is journalism, however: many high schools -- and some middle schools -- sponsor a student newspaper published on a weekly to monthly basis.
And while locally-owned newspapers are much less common than they were a generation ago, some accept adolescent-written stories and articles; and many newspapers even publish a for-youth-by-youth section once or twice a week.

==10. What types of jobs are available for anyone who is interested in journalism?==
* beat writer/news writer
* broadcaster
* copyeditor/proofreader
* editor
* fact checker
* freelance author
* headline writer
* layout
* photojournalist
* publisher

==References==
* The Associated Press Stylebook and Libel Manual (Associated Press)
* Editing for Clear Communication (Thom Lieb)

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Internet - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|2006|Vocational|North American Division}}

==1. Have the Internet Honor ==
{{ay_prerequisite|Vocational|Internet}}
==2. Have the Basic Computer Honor==
{{ay_prerequisite|Vocational|Computer}}
==3. Define the following terms (or their equivalents) and tell when and how they are used:==
;a. HTTP:
Hyper-text Transfer Protocol. HTTP is the set of rules for exchanging files (text, graphic images, sound, video, and other multimedia files) on the World Wide Web. It is the actual communications protocol that enables Web browsing.

;b. Hyperlink :
A hyperlink, more commonly called a link, is an electronic connection between one web page to either (1) other web pages on the same web site, or (2) web pages located on another web site. More specifically, a hyperlink is a connection between one page of a hypertext document to another.

;c. HTML :
HyperText Markup Language, the coding language used to create hypertext documents for the World Wide Web. In HTML, a block of text can be surrounded with tags that indicate how it should appear (for example, in bold face or italics). Also, in HTML a word, a block of text, or an image can be linked to another file on the Web. HTML files are viewed with a World Wide Web browser, such as Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Netscape, or Opera (among others).

;d. Browser safe colors and hex codes:
'''Browser safe colors''' – Many monitors/graphics cards (especially those sold before 2002) were set to display only 256 of the millions of colors that are viewable to the human eye. The browser safe colors are those 216 defined colors that both PC and Macintosh monitors ALWAYS have in common. If those 216 colors are chosen to be used when creating or publishing a website, a user will always see the same colors that you do on your monitor (colors that aren’t part of this 216 color palette are known to sometimes dither, which means they may appear “purple” on one monitor, red on another, and orange on yet another. Photos are not usually grossly affected by this coding).

:'''Hex codes''' are the 6-alphanumeric digits that define the 216 websafe colors, as well as millions of other colors. This six digit format is the way that HTML tells the browser what colors to display. For example, #000000 is black, #FFFFFF is white, and #FF0000 is fire engine red. For a complete list of browser safe colors visit http://www.lynda.com/hex.html

;e. URL:
Uniform Resource Locater – The standard way to give the address of any resource on the Internet that is part of the World Wide Web (WWW). A URL looks like this: http://www.pathfindersonline.org.

;f. Gif :
Graphic Interchange Format – this format was developed by Compuserve in the early days of the internet. It is an 8-bit image format (256 colors) that optimized for internet usage. Images stored in this format are usually of a low-resolution quality, they may be animated, and they may have transparent parts. Photographs usually do not look good if saved in this format.

;g. JPEG:
Joint Photographic Experts Group. A compression technique used for saving images and photographs. This compression method reduced the file size of the images without reducing its quality. Widely used on the World Wide Web.

==4. Learn and demonstrate the use of these HTML tags OR demonstrate equivalent website construction commands in one of the current website development languages (PHP, XML, etc.)==
===<html>===
This tells the web browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox, Netscape) that this document should be viewed as a web page (instead of as a Word document, PDF file, etc.)

===<head>===
This comment allows for additional parts such as Meta tags (for search engines), and other “overall” information. Most of this information is NOT viewed by the user, but is instead “directions” to the browser.
<title>Title of Page</title>
===</head>===
This tag, and all other tags with a backslash (/) show that this part of the command is DONE! All opening tags have a matching closing tag, kind of like parenthesis always both open ( and end). Notice that (1) each formatting tag appears between "less than" (<) and "greater than" (>) signs, and (2) the tags always appear in pairs, with the second tag
in the pair beginning with a "slash" (/).

===<body>===
This is the part of the website text viewable to the audience. It can include tables,
images, links, and information all about you or your club.
All of the commands demonstrated below “happen” between the <body> tag and the
</body> tag.

===<nowiki><h1>...</h1></nowiki> ===
Header, level 1 (the largest size type for a header, usually used at the beginning of a page
or the start of a new section). Smaller headers are tagged with <nowiki><h2>...</h2></nowiki>,
<nowiki><h3>...</h3></nowiki>, etc.
===<nowiki>...</nowiki> ===
'''boldface text'''

===<nowiki>...</nowiki> ===
''italic text''

===<nowiki><center>...</center></nowiki> ===
<center>centered text</center>

===<nowiki></nowiki> ===
paragraph return (inserts an extra line space between paragraphs)
Note: Any paragraph returns that you insert in your document by simply hitting the Return key on your keyboard will be ignored by a Web browser. You must use the tag.

 to create a paragraph break on the screen.

===<nowiki> </nowiki>===
line break (no extra space)
===<nowiki><hr></nowiki> ===
horizontal rule (a line running left-to-right across the page, to separate one section from the next)
===<nowiki><ol>...</ol></nowiki> ===
ordered, or numbered, list. Each list item begins with the tag <nowiki><li></nowiki> and falls somewhere between the <nowiki><ol>...</ol></nowiki> tags.
===<nowiki><ul>...</ul></nowiki> ===
unordered, or bulleted, list. Again, each list item begins with the tag <nowiki><li></nowiki>.
===<nowiki><a href></nowiki>===
<a href="filename.html">...</a>
a hotlink to another file in the same folder
<a href="http://URL">...</a>
a hotlink to another site. You will have to know the Uniform Resource Locator (URL), or Web address, of any site to which you want to link your page.
===<nowiki><img></nowiki>===
<img src="image.gif">
This tag would insert an image with the filename "image.gif" on the far left side of your page.
==5. Make a simple table – include text, a graphic, a horizontal rule, and a link. Use hex Codes to color your text. Make your title larger then the main document text. ==
==6. Learn about: ==
===a. Web graphics and be able to explain the process used to make them download quickly. ===
*i. Three web graphics are supported by the majority of web browsers (gif, jpg, and png). JPG are great for photographs, and gifs work well for clipart, navigation buttons, anything that has transparent areas, and just about anything else. PNG graphics are still not widely accepted, but when they are they will be great, offering lossless compression and displaying images on the web. The advantages of PNG is that it supports images with millions of colors and produces background transparency without jagged edges. These files are 3-15% smaller than gifs, the format they were created to replace. They’re also open source, meaning that its free to create them, manipulate them, and use the png codex to create them.
*ii. Many programs such as Adobe Photoshop and Corel Draw offer a “save to web” feature that lowers the actual number of colors SAVED in the graphic. While millions of colors may be saved in a large digital photograph, by reducing its size and color-depth, it is possible to shrink many pictures to less than 5% of their original size.

===b. Web safe colors and know when to use them. ===
From the definitions section you already know what web safe colors are. You should use them whenever you are creating banners, headers, text colors, navigation buttons, or other features of a standard website. Use this knowledge to create a jpg and a gif that are both under 15k, but that are still easily viewable on a website, and to create at least five graphical navigation buttons and a title header for your website.

==7. Individually or as a family, unit, or other group, develop a functioning website. All the pages of the website should be “linked” together so that someone visiting your “Homepage” may click to each of the other pages on your website. The website should be composed of no less than 4 pages. The website should include: ==
*a. A welcome page that states the reason for the website & includes at least one image or photograph.
*b. A photos page that shows activities/events you, your family, or group have enjoyed
*c. A guest book or contact page where people can “sign in” that they have visited OR where a contact email address is listed where people can email you when they visit your website.
*d. A links page to other websites that you enjoy. This page should contain at least 8 links.
*e. If your page is for Pathfinders/Youth group/Church or similar organization, create a calendar page that contains upcoming events.
*f. Maintain the above website for at least 3 months. Keep the website information current by changing and editing the content often (Add pictures, update the calendar, etc.).

==Equipment / Resources for fulfilling the Advanced Internet Honor: ==
*'''Computer''' (either Macintosh or PC) with an HTML editing program or WYSIWYG web design program and an image editing program on it. Suggestions for an HTML or WYSIWYG editor and image editing software: Microsoft Front Page Express or go to www.tucows.com and download shareware or freeware programs.
*'''A scanner''', a '''digital camera''' or another means of getting photos on the computer.
*'''Web space''' can be obtained for free almost anywhere, just do a search for “free web hosting.” Some common ones are Yahoo’s geocities.com, www.tripod.com and www.angelfire.com. You might have to sign up for a free email address and there will be some advertising on your site. If you would rather have an ad free site, www.tagnet.org (A Seventh-day Adventist web host) has space for churches, schools, and organizations for a small fee per year. Contact them for more information. You can also contact your local Internet Service Provider for their services.
==About the Author==
{{:User:Pathfinders/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Internet/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|2006|Vocational|North American Division}}

==1. Define the following terms:==
===a. Internet:===
A collection of approximately 60,000 independent, inter-connected networks that use the TCP/IP protocols and that evolved from ARPANet of the late '60s and early '70s. "The Net," is a worldwide system of computer networks providing reliable and redundant connectivity between disparate computers and systems by using common transport and data protocols.

===b. World Wide Web (WWW)===
Though ''World Wide Web'' (or simply Web for short) is a term frequently used (incorrectly) when referring to "The Internet", it has two major meanings: First, loosely used: the whole constellation of resources that can be accessed using Gopher, FTP, HTTP, telnet, USENET, WAIS and some other tools. Second, the universe of hypertext servers (HTTP servers), more commonly called "web servers", which are the servers that serve web pages to web browsers.

===c. Chat Room:===
A site on the World Wide Web where any number of computer users can type in messages to each other (chat) in real time, creating an online conversation. These messages usually appear on an area of the screen next to the user’s nickname or handle (your online nickname or the name you go by in a chat room). Most chat rooms have a particular topic (which you are expected to discuss) but there are some that are purely for meeting other people.

===d. Download===
To copy a file from a remote computer to your computer. There are a few methods of doing this on the Internet. HTTP, FTP and e-mail attachments are the most common. This term is also used when referring to moving pictures from a camera or other image device to a local computer.

===e. Upload:===
To move a digital file (such as a media file) from a local system to a server where it is stored for others to access or later retrieval. For example, web pages must be "uploaded" to a web server for them to be viewed on the World Wide Web.
The terminology for "upload" and "download" comes from the days of satellite communications. When an earth-bound terminal send data to the remote computer (the satellite), it was uploaded, as the direction of data travel was up. When the terminal received data from the satellite, it was downloaded, as the directin of data travel was down.

===f. Website===
One or more files (pages) stored on a computer (a "server") that can be accessed via the Internet. Every website has a "home page", which is generally designed as the file visitors first see when coming to the site and which gives an idea of the site's contents. All files on a website usually contain textual or graphical "links" that can be clicked using an input device such as a mouse to move to other files, either within the site or on another one.

===Email:===
Email is similar to personal letters, only a lot faster. Email is used to send messages via your computer to friends and acquaintances around the world. Requires a computer, email software, an email account through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and a modem. Technically, email (electronic mail) is the exchange of computer-stored messages by telecommunication.
Most email messages usually contain text, but you can also send non-text files, such as graphic images and sound files as attachments. Email accounts for a large percentage of the total traffic over the Internet. An email address is easily identified by the '@' symbol, for instance webmaster@pathfindersonline.org, making identification of the domain it's attached to much easier - in this case pathfindersonline.org

===h. Virus===
Throughout this honor, the term “virus” represents the traditional virus, as well as trojans, worms, and other malicious code.

;Traditional virus: In computer security technology, a virus is a self-replicating program that spreads by inserting copies of itself into other executable code or documents. Thus, a computer virus behaves in a way similar to a biological virus, which spreads by inserting itself into living cells. Extending the analogy, the insertion of the virus into a program is termed infection, and the infected file (or executable code that is not part of a file) is called a host.

;Trojan: named after the Trojan horse used by the rescuers of Helen of Troy. A Trojan is a computer program that disguises itself as a useful software application that is actually used to gain access to your computer.

;Worm: A computer worm is a self-replicating computer program. It uses a network to send copies of itself to other nodes (computers on the network) and it may do so without any user intervention. This is due to the poor security the computers infected have. Unlike a virus, it does not need to attach itself to an existing program. Worms almost always cause at least some harm to the network, if only by consuming bandwidth, whereas viruses almost always corrupt or modify files on a targeted computer.

==2. Define the following terms and give examples of each:==
===a.Webmail / POP3 / IMAP mail===
All are methods / techniques for reading email.
;Webmail: Webmail is a web application that allows users to read and write e-mail using a web browser. Examples: Hotmail.com, yahoo.com and many other online services offer you the option to view your email from their website. This is "webmail."

;POP3 mail: Post Office Protocol 3. A protocol that provides a simple, standardized way for users to access mailboxes and download messages to their computers. Examples: Outlook Express, Outlook, Eudora, Mozilla Thunderbird*

;IMAP: Internet Message Access Protocol'. IMAP is a method of distributing e-mail. It is different from the standard POP3 method in that with IMAP, e-mail messages are stored on the server, while in POP3, the messages are transferred to the client's computer when they are read. Thus, using IMAP allows you to access your e-mail from more than one machine, while POP3 does not. This is important because some email servers only work with some protocols. Example: AOL is an IMAP mail provider, though they also offer webmail services.*

These examples are accurate as of 10/2005. Please check Google.com or other search service to verify the accuracy of these examples currently.

===b. Web browser===
A program used to view, download, upload, surf or otherwise access documents (pages) on the World Wide Web. Browsers can be text-based meaning they do not show graphics or images but most however are text and graphical based. Browsers read "marked up" or coded pages (usually HTML but not always) that reside on servers and interpret the coding into what we see "rendered" as a Web page. Examples: Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, and Netscape Navigator are examples of Web browsers.

===c. IRC/IM (Instant Messenger) client===
Internet Relay Chat. A live chat area of the Internet in which real-time conversations among two or more people take place via special software. Each specific IRC channel begins with a # and is dedicated to a different area of interest. IRC is considered another part of the technology of the Internet the same way FTP, Telnet and the Web are.

An instant messenger is a client which allows instant text communication between two or more people through a network such as the Internet.

Examples include Windows Messenger, AOL Instant Messenger, ICQ client, Yahoo Messenger, and Jabber, as well as software programs that allow you to talk to friends on multiple “messenger” platforms simultaneously.

===d. Streaming Media ===
Video or audio transmitted over a network that users can begin to play immediately instead of waiting for the entire file to download. Typically a few seconds of data is sent ahead and buffered in case of network transmission delays. (Although some data is buffered to the hard drive, it is written to temporary storage and is gone once viewing is complete.) RealMedia, QuickTime and Windows Media are the most common streaming formats.

===e. Search Engine & Search Directories===
Internet search engines (e.g. Google, Bing) help users find web pages on a given subject. The search engines maintain databases of web sites and use programs (often referred to as "spiders" or "robots") to collect information, which is then indexed by the search engine. Similar services are provided by "directories," which maintain ordered lists of websites, e.g. Yahoo!

===f. Antivirus software===
A computer program designed to detect and respond to malicious software, such as viruses and worms. Responses may include blocking user access to infected files, cleaning infected files or systems, or informing the user that an infected program was detected. Such tools should be included as part of the computing systems environment that the web services are delivered from. Examples include Norton Antivirus, McAfee Antivirus, Trendmicro Antivirus. Online FREE antivirus tools includes Trendmicro's Housecall, and freea-v.com {{ref|antivirus}}.

;Note: Many of these companies also offer "Internet Security Suites" that assist the user in also blocking and removing trojans, worms, malware, and other malicious code.

1. {{note|antivirus}} These software programs are leaders in antivirus technology as of 10/2005. Please check with online resources or local computer/office supply stores for the latest versions and programs available.

===g. Firewall===
A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. Firewalls can be implemented in both hardware and software, or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to prevent unauthorized Internet users from accessing private networks connected to the Internet, especially intranets. All messages entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which examines each message and blocks those that do not meet the specified security criteria.

Examples include: ZoneAlarm, Microsoft Firewall, Norton Firewall, and many other free and for-pay packages.

==3. Complete one of the following:==
===a. Write a brief 250-300 word history of the Internet.===
Include date/events surrounding its origin, the major landmark events, the birth and growth of web browsers (such as Mosaic, Netscape, Internet Explorer), and what it is doing today. Remember, this is not a history of computers, but rather a brief history of the Internet. You should list at least 2 online resources from which you found information relevant to your report.
===b. Present a 2-3 minute talk concerning the history of the internet.===
If you choose this option, you will need to present the same information as in option a. It's OK to use notecards during the oral presentation so that you can follow your outline and not have to memorize dates and other facts.

==4. Why is antivirus software important? Include in your answer:==
===a. What are some ways you can receive viruses via the Internet?===
when you open an attached file in the email you received from unknown contact or even in chain email/message via internet. you also get viruses by clicking advertisements with pop-ups on your browsers. And you also get virus if you download any files that contains virus from the internet.

===b. How is having up-to-date antivirus software important for keeping your computer files safe?===

having up-to-date antivirus software is important, because it helps us keep tract of new viruses that our computer might get from the internet. if our antivirus software is updated, our files are kept safe.

===c. How can not being protected lead to sharing the virus with other family and friends?===

we might share a file to our friends or family through an email or device without knowing that the file contains virus. the virus might damage our friends or family's computer or even thumb drive that we use to share files that might contain virus.

===d. What harm can a virus do to your computer or to other people’s computers?===
Viruses can damage your files in the computer including software. Some viruses spread to other computers.

Many viruses completely take over the computer they infect and can be remotely controlled by the attacker. These attackers can then use the computer to send spam, or mount a Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) attack against their target's web server or computer network. Sometimes these viruses record keystrokes on the infected computer so that they can capture usernames, passwords, and bank account numbers. This information can then be forwarded to the attacker who can either use the information or sell it to someone else.

==5. In what ways do content filters(programs like Net Nanny™ or AOL Parental Control) protect your family? With your family, develop & sign a Covenant of Family Internet Usage including the following elements:==
*'''a. Never reveal personal information'''
*'''b. Remember that people may not be who they say they are.'''
*'''c. Never meet an online friend in the flesh for the first time without a parent present.'''
*'''d. Never respond to flames'''
*'''e. Stop immediately if you see or read anything that upsets you.'''
*'''f.Time each member of the family may spend on the internet per week. Set boundaries that encourage time for family, homework, and other necessary family activities.'''
*'''g. Types of websites that are acceptable/unacceptable to view. What are the principles that your family will use to determine what are acceptable? Base these principles on the Bible.'''

An agreement ready to sign has been prepared for you on the third page of the pdf of the Internet Honor requirements on the Pathfinders website:
http://www.pathfindersonline.org/pdf/ayhonors/internet_a.pdf

==6. Show your ability to navigate your way around the internet by demonstrating the following:==
===a. Visit at least 3 different websites (distinct domain names). Print out the front page of each site for your instructor. ===
To save paper, it is recommended that rather than printing hard-copies of web pages, that the Pathfinder open the three web pages in separate tabs in the browser. A tab can be opened usually by right-clicking on the link and selecting the "Open page in another tab" option. In Firefox, clicking the link with the center mouse button (or using both the left and right buttons at the same time) will open the page in a new tab. Once three tabs have been opened, the instructor can check that the requirement has been met on-screen, without printing anything.

===b. Demonstrate your ability to use a search engine to find an online Bible website. Go to the website, look up at least 3 different Bible memory texts in 3 different versions, and print your results for your instructor. Also, find 3 websites that talk about the Seventh-day Adventist Church. Print out the front page of each site for your instructor.===
*i. http://www.biblegateway.com is a great online bible resources, as is http://www.blueletterbible.org .
*ii. There are thousands of quality Adventist websites, many of them referenced at http://www.plusline.org. Quality sites of interest to young adventists include:
** http://www.pathfindersonline.org
** http://www.adventist.org
** http://www.guidemagazine.org
** http://www.kidsbibleinfo.com .

===c. Download a compressed file from the internet (tar, zip, etc.) to your hard drive and uncompress it and operate the program or file.===
*i. Please use safe sites to download from, such as [http://download.com CNET’s download.com]
[http://pcmagazine.com pcmagazine.com] church websites such as http://plusline.org, http://iiw.org, and http://adventist.org

==7. Demonstrate your ability to use email by demonstrating the following (If necessary, create an email account, with a distinct username and password):==
===a. Create and send email===
===b. Receive and download email ===
===c. Download/view an attachment===
===d. Know 5 principles of operating email safely. ===
#Do not reply to unknown emails or Spam. You’re simply verifying that yours is a “real” email address and you will immediately receive even more junk email.
#Do not open emails with attachments unless you are SURE that they’re okay, and that your antivirus program is fully updated (most are auto-updated these days).
#Report any material sent to you in email that is unsafe or that you feel breaks God’s laws.
#Never respond to "unsubscribe" directions in a spam or UCE (unwanted commercial email) message.
#Keep your computers operating system patches up to date. If you're using Windows, do this from the MS Windows Update site using the Windows Update function.

==8. Memorize Philippians 4:8. How does this Bible text guide a Christian’s use of the internet?==
:“Finally, brothers, whatever is true, whatever is noble, whatever is right, whatever is pure, whatever is lovely, whatever is admirable——if anything is excellent or praiseworthy——think about such things.” Philippians 4:8

Some questions to guide a small group discussion on this text:
#What do you think the writer, the apostle Paul, would say this text meant for internet users today?
#What do you think God had in mind when he asked Paul to write down this text?
#What are some things on the internet that you make use of that match (are consistent with) this Bible text?
#What are some of the things that are on the internet that do not match (are inconsistent) with this Bible message?
#Why do you think this text is important to Christians today?
#What are some ways that we as a club can help each other apply this text to our daily lives?
#What do you think are some ways we can live lives that match (are consistent) with this text?

==About the Author==
{{:User:Pathfinders/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/House Painting, Interior/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Explain and demonstrate how to prepare and finish new or old woodwork in the following ways: a. Staining b. Varnishing c. Painting==
The key to a good finish is surface preparation. Whether you are staining, varnishing, or painting, the surface must be clean. How it is cleaned depends more on the suface being finished than on the method used to finish it.

Do not paint over dirt, cobwebs, or loose paint. For drywall, start by vacuuming all the cobwebs and dust. Then use a household cleaner and wash the walls down. Allow them to dry. Scrape off any loose paint. If it does not all come off, sand the zone between where it did come off and where it would not to eliminate any ridges (these ridges will become much more apparent after painting).

In kitchens, the cleaning is especially important, as surfaces will have been coated with grease. This must be removed, or the lifetime of the paint job will be severely curtailed.

In bathrooms, check for mildew. If any is found, it must be killed with a solution consisting of one part bleach, three parts water. Mildew is a living thing. If you simply wash it off and paint over it, it is sure to come back. Be careful to not get any bleach on your clothing, as it will cause it to discolor. Once you have wiped the bleach solution on the wall (or sprayed it on), allow it to sit for 15 minutes to do its work. Then rinse it off with clean water.

The next thing to do is address any defects in the walls. Do not assume that the paint will cover them. Paint is more likely to amplify imperfections than it is to cover them. Cover any holes with spackling compound, using a putty knife or a taping knife. Reseat any nail pops, setting them below the surface (one final blow with the hammer will put a small dent in the wall - this is actually desired). Then fill the hole with joint compound and wipe it off with a taping knife.

Larger imperfections should be re-enforced and covered with drywall tape and a layer of joint compound. Work the joint compound with a taping knife until it is as smooth as you can make it. Allow it to dry, then sand it. If necessary, add a second layer of joint compound. Allow it to dry and sand it.

For bare wood, sand out any imperfections and glue down any splits or nail pops. Sand over any glued areas once the glue dries (stain and varnish will show you exactly where there is glue instead of wood, and you do not want this to happen). Wipe the wood down with a cloth dampened with whatever solvent is used for cleaning the finish (that is, if the finish is cleaned out of the brushes with turpentine, wipe the wood down with turpentine). Consult the product information on the can of finish to determine the proper solvent.

Wood that has already been stained can be prepared by rubbing down with steel wool, followed by a cloth dampened with the proper solvent (see above).

==2. Give two methods of stippling.==
When you stipple, a glaze coat of one color is applied and then textured, revealing the undercoat of a base color.
In both cases, a glaze is mixed with latex paint at a 5:1 ratio (five parts glaze, one part paint). Stippling should be done in small sections moving from the top of the wall to the bottom so that if there are drips or runs, it will not ruin the work already completed.

With either method begin as follows:
*Prepare the surface as you would for any interior painting project, repairing cracks, taping baseboards, removing outlet and light switch covers, etc.
*Paint the surface a light color for the undercoating.
*Allow the base color to dry completely.
*Mix the paint and glaze.

===Brush Stippling===
*Using a sponge, wet a small section of the wall. This will allow the glaze to go on fluidly.
*Paint the glaze onto the dampened surface with a regular paint brush. Work the brush top to bottom, then side to side, then top to bottom again, making criss-crosses.
*Stipple the wet glaze by jabbing the bottom of a stippling brush's bristles onto the surface head-on. The brush should be perpendicular to the wall. Continually alter the pattern.
*Go over the surface once quickly, and then go back over it again to refine the pattern.

===Sponge Stippling===
*Select a natural sea sponge and cut it in half to form a flat surface.
*Prepare the wall and paint the base color as with brush stippling (described above).
*Dip the sponge in a bucket of water and then wring it dry.
*Press the sponge lightly into a tray full of paint.
*Blot the sponge on a paper towel to remove excess paint.
*Lightly dab the sponge on the wall, making J or X patterns.
*Overlap the patterns as you move from side to side and top to bottom.
*Dip the sponge in water and wring it out again occasionally.

==3. When should a paint spray gun be used?==
A paint spray gun should be used when painting highly textured surfaces. Examples of textured surfaces include stucco, cinder blocks, and rough-hewn lumber. These are very difficult (but not impossible) to paint with a roller or a brush.

Paint sprayers are much faster than rollers and brushes, and they are not limited to textured surfaces. If you can protect areas that are ''not'' to be painted, a sprayer can be used in almost any area. Avoid using near furnaces, ovens, and water heaters though unless you are able to extinguish (or prevent) open flames. Gas water heaters, gas ovens, gas furnaces, propane furnaces, and oil furnaces all have open flames. Remember that if the paint is flammable, so are the fumes.

==4. Describe the proper methods for cleaning and care of paint and varnish brushes.==
Proper cleaning starts ''before'' you begin to paint. If using a water-soluble paint, dip the brush in water. If using a paint (or varnish) that is not water-soluble, dip the brush in whatever solvent is called for. Then shake the brush to remove excess water (or solvent). Once this is done, you are ready to dip the brush in the paint for the first time.

When you are finished painting, run water over the outside of the brush, letting it flow away from the brush's ferrule and off the tip of the bristles. Then fill an empty, clean paint can (or bucket) halfway with water and add a couple tablespoons of dish washing liquid. Swirl the brush around in the soapy water, but do not jab the bristles into the bottom of the can. This will cause the bristles to develop permanent bends.

Rinse the brush in a second can (or bucket) of clear water. If the rinse water clouds up, return to the soapy water, and then rinse again. Repeat until the rinse water does not cloud up. Hang the brush to dry by the hole drilled in the tip of its handle.<ref>http://www.askthebuilder.com/686_Cleaning_Paint_Brushes.shtml</ref>

==5. Show how to use putty properly.==
Putty is used to fill nail holes an blemishes in door and wind facings, baseboards, and crown moldings. It should have the consistency of paste. Tear off a small ball of putty and push it into the hole with your finger. Then, still using your finger, wipe it away, so that some is left in the hole, but the top is even with the surface of the wood. Allow the putty to dry before painting.

==6. Explain the difference between exterior and interior paints.==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational/ExteriorInteriorPaint}}

==7. Make a list of ten proper color schemes for interior house painting using color swatches from a paint shop. Why are bright/loud colors not preferred?==
Bright colors make it difficult to relax in a room, so they should be avoided in most interior spaces.

{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Color Schemes}}

==8. Explain the composition of and when you use the following paints:==
===a. Oil based===
Oil paint is a type of slow-drying paint that consists of particles of pigment suspended in a drying oil, commonly linseed oil. The viscosity of the paint may be modified by the addition of a solvent such as turpentine or white spirit, and varnish may be added to increase the glossiness of the dried film.

Oil-based paints are the better choice for high-traffic areas, for metal surfaces, or for surfaces that will be exposed to low temperatures. Oil-based paints also resist staining better than water-based paints.

===b. Water based===
Latex paint is a water-borne dispersion of sub-micrometre polymer particles. The term "latex" in the context of paint simply means an aqueous dispersion; latex rubber (the sap of the rubber tree that has historically been called latex) is not an ingredient. These dispersions are prepared by emulsion polymerization. Latex paints cure by a process called coalescence where first the water, and then the trace, or coalescing, solvent, evaporate and draw together and soften the latex binder particles and fuse them together into irreversibly bound networked structures, so that the paint will not redissolve in the solvent/water that originally carried it.

Water-based paints are best for any areas not suited to oil-based paints. They resist fading better and are easier to apply. Clean up is also much easier, and the odor during application is far lower than with oil-based paints.

==9. Paint the woodwork of at least four rooms.==
The woodwork includes the baseboards, door frames, window frames, and crown molding. This requirement suggests that the woodwork be painted a different color than the walls. It could also have a natural finish (such as varnish).

==10. Paint at least one room, showing skill in keeping paint where it belongs.==
Paint belongs on the walls and ceilings. It does not belong on the floor, windows, outlet and switch covers, door knobs, latches, or hinges. Nor does it belong on light fixtures, smoke detectors, sprinklers, art work, mirrors, telephones, appliances, or furniture.

If the woodwork is to have a finish distinct from the walls, paint does not belong there either.

How do we keep paint where it belongs?
*Lay down a drop cloth.
*Tape the baseboards, windows, hinges.
*Remove door knobs and switch and outlet covers.
*Move furniture out of the room, or cover it with a drop cloth.
*Remove or tape light fixtures.
*'''Do not paint over smoke detectors''' - tape them off, and remove the tape when you are finished.

Rather than taping, professional painters usually use a technique called "cutting in." With this technique, an angled brush is used, and it is kept mostly dry. It doesn't take much paint to cover trim. Put no more than an inch or two of paint in a bucket that has no lip. Grip the brush by the bristles as if you were holding a pencil. Treat the handle as if it were there only to hold the bristles together, not as something you hold the brush by.

Dip the brush no more than half in inch into the paint, then drag it dry along the wall of the bucket to remove the excess paint. Then paint a line. The outer bristles form the sharp edge of the line. Practice on the wall before you move in to the critical areas.<ref>http://homerenovations.about.com/od/wallsandtrim/a/artcutinpaint.htm</ref>

But sometimes in spite of our best efforts, paint ''does'' go where it does not belong. When that happens don't panic - just clean off the unwanted paint.

==11. Tell and show how to properly store unused paint.==
The key to storing unused paint is to prevent air from reaching it. This is done by properly sealing the can. Store paint where is will not freeze.

Proper storage begins before you open the can. Open the can with a ''key'' - a special tool made just for opening paint cans. Most paint stores will give you one when you buy paint. If not, you can buy one - they're not expensive (or stores wouldn't be giving them away). Prying the lid off with a screwdriver will distort the lip making it impossible to achieve a tight seal.

Once the can is open, do not wipe a wet brush on the lip of the paint can. This forms a ''chime'' which makes it difficult to seal the can properly. Use a plastic pouring cap to pour the paint into a tray or into a small bucket. If you do get paint on the can's lip, wipe it off with a cloth before sealing it.

Place the lid on the can and tap it closed with a rubber mallet.

==Historical Notes==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Painting/History}}
==References==
<references/>

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/House Painting, Exterior/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Know and explain the difference in composition of exterior paints versus interior paints.==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational/ExteriorInteriorPaint}}

==2. Tell how to prepare the outside of a house for painting by doing such items as preparation for new and old work, paint removal, priming, puttying, finishing, etc.==
Preparing the house for repainting, if done properly, almost always takes longer than the painting itself. It is also the most crucial step in the entire job, as it is the foundation upon which the rest of the work relies.
===Inspection & Repair===
Begin by making a careful inspection of the entire house. Look for cracked or rotted boards. Severely cracked or rotten boards will need to be replaced, and this may require that you get a building permit (check with local authorities). You cannot simply caulk over rotten wood, as this does nothing to stop the process of decomposition. Soon after you caulk and paint over rotted wood, you will find that even more has rotted, and you will have an even bigger job to do.

Check around the edges of the roof for flashing. All the fascia should be covered with metal flashing to protect the wood from weather. Doors and windows should also have drip edging to direct the water away from the openings and to the outside of the house's siding.

Remove any shutters from the house before painting. Shutters can be repaired (if necessary) and both sides painted while the painter is on ground level (use a drop cloth). They are rehung after the rest of the house has been painted. This allows the careful painter to paint behind the shutters. Though that area may not be visible to onlookers, it ''still'' requires the protection from the weather provided by paint, and it cannot be properly painted while the shutters are in place. The same can be said of the back side of the shutters themselves.

===Cleaning===
Once repairs have been made, the surfaces to be painted should be thoroughly cleaned. A pressure washer can do this effectively. Painting over dirt or algae growths is always a bad idea, as when the dirt flakes away, the paint will go with it and the house will be exposed to the elements. Do not rely on paint to cover the dirt and expect the paint to hold the dirt in place. It must be removed.

===Ladders and Scaffolding===
Scaffolding is superior to ladders for painting because it allows you to work on a larger area for a long time before you have to move it to another area. However, scaffolding is considerably more expensive than a couple of ladders, so this option may not be viable for you.

When setting up a ladder, be sure the feet are on level ground. If placing it on a hillside, place something ''solid'' under the lower foot to raise it up. Test the stability of the ladder before climbing higher than a step or two.

Most people fall from ladders because they are reaching out too far. Do not make that mistake, as a fall from a ladder can cause serious injury, or even death. Keep your weight centered over the ladder, and do not attempt to reach over too far. Getting down and moving the ladder frequently is far easier than spending a few days in the hospital, and the painting will get done quicker that way too.

===Scraping and Sanding===
After the exterior has been cleaned, it is time to begin removing the old paint. Paint that is well-adhered to the surface need not be removed, but all flaking paint ''must'' be. Paint should be scraped off with a scraper. In places where some paint is scraped off but other paint is well-adhered, the intersection between painted and unpainted should be sanded to make a smooth transition. Edges in the paint will cause the paint to drip there.
===Caulking===
In places where the wood has been lightly cracked, it is appropriate to fill in the cracks with caulking. Be sure to select a caulk that can be painted (not all of them can be - some repel paint). Smooth the caulk with a putty knife, allow it to dry, and then sand it down. Also caulk around windows, doors, electrical entrances, vents, water faucets, etc.

===Masking===
Apply masking tape to the glass near the edges of the panes. Alternately, you can go back and scrape paint from the glass after the paint dries, though it is generally better to mask it off in the first place. Be sure to remove the masking tape when the paint has dried (and before you take down the ladder or the scaffolding!)

===Priming===
Bare wood should have a coat of primer before the paint is applied. Primer is applied the same way paint is, so you can follow the instructions given below.

===Painting===
After all that has been done, you are finally ready to paint. Maybe. If the temperature is below {{units|10°C|50°F}}, do not begin painting. Also resist the urge if there is rain in the forecast. A light shower can quickly ruin a paint job. If the wood is damp, do not use oil-based paints, as the moisture will cause the paint to blister. Buy paint in large containers ({{units|20 liter|5 gallon}} buckets are preferred) so that you can paint an entire section from one batch of paint (for color consistency). Paint for the trim (which should be painted last) can be bought in smaller containers.

Always open the paint container on a surface that will not be marred by a paint circle whose diameter matches that of the can (formed when paint drips down the sides and meets the ground). Use a dropcloth if necessary. You don't want to leave little paint circles on the driveway, porch, sidewalk, or lawn. Place the can in a place where you can easily reach it, but where you will not accidentally kick it over as you step back to admire your work. Admiration comes to an abrupt end when the can tips over.

Pry the lid from the can with a common screw driver or with a tool designed for this purpose. Place the lid next to the can so you are not likely to step on it and track paint everywhere. Shoe prints look even worse than the paint circles.

If the paint was mechanically shaken at the paint store within a day or so of being opened, all you will need to do is stir it briefly. If it has been sitting for a while, you will need to stir it more thoroughly. Failure to properly stir the paint may cause the color to change as the can is used. Stir the paint frequently while you are painting, as the paint components may separate as it sits (this is why you should stir it in the first place too).

Some painters like to punch a hole in the rim of the can so that paint can drip out of the rim and into the can. This hole will be completely covered by the lid when it is replaced, and can be made with an awl or with a nail.

When replacing the lid, be sure to wipe all the paint from the rim of the can. Place the lid on the rim, and then lightly tap around the edges to seal it. If the rim was insufficiently cleaned, paint will splatter all over the place, so it is important to do that job carefully.

If using a brush, dip the tip of the brush into the paint no more than a third the length of the bristles. Wipe the paint from one side of the brush onto the inner side of the can's rim. Then raise it to the surface to be painted and brush it on with a smooth horizontal motion.

Don't completely empty the brush before refilling it with paint. It takes a lot longer to paint a house with a brush that is empty most of the time.

==3. List ten proper color schemes for house painting (if possible, use color charts from a paint shop in making the display).==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Color Schemes}}

==4. Tell how to prepare and paint metal properly.==
All rust and flaking paint should be removed before applying new paint. Heavy flakes can be removed with a wire brush, or with a wire brush attachment for an electric drill. Once the heavy flakes and rust have been removed, go over the surface with sandpaper.

Next, determine what type of solvent is used for cleaning the paint. This will depend on the type of paint chosen, and could be turpentine, mineral spirits, paint thinner, or some other solvent. Dampen a clean rag with the solvent and clean the metal with it. Once the solvent dries, the surface is ready for primer. You may use either one or two coats of primer. Follow the directions on the can to determine the amount of time needed between coats. The time between coats of primer may differ from the time between the final coat of primer and the first coat of paint.

==5. Name at least three paint thinners and give their specific uses.==
===Mineral Spirits===
Mineral Spirits is a petroleum distillate commonly used as a paint thinner and mild solvent. Outside of the United States and Canada, it is referred to as white spirit. Painters use mineral spirits as an alternative to turpentine, one that is both less flammable and less toxic. Because of interactions with pigments, painters require a higher grade of mineral spirits than many industrial users, including the complete absence of residual sulphur.

It is used as a degreasing solvent and as a solvent in aerosols, paints, wood preservatives, lacquers, varnishes, and asphalt products. In western Europe about 60% of the total mineral spirits consumption is used in paints, lacquers and varnishes. Mineral spirits is the most widely used solvent in the paint industry. In households, white spirit is commonly used to clean paint brushes after decorating. Its paint thinning properties enable brushes to be properly cleaned (by preventing the paint from hardening and ruining the bristles) and therefore enabling them to be re-used.

===Turpentine===
Turpentine (also called spirit of turpentine, oil of turpentine, wood turpentine, gum turpentine) is a fluid obtained by the distillation of resin obtained from trees, mainly pine trees. As a solvent, turpentine is used for thinning oil-based paints and for producing varnishes.

=== Mineral Turpentine===
Mineral turpentine, also known as turpentine substitute, turps substitute, or just turps is an inexpensive petroleum-based replacement for the vegetable-based turpentine. It is commonly used as a paint thinner for thinning oil-based paint and cleaning brushes, and as an organic solvent in other applications.

===Acetone===
Acetone can be used for thinning and cleaning fiberglass resins and epoxies. It is a strong solvent for most plastics and synthetic fibers, so it should not be used when it could come into contact with these materials.

It is ideal for thinning fiberglass resin, cleaning fiberglass tools and dissolving two-part epoxies and superglue before hardening. A heavy-duty degreaser, it is useful in the preparation of metal prior to painting; it also thins polyester resins, vinyl and adhesives. It easily removes residues from glass and porcelain.

==6. Show ability to properly use brush, roller, and spray equipment in outside work.==
===Brush===
Load the brush directly from the paint container as described previously. Be sure to force some paint between clapboards with the brush. Wipe the paint onto the surface, and then brush it out with two to four strokes. Latex should not be overbrushed, as this will leave brush marks in the finished surface. Reload the brush with paint as soon as the paint begins to lighten. It takes much longer to paint a surface with an empty brush than with a full one.

You should be able to tell whether you need to use horizontal or vertical strokes by considering the surface you are working on. On clapboards or horizontal siding, work the brush from side to side. Shingles should be painted with vertical strokes.

===Roller===
A roller should not be used on siding or clapboards. It should be reserved for flat surfaces such as masonry walls. Pour some paint from the container into the roller tray, filling it so that the paint covers about half the ramp. Place the roller at the top of the ramp, and roll it into the reservoir. At the end of the reservoir, lift the roller and carry it back to the top of the ramp. Then roll it down again. If you roll it back up, you will succeed in wetting the part of the roller that is already wet, and no paint will be loaded into the dry portion of the roller.

Then roll the paint onto the wall with broad up-and-down strokes. First you will apply the paint, then roll it out to a smooth finish. You can paint the edges and corners with a brush if necessary. When the roller is empty, reload it. An extension handle is a handy time saver that will allow you to paint a large vertical section of the wall.

===Sprayer===
Before using any spray equipment, carefully read ''and follow'' the instructions. Sprayers invariably cover more area than anticipated by the novice, so be careful to mask off a very large area adjacent to the surface to be painted. Use tarps and drop cloths for this, covering grass, shrubbery, and concrete. Move cars away from the house before starting. Mask ''all'' the glass on windows, not just the parts near the muntins and mullions (i.e., the pane separators). Cover roof shingles too.

Spray the paint on using several thin coats, allowing the paint to dry between each application. Houses are big, so you should be able to move on to another area while the coat dries. If you spray it on too thick, it will drip and look quite unprofessional. Clean spray equipment thoroughly when finished.

==7. Paint the outside of a house with at least four rooms (if possible, make this a group project for a special-needs person in the church or community).==

Ask your pastor if he knows of a person whose house needs to be painted. Because he makes regular visits to members in need, he should be aware of anyone who could use your assistance.

You will be supplying the labor for free, but the primer, paint, tape, and caulk may need to be purchased. There are several options available for this:
* Ask the manager of a paint store to sponsor your project.
* Ask your church board for money to cover the cost of materials.
* Hold a fundraiser so you will have money to buy materials.
* Ask the person whose house you are painting to pay for the materials.

In reality, you could use all four of these approaches. The paint store may agree to give a discount on the paint (or provide it free of charge). You could hold a fundraiser to cover part or all of the rest, or the church board could cover it, or the person who benefits could. There may also be other ways to pay for the materials too - use your imagination!

Be sure to do a good job. Be careful not to slop paint all over the shrubbery, windows, driveway, etc. People will be watching to see what kind of job you do - especially those who helped pay for the materials. Don't let them down.

==Historical Notes==
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Painting/History}}

==References==
* http://www.house-painting-info.com/exterior-paint-preparation.html
* http://www.oldhouseweb.com/architecture-and-design/choosing-exterior-paint-schemes.shtml
* http://alsnetbiz.com/homeimprovement/procedurext.html

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Forestry - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|2009|Vocational|North American Division}}
==1. Prerequisites: AY Tree Honor; Forestry Honor.==
{{ay prerequisite|Nature|Trees}}
{{ay prerequisite|Vocational|Forestry}}

==2. Define the following terms:==
===a. basal area. ===
===b. bole ===
===c. DBH (diameter) ===
===d. Seed tree cut ===
===e. selective cutting ===
===f. shelterwood cut ===
===g. silviculture ===
===h. canopy ===
===i. crown ===
===j. pulpwood ===
===k.succession ===
===l. thinning ===
===m. rotation===
===n. sawtimber===
===o. climax forest===
===p. habitat===
==3. Study five tree species important to forestry in your area and give the following information about each: a. common and scientific name b. range of tree c. height and diameter of tree at maturity d. economic importance of tree e. important pests (insects, disease, etc.) of the tree f. habitat of tree, forest zone, and elevation g. common age of rotation (harvesting) for various uses==

==4. What methods are used to insure reforestation of a harvest area?==
==5. On a map of your country, draw the forest areas and indicate the types of forest in each area.==
==6. Write a short report (250 words or more) on the importance of the forests in your country. Include such topics as the importance of wood for timber, paper (pulp), and firewood; wildlife habitat; livestock grazing; good water quality; and recreation for people.==
==7. Tour one of the following, or write a report with diagrams about operations.==
===a. Sawmill===
===b. Pulp mill===
===c. Furniture factory===
==8. Do a forest survey in a typical forest for your area. Using a prism, mark all trees large enough to be counted “in”, and record the following data for each “in” tree, and record the basal area by species for the whole plot:==
===a. common and scientific name===
===b. DBH===
===c. Height===
===d. Age (determined by increment borer)===
==9. Participate in a reforestation project==
==References==
* [http://www.na.fs.fed.us Silvics of North America, Agriculture Handbook 654 (under the publications tab)]
* [http://forestry_suppliers.com Forestry Suppliers, Inc., 205 West Rankin Street, Jackson, MS 39201 (800-647-5368)]

AY Honors/Forestry/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|2008|Vocational|North American Division}}
==1. Prerequisite: Tree Honor==
{{ay prerequisite|Nature|Trees}}

==2. Learn the proper use of the following common forestry tools and practice using them on trees in a forest. Record the information for each tree giving also the common name of each tree:==
For this requirement you will need access to a forest and permission from a land owner to bore into the trees.

You can go as a group, but each person in the group must take several measurements. In addition to the equipment listed below, each participant should bring a notebook and a pen for recording measurements and observations.

===a. DBH (diameter at breast height) tape – measure the diameter of trees (or measure the tree circumference and calculate the diameter)===

A DBH-tape is a form of dendrometer that consists of a cloth or metal tape that is mainly used to measure diameter at breast height (DBH). DBH is measured at a fixed height of {{units|140cm|4.5 feet}} above the ground, where it is most convenient to measure diameter. DBH is measured up high so to avoid measuring a tree's butt swell. Butt swell is where the base of the tree is unconventionally fatter than the rest of the tree. Height and diameter are used to determine the volume of a given tree, measuring above the butt swell is required to provide the most accurate measurement.

Diameter is easily measured because the tape is calibrated in units of 3.14 (<math>\pi</math>) inches or centimeters. The tape is actually measuring the tree's circumference but since circumference and diameter are related by pi, the diameter can easily be obtained. The only problem with the diameter tape is that the measurements assume the tree's trunk cross-sections are perfectly circular. Thus the diameter tape just gives an approximation, regardless it is the most commonly used dendrometer for DBH.

===b. Clinometer or Tangent height gauge – measure the height of trees===
{|
|[[Image:Clinometer commonly used by foresters.JPG|350px|thumb|A clinometer used in forestry]]
|[[File:Clinometerlow.jpg|thumb|350px|Hand made clinometer]]
|}
The clinometer, known in many fields as an inclinometer, is a common tool used in forestry to measure slope, vertical angles, and – in combination with distance measurements – elevation change or tree heights.

A forester using a clinometer makes use of basic [[trigonometry]].

First the observer measures a straight-line distance ''D'' from some observation point ''O'' to the object. Then, using the clinometer, the observer measures the angle ''a'' between ''O'' and the top of the object. Then the observer does the same for the angle ''b'' between ''O'' and the bottom of the object. Multiplying ''D'' by the tangent of ''a'' gives the height of the object above the observer, and by the tangent of ''b'' the depth of the object below the observer. Adding the two of course gives the total height (''H'') of the object, in the same units as ''D''.

Note that since multiplication is distributive it is equally valid to add the tangents of the angles and ''then'' multiply them by D:

:''A'' = tan ''a''
:''B'' = tan ''b''
:''H'' = (''A'' × ''D'') + (''B'' × ''D'') = (''A'' + B) × ''D''

Note also that both angles should be positive numbers (i.e. ignore any minus sign on the clinometer's scale).

If you are doing this activity with a large group, you may wish to make several simple clinometers using paper, a protractor, a tube, and a weighted string (see the photo above). Note that the 0° mark is at the bottom center, so that if the tube is held level, the string will line up with this mark (showing no incline). To use this device, sight the top of the tree through the tube while another person takes the reading from the scale.

===c. Increment borer – count the growth rings to determine age===
===d. Prism – estimate the basal area per acre or hectare===

==3. Use the information gathered in #2 to determine the board foot volume of the trees in the forest you measured.==
==4. Calculate the basal area of a tree from the diameter (dbh) or circumference measurement. What is basal area per acre or hectare?==
==5. Study five tree species important to forestry in your area and give the following information about each: a. common and scientific name b. range of tree c. height and diameter of tree at maturity d. common use and importance of tree e. habitat of tree, forest zone, and elevation==

==6. List the benefits of forest to the environment, water quality, air quality, wildlife, and recreation.==
==7. List the uses of wood produced in the forests in your area, and which tree species are important for each use.==
==8. Discover & Discuss the following: How are forests managed to reduce the damage from insects and disease? What factors influence fire behavior? Considering that wildfires produce both benefits and destruction, what treatments could reduce wildfire severity?==
==9. Do one of the following in forest regeneration:==
===a. Tour a forest seedling nursery===
===b. Plant forest seedlings or forest seed===
==10. Explore the biblical stories in Genesis 1-3 and Revelation 22 that talk about the tree of life. In your discussion, discover the role of trees in God’s perfect environment, and our responsibility to take care of our environment.==
==References==

AY Honors/ExteriorInteriorPaint

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

Paint is made for interior or exterior use, and they are made to have different characteristics.
{|border=1 cellspacing=2 cellpadding=5
|-
!Interior paint characteristics ||Exterior paint characteristics
|-
| Good scrubbing and stain resistance
| Color retention/fade resistance
|-
| Ability to hide/cover (whatever is being painted over)
| Flexible (expands or contracts with weather changes)
|-
| Spatter resistance
| Mildew resistance
|-
| Easy touch up
| Durability
|}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Electricity/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|1|1929|Vocational|General Conference}}

== 1. Explain and illustrate an experiment by which the laws of electrical attraction and repulsion are shown.==
This simple experiment can be performed with nothing more exotic than a roll of plastic, transparent tape - the kind usually found on a desk. Remove two 12" strips of tape from the roll and hold them by the end, one in each hand. Removing the tape from the roll will charge the strips with static electricity.

Now bring the two strips of together. They will repel one another. Next, fold the top of one strip over itself, creating a half-inch long "non-sticky" zone. Then attach the two strips, with the folded strip's sticky side to the other strip's non-sticky side. Pull them apart by holding onto the non-sticky zone. Now the two strips will be attracted to one another.

== 2. Explain the difference between direct and alternating current, and demonstrate the uses to which each is adapted. Give a method of determining which kind flows in a given circuit. ==

Electricity in a direct current (DC) circuit flows in only one direction. In an alternating current (AC) circuit, the direction of current flow reverses at a regular rate. Similarly, the voltage in a DC circuit remains constant, while it continuously varies in an AC circuit.

Batteries are capable of storing DC voltage only - they cannot store AC voltage. Most electronic circuitry runs on DC, and electronic appliances that run on AC power usually convert it to DC before it can be used. The advantage AC has over DC is that it can be transmitted over long distances with less loss than a DC circuit providing an equivalent amount of power.

AC circuitry produces a constantly varying magnetic field, and a constantly varying magnetic field will induce a current in an adjacent conductor. The induced current can be measured with a current meter. DC circuitry will only induce a current when a sudden change in the circuit takes place, such as powering it on. The induced current will "spike" briefly and then decay to zero.

== 3. Connect a buzzer, bell, or light with a battery using a switch in line. ==

[[Image:Lamp_circuit.png|Light, battery, and switch]]

The circuit above shows how to connect a battery, switch, and light. The light can be replaced with the bell or buzzer.

== 4. Make and run a simple electric motor from a kit or take apart a motor and identify the parts, and explain how it works. ==
There are several low cost motor kits available on the market. Here are links to a few:
* [http://www.simplemotor.com/rsmotor.htm ISP Corporation]

* [http://www.science-city.com/elmotkit.html MiniLabs]

* [http://www.sciplus.com/singleItem.cfm?terms=9460&cartLogFrom=froogle American Science and Surplus]

It is far more economical to bring in a single motor rather than have each student buy a kit. Small motors can be bought at most hobby stores, and each student can take turns disassembling it.

From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia:

The classic DC motor has a rotating armature in the form of an electromagnet with two poles.
A rotary switch called a commutator reverses the direction of the electric current twice every cycle, to flow through the armature so that the poles of the electromagnet push and pull against the permanent magnets on the outside of the motor. As the poles of the armature electromagnet pass the poles of the permanent magnets, the commutator reverses the polarity of the armature electromagnet. During that instant of switching polarity, inertia keeps the classical motor going in the proper direction. (See the diagrams below.)

<table align="center"><tr valign="top"><td>[[Image:Electric_motor_cycle_1.png|left|thumb|200px|A simple DC electric motor. When the coil is powered, a magnetic field is generated around the armature. The left side of the armature is pushed away from the left magnet and drawn toward the right, causing rotation.]]</td><td>[[Image:Electric_motor_cycle_2.png|left|thumb|200px|The armature continues to rotate.]]</td><td>[[Image:Electric_motor_cycle_3.png|left|thumb|200px|When the armature becomes horizontally aligned, the commutator reverses the direction of current through the coil, reversing the magnetic field. The process then repeats.]]</td></tr></table>

 

== 5. Make a simple battery cell. ==
A battery can be made by placing a galvanized (zinc-plated) nail and a copper wire in a small container filled with vinegar. Do not let the zinc and copper terminals touch one another. They can be held apart by punching small holes in the container's lid and inserting them through these holes. A film canister works pretty well for this, but so will a paper or foam cup covered with plastic wrap (or just put the two conductors on opposite sides of the container). As long as the two conductors can both be immersed in the vinegar without touching one another, a voltage should develop between them.

It might help to brighten the nail and the copper with sandpaper or emory cloth first. A cell constructed like this will generate about 0.8 volts. The copper wire will be the positive terminal (anode) and the zinc plated nail will be the negative terminal (cathode).

Connect multiple cells in series to form a battery and boost the voltage. When doing this, be sure to connect the positive terminal (copper) of one cell to the negative terminal (zinc) of the other.

Connect multiple cells in parallel to boost the current capacity (necessary to light up a bulb). To do this, connect all the nails together with one wire and connect all the copper terminals together with another wire.

== 6. Demonstrate the ability to replace fuses or reset breakers and demonstrate a National Electric Code (NEC) approved splice using insulated wires. ==
There are many types of fuses. Some of them have threaded bases and can be removed by rotating them counter-clockwise. Others have to be pried out of their holders. Always remember that household current is dangerous, so it is best to cut the power first. This requirement can also be met by changing the fuse in an automobile or appliance (unplug first!).

A breaker is a current-sensing switch. Circuits can be turned off by flipping the switch away from the center of the breaker panel, and turned back on again by flipping the switch towards the center of the breaker panel. When a breaker senses that the current flowing through it exceeds its rated threshold, the switch opens by itself, moving the toggle between the off position and the on position. The breaker is said to have "tripped" when this happens. Before a tripped breaker can be reset, it must first be turned fully to the off position, and ''then'' it can be returned to the on position. If the breaker trips again, the circuit is still overloaded. If this is the case, turn off some of the appliances in the circuit before attempting to reset the breaker again.

== 7. Show how you would rescue a person in contact with a live electric wire, and have a knowledge of the method of reviving a person insensible from shock. ==
First, '''do not touch the person! ''' Instead, turn off the power as quickly as possible. If you cannot find the switch, use a non-conducting pole such as a wooden broom handle, a non-metallic chair, a shoe, or some similar object and move the wire off the person. Be sure to move the wire far enough away so that it will not reconnect with the victim when released. Be careful to ''not'' touch the wire with any part of your body.

Once the victim has been disconnected from the current, call 911. If the victim is not breathing, start CPR. If the victim is breathing, but unconscious, maneuver the body onto its side to prevent the victim's tongue from blocking the air passage.

== 8. Make a simple diagram of a lighting system of an automobile. ==

[[Image:Car_lights.png|thumb|650px|Simplified automobile lighting system diagram]]
{{clear}}

== 9. Make a diagram that properly shows the lights, switches, and convenience outlets controlled by each breaker in a house. ==

[[Image:House_circuit.png|600px|thumb|Typical House Circuit]]

The schematic above shows a typical circuit in a household. The circuit as shown is protected by a fuse (although a breaker would be applicable as well), and has three loads:

# A light controlled by a single switch
# An unswitched outlet
# A light controlled by two switches

More outlets and switches can be added to the circuit, but note that they will all be connected in parallel. All circuits will connect to the black "'hot'" wire and to the white "'neutral'" wire.

A typical house will have about two dozen breakers, and it is rare for a circuit to have more than about eight outlets or lights. Having too many lights or outlets on a single circuit will cause the breaker to trip or the fuse to blow, so several circuits are run in a house.

== 10. Read an electric meter correctly, and compute a residence bill at the rate charged in your community. ==
Electric meters measure electricity in ''kilowatt hours.'' One kilowatt hour (kWh) will provide 1000 watts for one hour. Electric companies typically charge a flat rate per kilowatt hour, and this rate can be found on an electric bill. Some electric companies charge varying rates depending on ''when'' the electricity is used, charging a lesser rate when electrical demand is lower (such as during the night). For this requirement it is a lot easier to assume a flat rate, but even then utility companies do not always make it easy. For example, they may break the rate down into several components and they may add flat fees as well. If this is the case for you, simply add all the component rates together to get an aggregate rate. The component rates can be very small values - fractions of a penny.

To calculate the rate, one must first read the meter. The meter is not reset when it's read, so one must know what the meter read during the previous billing cycle. The current reading is subtracted from the previous reading, and the difference is multiplied by the rate.

<math>bill = \left((current\ reading - previous\ reading)\times aggregate\ rate \right)+flat\ fees</math>

[[Image:Mechanical_electricity_meter_1965_(1).jpg|400px]]

The meter pictured above shows 60169.1 kilowatt hours (not 60279.1 - the dials have not yet reached the 2 or the 7 yet). To calculate an electric bill assume the following:

Previous month's reading: 59023.6 kWh

Aggregate rate: 11.274 cents per kWh

Flat fees: $20

The bill would be calculated as follows:

<math>
\begin{matrix}bill & =& \left( (60169.1 - 59023.6) \times 0.11274\right) \ +\ $20 \\ \ & =& (1146.5 \times 0.11274)\ +\ $20 \\ \ & =& $129.14\ +\ $20\\ \ &=& $149.14\end{matrix}
</math>

Note that this is rounded to the nearest cent.

==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Computer - Advanced/OpenOffice

2012-05-16T15:49:41Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

= OpenOffice =
Use the following functions of the word processing program:
== Mail Merge==
Type and print a letter to at least five different people using the same text, but personalizing each letter with the addressee's name appearing at least three times.

The best instructions for doing this can be found in the Help pages of OpenOffice itself. Knowing that the function is called "mail merge" is the key to finding the right help page.

== Right Justify ==
Using the mouse, highlight the text you wish to right justify. Then click on the Format tab and select "Paragraph." Then click on the "Alignment" tab, check the box labelled "Right," and click on "OK".

== Center Title ==
This operation is identical to the "Right Justify" operation, except that instead of checking the "Right" box, check the "Justify" and select "Center" from the pull down menu.

== Change margins and page length ==
Click on "Format" and select "Page." Then click on the "Page" tab. This will bring up a window that will allow you to set the margins (left, right, top, and bottom) as well as the page dimensions.

== Move paragraph ==
Using the mouse, highlight the paragraph. Then type <ctrl>X to delete the paragraph. Move the mouse cursor to the paragraph's new location and type <ctrl>V.

== Save ==
Type <ctrl>S or select Save (or Save As) from the File menu.

== Copy and Paste ==
This is almost exactly the same as moving a paragraph, the only difference being that once the paragraph is highlighted you press <ctrl>C instead of <ctrl>X. This will put the highlighted text in the paste buffer, but it will not delete it from the document. It can then be pasted into a different place by typing <ctrl>V.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Computers - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:40Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor header|2|1986|Vocational|North American Division}}
==Have the Computer Honor==
{{ay prerequisite|Vocational|Computer}}
==1. Give examples of each of the following computer software / media computer components. Explain the role that each plays in an individuals’ computer experience.==
===a. Word Processing software===
A word processing program assists the user in creating letter, reports, papers, and other documents. Word processor software has filled the role that used to be assigned to a typewriter. However, a word processor can do a variety of additional tasks, including bold, italics, and underline; spell & grammar check; templates for a variety of advanced documents such as FAX, resume, and tables/forms; formatted tables, image import, Wordart, columns, and more.

Many word processing programs come with preloaded images, templates, and other assistant software. Most word processors come bundled with graphics manipulation software, presentation software, spreadsheet software, and sometimes even website creation software. Often these programs work seamlessly together, allowing spreadsheets to be presented within a word processing document or documents to be presented in public presentations.

Commercial word processing programs include:
Microsoft Word, Corel Wordperfect

Free programs include: Openoffice.org (an excellent choice) and Abiword, though there are quite a range of free office suite programs available for download

===b. Presentation software===

A presentation program is a computer software package used to display information, normally in the form of a slide show. It typically includes three major functions: an editor that allows text to be inserted and formatted, a method for inserting and manipulating graphic images and a slide-show system to display the content.

There are many different types of presentations including professional (work-related), education, worship and for general communication. Presentation programs can either supplement or replace the use of older visual aid technology, such as Pamphlets, handouts, chalk boards, flip charts, posters, slides and overhead transparencies. Text, graphics, movies, and other objects are positioned on individual pages or "slides" or "foils". The "slide" analogy is a reference to the slide projector, a device which has become somewhat obsolete due to the use of presentation software. Slides can be printed, or (more usually) displayed on-screen and navigated through at the command of the presenter. Transitions between slides can be animated in a variety of ways, as can the emergence of elements on a slide itself.

Many presentation programs come with pre-designed images (clip art) and/or have the ability to import graphic images. Custom graphics can also be created in other programs such as Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator and then imported.

With the growth of digital photography and video, many programs that handle these types of media also include presentation functions for displaying them in a similar "slide show" format. For example, Apple's iPhoto allows groups of digital photos to be displayed in a slide show with options such as selecting transitions, choosing whether or not the show stops at the end or continues to loop, and including music to accompany the photos.

The most commonly known presentation program is Microsoft PowerPoint, although there are alternatives such as Corel Presentations, OpenOffice.org Impress and Apple's Keynote.

===c. Graphic creation software===
Graphic creation software is a subclass of application software used for graphic design, multimedia development, specialized image development, general image editing or simply to access graphic files. Art software uses either raster or vector graphic reading and editing methods to create, edit, or view art.

Many artists (creative professionals) today use computers rather than traditional forms of art. Using graphic art software may be more efficient than rendering using traditional media by requiring less hand-eye coordination, requiring less visualization skills, and utilizing the computer's quicker (sometimes more accurate) automated rendering functions to create images.

Images created or enhanced in graphic creation software can be imported into word processing, presentation, publication, spreadsheet to enhance the overall final product.

Most graphic art software includes common functions, creation tools, editing tools, filters, and automated rendering modes.

Common general grapics editing software includes Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Photo Elements, Macromedia Fireworks, Paintshop Pro (JASC), Ulead PhotoImpact.

Several quality free programs available for download include IrfanView, Picasa (by Google), and OpenCanvas. The Openoffice.org Suite includes an excellent program for creating vector-based graphics.

===d. Media burning software===
Media burning software allows the user to copy data (music, video, data) from another disk or drive onto blank disk-media, such as CD-R (CD with record-once capability), CD-RW (CD with write/rewrite capability), DVD-R (DVD with record-once capability), and DVD-RW (DVD with one of several recording/re-recording capabilities). DVD writable disks even come in a two-sided burnable technology that allows the DVD-burner to copy information onto both sides of the disk. This doubles the available recording space. Most CD-R/RW disks have 700-800 MB of data space, while DVD R/RW's have 4.0-8.0 GB of data space.

This media burning software communicates with a CD-RW or DVD-RW drive to perform these burning tasks. Popular retail programs include Nero (PC), EasyMedia Creator (PC), and Burn (Mac).

Other programs (many free) include - RealPlayer, UltraISO, RecordNow, Acoustica, Burn4Free, PowerISO, and BurnQuick.

Most computer systems come with one or more retail software programs, though sometimes it is a lite version of the program. Both Windows and Mac OS X also have built-in programs built into their operating system to provide basic burning services. Mac OS X even has a program to create interactive and beautiful DVD shows.

Burning software comes in a variety of recording technologies that facilitate burning DVD movies; documents and images; ISO images; CD audio files; and MP3/music files.

There are also different Freeware (free) software packages available.
The latest listing of popular burning software can be found at:
[http://www.download.com/sort/3150-2646_4-0-1-6.html? Download.com]

===e. Publication software===
Publication software, also known as desktop publishing software (DTP) allows the personal computer user to inexpensively produce documents for either large scale publishing or smaller personal jobs. The user is able to create complex page layouts that combine text, photos, clipart, and shapes, as well as other visual elements and textual layout patterns (such as columns, inlaid text, subscript text, articles, etc.)

Because of the ease of use of this software, individuals can print only a few copies to a personal printer or send the digital layout pages (often outputted to PDFs) to a commercial printing company.

Some may wonder, what can DTP software do that word processing software cannot? In the early days (Pagemaker, the first DTP software was produced in 1985, whereas Wordstar and Wordperfect were already being used by thousands of users), there was a massive difference. Word processing software could do basic typewriting, text and margins, whereas any other layout elements were largely unknown to word processors. DTP software used a graphical user interface, where you could "see what it would look like" when it was published, a term now known as WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get).

In recent years, the strong suite for DTP software is in the templates, easily layouts that have been predefined, as well as output files & scalable font handling that far exceed the word processor. However, some of the layout options original designated to DTP software are now available in word processors (images, columns, spell check, etc.).

Publication software includes:
Adobe Indesign, Corel Ventura, Microsoft Publisher, Quark XPress, and Apple Pages (Mac).

Freeware DTP software includes Scribus and Passepartout.

===f. Database creation software===
Database creation software provides the interface to create and manage database records. Databases are a collection of interrelated records that are arranged by a software program, called a Database Management System(DBMS), to create meaningful output, such as task lists, Pathfinder birthdays, or campout KP assignments. Most common software programs create and manage relational databases, meaning that information in a variety of locations can be pulled together and presented in one form or output. For example, you may have a list of Pathfinder birthdays, and you wish to assign KP list by birthday. You could call up the meals needing cleanup from one database, and have it assign Pathfinders to a KP duty based on their birthday. The final output would be one form, with three columns, but the information would be pulled from two databases.

Database Software programs include Microsoft Access and Corel Paradox.

Openoffice.org Suite contains a robust database similar to MS Access titled Base.

Specialized freeware databases can be found at downloading sites such as:
[http://download.com Download.com].

===g. Spreadsheet software===

Spreadsheet software creates spreadsheets. Spreadsheets are grids of information, usually spread across several pages or books that are used widely in the financial field to calculate and display financial data.

Spreadsheet software performs a lot of the functions formerly assigned to bookkeeping ledgers, and the program offers countless self-calculating tools that can provides thousands of bits of information rapidly, allowing a bookkeeper to keep up with a variety of financial data very quickly and efficiently.

In recent years, the increased abilities of spreadsheet software to manage text fields has led some users to blend their usage of word processing with spreadsheet management, creating organized (but usually small) lists. Some online database programs even output their information to tabular forms that can be edited in spreadsheet forms.

In some ways, a spreadsheet program is a database program, in that it can sort and manage linear databases, that is, databases that only have one "layer" of information.

Pathfinder clubs might find a spreadsheet program useful to keep track of dues, campout fees, or even to keep meeting attendance. Some counselors have even created Class level (Friend, Companion, Explorer, Ranger, Voyager, Guide) spreadsheets that allow the counselor to quickly "check off" who has completed the requirements towards their class level insignia.

Spreadsheet programs include: Microsoft Excel and Corel Quattro Pro.

The free Openoffice.org Suite contains a program called Spreadsheet that performs the majority of tasks needed in a spreadsheet software program.

===h. Flash media===

Flash memory is a form of computer memory that can be electrically erased and reprogrammed. It is a technology that is primarily used in memory cards. This type of memory is erased and programmed in blocks consisting of multiple locations. This means that it can be saved and re-saved to, and files stored on it can be edited at any time. Flash memory is very inexpensive, and provides a cost-effective way to save large amounts of data (such as documents, pictures, and music) in one place. Examples of applications include digital audio players, digital cameras and mobile phones. Flash memory is also used in USB flash drives (thumb drives, handy drive), which are used for general storage and transfer of data between computers. It has also gained some popularity in the game console market, where it is often used for game save data.

===i. Disk media===
Disk media, more commonly referred to as removable media, is any media device that acts as an input or output device where data is displayed. Removable media eliminates such permanent media options as the internal hard drive.

In the 21st century, removable media provide specific niche devices and services, such as internet, GPS directions, music, and video, that all relate together through the common device, the computer. removable media provides users with the opportunity to store information for processing at a later time or date.

Examples of removable media include DVDs, CDs, removable hard drives, floppy disks (in some older computers), media players, and digital cameras

==2. Successfully install and use a software program.==
Software comes in a variety of ways, most commonly on a CD or as a file downloaded from the internet. If the file is downloaded from the internet, please verify that you trust the source you downloaded the file from. Generally, opening executible files attached to email is unwise and may infest your computer with trojan or virus software.

==='''Installation'''===

Each installer program works slightly differently, but we'll attempt to explain the basics.

==='''Windows:'''===

===='''''CD:'''''====

In most cases you would simply insert the program CD into your CD-ROM drive. In most cases, the CD will be automatically recognized as needing to be installed and the install program will automatically begin. If it does not, you can start the install program by choosing Start from your menu, then choosing Run... Browse to the location of the CD (usually D:), then choose the program listed there called setup.exe (or something similar). The CD should start installing the desired program. At times, you may have to input a serial number or other code to verify that you are indeed the owner of a legitimate copy of the software you are attempting to install. If you have pirated (illegally borrowed) the software, please choose to not install the program. There are so many ''legitimately'' free software offering available over the Internet, that it really isn't necessary to use pirated copies.

===='''''Download:'''''====

You will likely download a file named something.zip. This is a compressed file that needs "unzipped" by your windows program before it can be installed. Once you have uncompressed the file, you should double-click the file and it should start installing.

The installer may ask for your name, email, or other information. Please read the EULA Agreement carefully, since you are legally bound by this license agreement. In some cases, software downloaded from the internet is "free" but has other software (often called malware) attached to the installer program. These additional programs will be secretly installed on your system, and may impair the speed of your system. However, if they are uninstalled, the main program will no longer work properly, if at all. Again, if you read the EULA Agreement, you will have the opportunity to see if the software maker or company has added such programs, since they have to tell you about them in the EULA Agreement if they exist.

Some software programs may take awhile to install, especially if they come on more than one CD/DVD (such as mapping programs, office/graphics suites, and games).

Once a software program is installed, a shortcut is installed under the Programs folder (Start | Programs) and also possibley on your desktop. Click on this shortcut and the program will launch (begin).

==='''MAC'''===

Mac OS X has an application called Installer bundled with it that is used to "install" many MAC programs. However, this is not technically an installer, but a Package Manager.

Some commercial applications for Mac OS X use a custom installer, often Installer VISE or Stuffit InstallerMaker. Applications that do not need to install additional system components can be installed by moving the application files to a desired location on a hard drive; this is known as "drag-and-drop installation" and no installer software is needed. MANY Mac programs use this type of installation.

Mac OS X also includes a separate software updating application, Software Update that keeps installed programs updated via the internet.

===='''''CD'''''====
In a way similar to Windows, programs on CD are inserted in the MAC CD-ROM drive, and an installer begins and automated setup begins.

===='''''Download'''''====

Mac OS X downloaded files are usually archived in a StuffIt archive. The installer or drop-and-drag installation program can be unarchived and installed, following directions included with the archived program.

===Linux===
Most software for Linux systems is available over the Internet, though some commercial packages do occasionally come on media (such as a CD-Rom or DVD). Various distributions of Linux have different strategies for installing software packages, so there is no "one way" to do this.

Most software on a Linux system cannot be installed except by the System Administrator, so you will need to log in as root (or use the "su -" command to become root). Some Linux systems will have an "Install Software" item on the menu, and clicking this will lead you through the steps necessary to install a new program. Other systems require the use of a command line utility which must be executed from the system console.

RedHat developed the "rpm" file, which when downloaded can be installed either from a graphical user interface (follow the on-screen prompts) or from the command line, using the rpm utility:

rpm -U packagename

The -U option means "upgrade," and this will either replace an older version of the software that has already been installed, or install it if no version is present. Unfortunately, rpm packages have dependencies - you cannot install package X unless package Y is there (and is sufficiently up-to-date). You cannot install package Y until package Z is installed. Package Z may have its own dependency problems as well. This can go on seemingly forever. To address this problem, another utility was developed called "yum" (which stands for the Yellowdog Update Manager, "Yellowdog" being the name of another Linux distribution). Yum looks at all the dependencies and updates everything that is needed for package X, including packages Y, Z, and any other packages that are needed:

yum install packagename

Yum will then go out on the Internet, find the latest version of the package on an approved ''repository'', download it, download its dependencies (and the dependencies' dependencies), install them, and perform some basic configuration.
Yum can be configured to run on a regular basis to keep all the software installed on a Linux PC up-to-date automatically. Other Linux distributions have equivalent package management utilities.

==3. Discuss with your unit, group, and/or family the moral issues surrounding software piracy and file sharing. Using biblical support, be able to describe what a Christian’s stance and practice should be in this arena and explain the reasons for your answer.==

===Notes for discussion leaders:===

'''PLEASE do not begin this discussion without first prayerfully considering the potential direction of this HOT TOPIC conversation, as well as your practice in this arena.'''

Each year, billions of dollars of software is illegally pirated by consumers. When most leaders were young, they were instructed not to steal the candy bar from the 7/11 or the CD from Wal-mart. In the twenty-first century, theft now encompasses what is often termed "intellectual property." That is, the items stolen are intangible in a physical sense, such as music, data, or software programs.

Many Christians have not however mentally adjusted their application of the "Thou shalt not steal" commandment to intellectual property. George Barna states that only 8% of American teenagers feel that piracy of music is morally wrong. In fact, only 48% of the youth surveyed said that someone in their lives had mentioned the moral issues surrounding this common practice.

For the complete article: [http://www.barna.org/FlexPage.aspx?Page=BarnaUpdate&BarnaUpdateID=162 Barna Update Online]

In my teaching experience (I teach computers and bible for a Northern California Adventist Academy), I have found the approach of "I choose not to do this because...." and the "here's what this researcher discovered" approach as valid for most students. Each student has their opinion and is at their own place in their spiritual journey. Providing a discussion point is NOT likely to change their mind overnight (nor should it). However, it does provide them with the information as well as the strong backing to take a stand that is different from the status quo among their peers. I would strongly discourage an attitude of "this is the right answer and this is how you should do it" approach to this discussion! Allowing them to read the Bible texts and to discuss the implications without prematurely moralizing what you understand the passages to say is invaluable to THEIR learning and application process. Allow the Holy Spirit to do HIS work in HIS time.

==='''Bible texts that may provide a basis for your personal study and group discussion:'''===
Exodus 20:15 -- The commandment to not steal
Genesis 31 -- Rachel stealing the images
Romans 2:21 -- Being an consistent example of what you command of others
Leviticus 6:2-7 -- Stealing what has been entrusted to you
Joshua 7 -- Achan's theft
John 12:6 -- Judas' theft

==4. Complete four of the following activities, providing print or digital evidence of completion to your instructor.==

Most Adventist Academies have classes in Keyboarding and Computer Literacy. Evidence of completion of these two courses would be adequate evidence for this requirement.

This requirement should show evidence of individual creativity and involvement.

===a. Create a letter using a word processing program. Use a merge file to allow the same letter to be sent to five different people, with personalization in each letter (such as name field & address field). Use the letter for a project such as: i. Requesting finances for a mission trip or service activity. ii. Communicating a non-perishable holiday food drive to your community. iii. Describing activities in your Pathfinder club that would be of interest to your local newspaper. iv. Inviting friends and family to a Pathfinder Sabbath or other youth ministry event.===

In Microsoft Word, this requires two separate documents, a data document for the addresses and the letter document for the standard part of the letter. The merge wizard (see windows help file) will assist you in stepping through the process.

In creating the letter document, merge fields could be placed in the address and salutation lines.

===b. Create a database that includes at least 15 records of people that includes at least three other fields (such as addresses, honors earned, phone numbers). Use the database to provide forms that extract their information from the database. Use this information for providing a report such as: i. Tracking which honors have been earned by your club during the current year. ii. Determining the attendance and/or points structure of each pathfinder in your club. iii. Tracking which class level requirements have been completed by each individual in your club or group. iv. Tracking the contacts involved in a year-long service initiative.===

This should be done using a database, even though most of this could be done as a spreadsheet. Remember that databases are a combination of form and database files. The output form should display the necessary information.

===c. Create a spreadsheet. Use this spreadsheet to do something such as: i. Tracking dues and/or donations to your Pathfinder club ii. Tracking income and expenses for a campout, mission trip, or other group event iii. Tracking unit completion of class level requirements===

This spreadsheet should not only display the data, but should also make use of formulas to automatically generate the data. Spreadsheets have the advantage over other recording methods that formulas can make repetitive tasks much easier by filling in cells with accurate data without manual entry.

===d. Create a two-page newsletter using a publications program. Use multiple columns, in-line graphics, two fonts, appropriate font sizes, and appropriate title and footer information. Use this newsletter for publishing one newsletter such as: i. Pathfinder newsletter ii. Church newsletter. iii. Report from a recent mission trip or service activity. iv. School publication===

Templates are graphically rich files created by most office programs, such as Publisher, that allow you to easily create newsletter, newspaper, or other graphically rich publications. Combine images from the event with news information to create a FUN publication. A publication program, unlike a word processing program, includes layout fields that closely integrate themed colors, pictures, clip art, and text.

===e. Use a presentation program to create a presentation file containing at least six slides (with text and photos), and demonstrate its function in a full screen presentation. Use templates, design elements, colors, and transitions as appropriate in your presentation. Use the presentation in presenting a subject as: i. AY Honor ii. Class level concept iii. Sermon iv. Fundraising===

Presentations can be used to effectively communicate your message to a large audience through the use of media rich content with projected images and text. For best effect, the presentation should use font sizes large enough to be read from a distance (typically size 24 or greater), and pictures of high-enough quality to not be pixelated. The same template or background should be used throughout the presentation. Slide transitions should be logical, and should not distract from the overall presentation. One of the most common mistakes of beginning presenters is to have the transitions be so fancy that the text and images zoom and whiz all over the screen, but are unreadable or distracting to the audience. KISS (Keep It Surprisingly Simple) is a great principle.

===f. Using a media burning software program, burn at least fifteen folders and/or files onto burnable media. Verify the media data integrity after the burn is complete.===
===g. Using a graphic creation program modify original digital photographs in the following ways: i. Frame or blur the edges of a photograph ii. Turn a color photo into a sepia-tone or black-and-white photo iii. Save a photograph as a different file type than the original iv. Combine elements from two photos to create a third photograph v. Add colored text to a digital photo showing multiple font enhancements such as drop shadow, bevel, emboss, and stroke. vi. Resize a photo so that the finished photo is no larger than 800 pixels wide and no more than 20% of the disk size of the original digital file.===

==About the Author==
{{:User:Pathfinders/About the author}}

==References==

[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Installation_%28computer_programs%29 Installation of Computer Programs article from Wikipedia.org]

[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Flash_media Flash Media article from Wikipedia.org]

[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Presentation+program Presentation Program article from Wikipedia.org]

[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Optical_disc_recording_technologies Optical Disc Recording Technologies article from Wikipedia.org]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Computers/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:40Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|1|1986|Vocational|North American Division}}
==1. Describe the function of and point out the following components of a personal computer:==
;a. CPU:
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/CPU}}
;b. Memory (RAM):
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/RAM}}
;c. Mother board:
[[Image:AsusP4PE MainboardSocket478.jpg|thumb|Typical Computer Motherboard]]
The mother board is located inside the main unit and contains the core circuitry of the computer, including the CPU. It also contains "slots" that other circuit cards such can be plugged into to add extra functions to the computer, such as a modem, networking, video acceleration, or a television tuner. The functions provided by these add-on cards (or ''daughter cards'') are often absorbed into the motherboard as new technology is introduced. Modems, networking, sound, graphics, hard drive controllers, and USB adapters are examples of technology introduced as add-on cards, but now commonly found on the motherboard.
;d. Hard Drive:
[[Image:Hdd od srodka.jpg|thumb|Hard drive]]
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/Hard drive}}
;e. External Drive:
An external drive is a storage device that is connected to a computer via a USB (or other) port. The drive itself remains outside the computer. The advantage of an external drive is that it is easier to install and it can be moved from one computer to another. This feature can be used for physically transporting large amounts of data between computers, or securing the data in an off-site location.
;f. Internal Drive:
An internal drive is a storage device that is installed inside the computer. The advantage of an internal drive is that it takes up less space and is generally more reliable than an external drive.
;g. USB:
[[Image:USB TypeA Plug.JPG|thumb|USB connector]]
USB stands for '''U'''niversal '''S'''erial '''B'''us. It is a convenient method of interfacing many different devices to a computer. USB devices include cameras, printers, flash memory drives, external hard drives, music players, and many others. USB ports are located on the back, front, or both sides of a computer, and sometimes even on computer monitors. A USB device is simply plugged into the port, and the computer recognizes the device and prepares it for use.
;h. Optical Drive:
An optical drive is a device which reads and optionally writes data to optical storage media such as CD-ROMS and DVDs.
;i. Input devices:
An input device is any device through which data can be provided to a computer. Input devices include, the mouse, keyboard, network card, storage devices, cameras, and microphones.
;j. Monitor:
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/Monitor}}
;k. Keyboard:
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/Keyboard}}
;l. Printer:
A printer is a device for capturing the output of a computer on paper.
;m. Mouse:
A mouse is a device that is used by human operators to control a computer. It can be used to move a cursor on a screen, highlight data on the screen, "drag and drop" files from one folder to another, control the action in a computer game, and manipulate data in many other ways.
;n. Modem / Network Card:
Modem stands for '''Mod'''ulator/'''Dem'''odulator, and it a hardware device which allows computers to communicate with one another over a telephone line (or some other audio channel). A network card serves the same function except that it connects to a computer network (such as ethernet) and is much, ''much'' faster than a modem. Modems are used for "dial-up" internet connections, and network cards are used for "broadband" internet connections.
;o. Digital Camera:
A digital camera is a device which digitally captures and stores an image in the form of a photograph. The photograph can then be transferred to a computer where it can be stored, transmitted to other computers, or digitally manipulated.
;p. Scanner:
A scanner is a device which is used to digitize a two-dimensional image, such as a printed photograph, a page from a book, or a store receipt.

==2. Describe the proper handling and storage techniques of disks, CDs, CDR’s, DVDs, Flash/USB drives, and other equivalent optical media devices.==
CD's, CDR's, and DVD's are all forms of optical media, and as such, must be protected from scratches. They are fairly impervious to water, and in fact can be cleaned with it (just be sure to completely dry them off before trying to use them). Store them in protective cases, envelopes, or some other container designed to store them.

Flash/USB drives are incredibly durable and can take a lot of punishment. But that doesn't mean they should be abused. Though they are tough, they can still be crushed or snapped. Do not open the casing, as this will expose the internal circuitry to static electricity which can damage them. Unlike the optical media described above, flash drives can be damaged by liquids.

==3. Explain the difference between read-only, write once, and write-rewrite media. What are examples of each?==
;Read-only: Read-only media is prepared at the factory and cannot be altered by the consumer. The most prevalent examples of read-only memory today are the CD-ROM and the DVD.
;Write-once: Write-once media is blank when purchased and is written by the consumer. Once it is written to, the data on it cannot be changed. An example of write-once media is the CDR (or CD-R).
;Write-rewrite: Write-rewrite media can be written, erased, and rewritten by the end user. An example is the CD-RW. This type if media is generally more expensive than the CD, the DVD, or the CDR.

==4. Determine the following on a computer system: a. Processor speed b. Storage capacity of the hard drive. c. Memory capacity (RAM)==
===Windows===
Click the "Start" button. Then click "My Computer" with the right mouse button, and select "Properties". This will bring up a window. Select the "General" tab, and the computer will display the processor speed, memory capacity, as well as a number of other bits of information.

To find the storage capacity, click the "Start" button and then use the left mouse button to select "My Computer". This will open a new window which will show all the drives on the computer. Generally, the "C:" drive is the hard drive, so right-click on that and select "Properties" - this will show you the drive capacity as well as how much of the drive is in use.

Be sure to pay attention to the use of the left mouse button verses the right mouse button.

===Mac===
Click on the "Apple" at the top left corner of the screen. Now click on "About This Mac". This will bring up a window that contains the processor type and speed and how much memory the computer has. To find the storage capacity on the hard drive, click the "More Info..." button. Now click on "ATA" under "Hardware". There should be two "ATA Bus" sections. Click on the bottom section or the one that doesn't contain anything about a CD drive. The hard drive capacity is under "Capacity".

===Linux===
At the command prompt, type the following command:

cat /proc/cpuinfo

This will tell you the processor speed as well as the memory capacity. For the storage capacity, type:

df

This will yield an output similar to this:
Filesystem 1K-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on
/dev/hda2 20315844 7085116 12182088 37% /
/dev/hda1 101086 11451 84416 12% /boot
/dev/hda5 16674136 12303988 3523124 78% /home

This output above indicates that the computer has a single hard drive with three partitions. The first of these is the root partition which has a total capacity of 20 Gigabytes, the second is 101 Megabytes, and the third is 16.7 Gigabytes.

==5. What are the advantages of increasing processor speed, hard drive storage capacity and RAM on a computer?==
Increasing the processor speed of a computer will allow it to make more computations per second, thus improving its performance. Increasing the amount of RAM in a computer will also increase its performance, but for a different reason. When a computer program needs RAM, it requests it from the operating system (OS). If free memory is available, the OS assigns it to the program and all is well. If there is not ''enough'' memory to satisfy the request, the OS will copy the contents of some ''other'' program's RAM to the hard drive, and then give ''that'' to the requesting program. When the other program needs that memory again, the OS restores it from the hard drive (after writing the other program's version of the memory to the hard drive). This process is called "swapping," and it can really slow down a computer. However, all the programs continue to work as designed, and the computer makes maximum use of the resources available to it. Increasing RAM capacity will eliminate or reduce the amount of swapping that goes on.

Increasing the storage capacity of a computer will not make it run any faster (as increasing the processor speed and memory capacity will), but it will allow more files and programs to be stored on the computer.

==6. List two different types of printers and explain the uses and advantages of each type.==
===Laser Printer===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/Laser printer}}
===Ink Jet Printer===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Computers/Ink jet printer}}

==7. Explain how each of the following elements helps protect a computer system. Why is computer safety so important?==
===a. Backup of personal files===
An important fact about modern computing is that computers eventually fail. If the hard drive on a computer fails, it may be difficult or impossible to recover the data that is stored on it. Forward-thinking computer users keep all of their important personal files backed up on external media so that when the computer fails, they still have their data.
===b. Whole system image backup===
It is not nearly as important to back up program files, because the program can be re-installed when the computer is repaired or replaced. However, re-installing every program that a computer user needs can be a time-consuming and frustrating process. If the whole system is backed up, it can be restored in short order.

===c. Surge protection===
The A/C power that feeds most businesses and households is subject to all kinds of disturbances that can disrupt or damage a computer. Lightning strikes can induce large currents in powrlines, and these translate into "surge" voltages. The increased voltage can easily damage a computer. Most often, this affects its power supply module. A surge protector is designed to absorb these voltage surges, preventing damage to the computer.
===d. Internet safety hardware/software===
An unfortunate fact of modern life is that the world is filled with evil (or immature) people who think it great fun to destroy data on a stranger's computer. Some of these people are capable of "hacking" their way into computer systems and altering files - even taking complete control of the computer. The computer can then be used to launch attacks against ''other'' computers. Sometimes this is done in order to install malicious software designed to analyze keystrokes. When the program detects that someone is engaged in online banking activities or ordering merchandise with a credit card, it springs into action, gathering account numbers and passwords which are then passed to the programmer. Once hacking was confined to a small community of immature, thoughtless programmers looking for a thrill, but it is becoming more and more an activity conducted by organized crime.

Firewalls and antivirus software are designed to combat these operations, but in order to be effective, they must be installed and constantly updated.

==8. Write a 250-word essay or give a three-minute oral report about the history of computers. Include prominent events and personalities that are significant to the development of the computer, both hardware and software. This report should focus on the development of the personal computer, not the internet or other accessory functions related to computing.==
This research should be performed by the person earning the honor, but we will provide a few names for plugging into a search engine:

'''Steve Wozniak''' and '''Steve Jobs''' are probably the most important people in the early history of personal computer hardware, as together, they formed Apple Computer which produced the first commercially viable home computer. '''Bill Gates''' and the company he founded (Microsoft) have had more influence on computer software than anyone else. Other people to know about include '''Brian Kernighan''', '''Dennis Ritchie''', '''Ken Thompson''', '''Richard Stallman''', '''Vint Cerf''', and '''Linus Torvalds'''.

==9. Spend one week charting the time you spend on a computer. List what time was spent on schoolwork, gaming, online, etc. At the end of the week, evaluate with your counselor, family, or group leader how your management of computer time relates to the Bible’s instructions on stewardship of our time and resources (Romans 14:12; Psalms 31:15; Ecclesiastes 31:1-8; Ephesians 5:15-16).==
''So then, each of us will give an account of himself to God.'' - Romans 14:12, NIV

''My times are in your hands; deliver me from my enemies and from those who pursue me.'' - Psalm 14:12, NIV

''Be very careful, then, how you live—not as unwise but as wise, making the most of every opportunity, because the days are evil.'' - Ephesians 5:15-16, NIV.

We are responsible for how we spend our time, and God expects us to use it in His service. Ecclesiastes 3:1-8 starts out

''There is a time for everything, and a season for every activity under heaven: a time to be born and a time to die, a time to plant and a time to uproot'' - Ecclesiastes 3:1,2, NIV.

Likewise, there is a time to compute and a time to not compute. It is very easy to become addicted to computing, and as with all things, moderation is the key to temperance.

==10. Dialogue with a long-term computer user about the advantages/disadvantages of Macs and PCs. Some questions you should ask include: a. What operating system does each use? What are some advantages of that OS? b. What compatibility issues do these two types of computers have in relation to data sharing and program installation? c. What type of industries / careers tend to use each type of computer system?==
With the importance of computing in today's world, it is highly likely that you know someone who could be described as "a long-term computer user." Perhaps a staff member in your Pathfinder club fits this description. Invite this person to attend a meeting to have this discussion. It would be a good idea to provide this person with the questions ahead of time to provide ample opportunity for preparations.

==References==
==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational/Communications Advanced

2012-05-16T15:49:40Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

#REDIRECT [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational/Communications - Advanced]]

AY Honors/Communications - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:40Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1956|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Have the Communications Honor==
The answers for the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational/Communications|Communications]] honor can be found in the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational|Vocational]] chapter of this wikibook.
==2. Do one of the following:==
===a. Send and receive by International Morse Code at the rate of eight words per minute using flashlight, whistle, mirror, buzzer, or key. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Morse Code}}

===b. Send and receive by semaphore code at the rate of 12 words per minute using semaphore flags. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Semaphore Code}}

===c. Send and receive by International Morse Code at the rate of eight words per minute using wigwag flags. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Wigwag Code}}

==References==
* Wikipedia article on [[W:Morse Code|Morse Code]]
* Wikipedia article on [[W:Semaphore (communication)|Semaphores]]
* http://www.cromwellbutlers.com/sbb_0617.htm

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Communications/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:40Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1953|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Do one of the following:==
===a. Send and receive by International Morse Code at the rate of three words per minute using flashlight, whistle, mirror, buzzer, or key. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Morse Code}}
===b. Send and receive by semaphore code at the rate of seven words per minute using semaphore flags. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Semaphore Code}}
===c. Send and receive by International Morse Code at the rate of three words per minute using wigwag flags. (Five-letter words, minimum of 20 words.)===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Wigwag Code}}

==Historical Notes==
Communications was called ''Signaling'' until 1986 when it was discontinued. It was reintroduced the following year and renamed ''Communications''.

==References==
* Wikipedia article on [[W:Morse Code|Morse Code]]
* Wikipedia article on [[W:Semaphore (communication)|Semaphores]]
* [http://www.wxs.ca/applets/semaphore Semaphore translator]
* http://www.cromwellbutlers.com/sbb_0617.htm

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Christian Sales Principles/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|2001|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Explain the responsibilities of a Christian salesperson as related to how they treat their customers and boss.==
Christians strive to live according to the principles of the life of Christ and the Golden Rule.

When dealing with customers, a Christian is honest and forthright, not withholding information or misleading people simply to gain a sale. A Christian is not high pressure and will not try to intimidate people into purchasing a service or product from them. Rather, he is empathetic and understanding of the customer's concerns and needs. He knows his product and its benefits thoroughly and is able to answer questions competently and quickly in order to help his customer make the decision that will best serve him.

A Christian is courteous to his employer, and remembers that it is his place to serve. He will not cause strife in the work place and show angst toward his employer when talking with fellow employees or customers. A Christian will strive to put the best interest of the company at the forefront of his efforts by being professional and clean. He will discuss problems with the source and not spread rumors in the work place.

==2. List the points in the steps of a sale.==

==3. Give a statement on how to meet objections.==

==4. How are the following points valuable to a salesperson?==

===a. Researching the market to see how an item or service will sell===

===b. Proper training and knowledge about the item or service to be sold===

===c. A visit to the plant or home office that produces the item or service===

===d. Follow-up visits with first-time customers===

==5. Using actual or hypothetical education and experience, write a resume which could be used in applying for a job.==

You can start your research on writing a [[w:Resume|resume on Wikipedia]].

==6. Find out what education is most beneficial for a career in sales. What aspects of sales are available to a Christian salesperson?==

==7. Do one of the following:==

===a. Help raise funds through sales of either services, merchandise, or tickets to a Pathfinder, AY Society, or school activity accounting for more than your proportionate share of the sales.===

===b. Earn money for yourself through the selling of merchandise or a service.===

==8. Make a practice sales presentation to your counselor, teacher, or parent on the above item that you are selling.==

==9. Interview a Christian salesperson and a Christian retailer regarding the following points:==

===For the Salesperson: a. Is a lot of traveling involved in the profession of selling? b. What other ways does the job of a salesperson affect family life? c. How are sales people paid? d. What opportunities for advancement are there in sales? e. What does the future hold for a career in sales? f. How do you get customers? g. What do you like the most about your job? The least? h. Does being a Christian make a difference in the way you do your job? ===

===For the Retailer: a. What type of education and training is helpful for a retail sales career? b. What advancement opportunities are available in retail sales? c. When you place an order, which do you rely on most, service of the sales person, price, market characteristics, or the quality of the product? d. What do you do when a customer complains about an error he thinks your store has made when he is actually the one at fault? e. Does being a Christian make a difference in the way you run your store? f. What do you like the most about your job? The least?===

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Carpentry/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1929|Vocational|General Conference}}

== 1. Describe the function of the following tools: ==
<gallery>
Image:Bandsaw at Lowes.jpg|<center>Bandsaw</center>
Image:Belt_sander_bosch.jpg|<center>Belt Sander</center>
Image:Decoupeerzaag.jpg|<center>Jig Saw</center>
Image:Miter saw.jpg|<center>Miter Saw</center>
Image:Radial_arm_saw_osha.jpg|<center>Radial Arm Saw</center>
Image:Wood_router_jmc_2005_03_12.jpg|<center>Router</center>
Image:Shaper_osha.jpg|<center>Shaper</center>
</gallery>

=== Band Saw ===
A '''band saw''' is a saw that can be used for woodworking, metal working, and a variety of other materials. It gets its name from its blade, consisting of a narrow band of toothed metal. This band rides on two large wheels stacked vertically with a space between them. Band saws are particularly useful for cutting irregular shapes. The radius of a curve that can be cut on a particular saw is determined by the width of the band.

=== Belt Sander ===
A belt sander is a machine used to quickly sand down wood and other materials for finishing purposes. It consists of a motor that turns a pair of drums on which a seamless loop of sandpaper is mounted. Belt sanders can be either hand-held, where the sander is moved over the material, or stationary (fixed), where the material is moved to the sanding belt. Stationary belt sanders are often combined with a disc sander.

Belt sanders can have a very aggressive action on wood and are normally used only for the beginning stages of the sanding process, or used to rapidly remove material.
=== Jig Saw ===
A jigsaw (also called saber saw or saber saw) is a type of saw used for cutting arbitrary curves, such as stenciled designs or other custom shapes, into a piece of wood or similar material. It is usually used in a more artistic fashion than other saws, which only cut in straight lines and exist mainly to chop pieces of wood to length for building structure. The first jigsaw puzzles were made using this kind of saw.

Traditional jigsaws are hand saws, consisting of a handle attached to a small, thin blade. More modern jigsaws are power tools, made up of a motor and a reciprocating saw blade.

=== Miter Saw ===
Today, a miter saw (also called a chop saw or drop saw) usually refers to a power tool used to make a quick, accurate crosscut in a workpiece. It is most frequently used to cut wood, although some plastics and light metals can also be cut with the tool. Common uses include framing operations and the cutting molding. Most miter saws are relatively small and portable, with common blade sizes ranging from eight to 12 inches.

The miter saw makes cuts by pulling a spinning circular saw blade down onto a workpiece in a short, controlled motion. The workpiece is typically held against a fence, which provides a precise cutting angle between the blade and the longest workpiece edge. In standard position, this angle is fixed at 90°.

=== Radial Arm Saw ===
A radial arm saw is a machine intended for cutting materials to length. It is primarily a woodworking machine, although it is sometimes used for cutting metals, such as angle iron or aluminum extrusions. Before the advent of the radial arm saw, table saws and hand saws were most commonly used for crosscutting lumber. Table saws are ideal for ripping stock, but it is awkward to push a long piece of stock widthwise through a table saw blade. When a radial arm saw is used, the stock remains stationary on the saw's table and the blade is pulled through the stock.

=== Router ===
A router is a woodworking tool used to route out (hollow out) an area in the face of a piece of wood. It was a tool particularly used by pattern makers and consisted of a broad-based wooden hand plane with a narrow blade projecting well beyond its base plate. Since about 1960, it has been replaced by the modern spindle router, which was designed for the same work. Further refinement has produced the even more recent plunging spindle router, which is even better adapted for many types of work.

=== Shaper ===
A wood shaper is a stationary woodworking machine in which a spindle spins at moderately high speeds. Specially shaped bits are mounted on the spindle. As the workpiece is fed into the machine, the bit cuts a profile into it. On some shapers, router bits can also be used using a special mounting adapter.

Wood shapers do essentially the same job as the router table, with the main difference being that a wood shaper is a stationary machine designed for larger volume work while a router table is a hand tool for lighter duty work. Routers can also be mounted on a router table, and used as a stationary tool. However, routers run at considerably higher speeds than shapers, and the use of large bits can be dangerous. Also, shapers can be used to cut much larger profiles than routers and custom-made shaper bits can be readily ordered or fabricated.

== 2. Demonstrate how to use the following tools: ==
<gallery>
Image:Block_plane.jpg|Block Plane
Image:Circ_saw.jpg|Circular Saw
Image:Framing_square.jpg|Framing Square
Image:Hammer2.jpg|Hammer
Image:Crosscut_saw.JPG|Hand saw
Image:Water_level_1.jpg|Level
Image:Tape_measure.jpg|Tape Measure
Image:Chasse_clou.png|Nail Set
Image:Plumb_bob.jpg|Plumb Bob
Image:Chisel_wood_24mm.jpg|Wood Chisel
</gallery>

=== Block Plane ===
A block plane is designed to cut end grain and is typically small enough to be used with one hand. To use it, securely clamp the piece to be planed to a solid object (ideally, a work bench). Then pass the plane's sole across the endgrain you are trying to smooth. The blade can be adjusted, and it is best to set it such that the blade barely protrudes out of the bottom of the plane. Adjust it so that it takes very thin shavings. If no wood is removed, let the blade out a little more.

=== Circular Saw (cut a straight line) ===
'''Note: Participants must be at least 16 years old to use power tools'''
It is vitally important that you describe the dangers involved in using a circular saw before you turn your Pathfinders loose on one. It is very easy to cut off a finger or cause an even more serious injury with one of these. If your Pathfinders are a little scared (not petrified) of this tool, that's a good thing. One should ''never'' get too comfortable with dangerous equipment.

Make sure the lumber is well supported before attempting to cut it, and make sure that you closely supervise the use of this tool. The operator should also wear eye protection.

Adjust the blade so that the depth of cut just exceeds the thickness of the board you wish to cut. You can run the blade right over the top of a saw horse this way. This will cut a small groove in the sawhorse, but that's an acceptable use of the tool.

If cutting plywood, you can clamp a piece of lumber along the line so that the shoe of the saw can rest against it and use it as a guide. Make sure the saw can clear the clamps on ''both'' ends of the cut though. Also make sure that the operator doesn't have to overreach to complete the cut and that all hands, feet, limbs, small children, and pets are clear of the area.

=== Framing Square ===
A framing square is used to make sure that an angle is 90°. Place the corner of the square next to the angle you wish to check, and adjust the angle until it lines up with the square. To check that the square itself is square, mark a straight line and place one edge of the square along this line. Then mark another line along the other edge of the square, intersecting the first line near the center of its length. Finally flip the square and see if the other side of the first line and the second line form also a 90° angle.

=== Hammer ===
Grip the hammer near the end of the handle opposite the hammer's head. Many people grip the handle near the hammer's head, but this is incorrect. When driving a nail, the hammer must be maneuvered so that its flat face strikes the nail's head at a right angle to the nail's axis, with the head moving parallel to that axis. Failure to achieve either condition will result in a sideways force on the nail's head, that may bend it. Also, one should relax the muscles of the hand and arm momentarily when the hammer strikes.

=== Hand Saw (cut a straight line) ===
Handsaws are tools used for cutting wood. Handsaws come in many varieties, including the crosscut saw, rip saw, coping saw, tenon saw, backsaw, and dovetail saw. Each has its own special use. A crosscut saw is used for cutting across the grain of a piece of lumber. A rip saw is used for cutting along the grain. A coping saw is used for making curved cuts. A tenon saw is used for cutting tenons and other fine work. A backsaw is commonly used with a miter box and for small cutting jobs. A dovetail saw is used for cutting dovetail joints.

To use a crosscut or a rip saw, place the board on a supported surface at thigh-height (between the knee and hips). Grip the saw with the right hand (assuming right-handedness) and use the left knee to hold the board in place. Align the right shoulder, arm, and hand so that they are in line with the cut to be made. Begin with light strokes, noting that the saw cuts on the push stroke. As the cut progresses, keep an eye on the line, pulling the blade toward it. If this is to be a "finished" cut, you can score a "V" along the line first with a carton knife, and let the blade ride in the V groove. Score another line along the bottom of the board to prevent tear-out.

Maintain your saws by keeping them dry and sharp. Many tools (including saws) can be kept in great condition by wiping them down with a cloth and oil (or WD40) after each use.

=== Level ===
A level is a tool designed to indicate whether a surface is level or plumb. A level surface has no tilt to it, so that liquid would pool up on the surface rather than run off. A plumb surface is straight up and down. Ideally, you want your floors to be level and your walls to be plumb.

Most levels have two bubbles on them - one for checking levelness, and the other for checking plumbness. To use the level, lay its edge on the surface you wish the check. Embedded in the middle of the level is a small window where the bubble and the tube is mounted. Two rings designate where the bubble would be if the surface were level (or plumb). If the bubble is not centered between these two rings, the surface is not level. Lift one edge of the level off the surface to see how far you have to move it in order to move the bubble between the lines. This will give you an indicator of how much correction is required to make the surface level. Adjust and remeasure, repeating until the surface is level.

=== Measuring Tape ===
[[image:Ruler_sixteenths.png|left|80px]]
A measuring tape is more commonly known as a "tape measure." It is used for measuring the length of an item. There is a metal tape curled into a spiral inside the enclosure, and attached to a spring. When the tape is pulled out of the enclosure, the spiral unwinds and the spring is tensed. When the tape is released, the spring draws it back into the enclosure. A hook on the end of the tape prevents it from being completely drawn inside, and this hook can also be used for hooking the end of the tape to the edge of a board. The tape itself is marked with inches, and these can be read off to measure a board or to mark a line for a cut. Between each inch mark are smaller tick marks. The largest of these is halfway between each inch marking, and indicates the half-inch measure. Slightly smaller tick marks lie between the half-inch mark and the inch marks, and these mark off the quarter-inch increments. Between each of the quarter inch marks are smaller marks to indicate eighths. Some tapes also mark off sixteenths (sometimes only for the first several inches). See the illustration to see how to read the markings.

Most tape measures also show 1 foot increments (often with a black square) as well as showing 16-inch increments (often with a red square). The 16-inch increments are useful because studs, joists, and rafters are commonly 16 inches apart.

=== Nail Set ===
A nail set is used in finish carpentry to drive a nail below the surface of a board. First the nail is driven with a hammer until it is very near the surface of the board. Then the tip of the nail set is placed on the nail head. Finish nails have a small divot in the head to accept the nail set. The head of the nail set is then struck with the hammer until the nail is driven below (or flush with) the surface of the board.

=== Plumb Bob ===
A plumb bob is a weight on the end of a string. The weight will hang straight down and is used as a reference for a perfectly vertical line. It can be used in some places where a level cannot - such as in a place where there is no vertical surface to place the level against. For example, a carpenter may wish to find a place on the floor just below a point on a ceiling joist so he can construct an interior non-weight bearing wall there and then be able to tie it into the ceiling joist. In this case, the wall does not yet exist, so there is nothing to place a level against to measure for plumbness.

=== Wood Chisel ===
Wood chisels are most commonly used in carpentry for installing recessed hinges. To do this, the hinge is laid on the board to which it will be attached, and then it is traced. The hinge is then removed, and a sharp knife is used to score around the hinge's outline. A chisel is then used to remove wood to a depth equal to the hinge's thickness.

== 3. Describe the use of and distinguish between the following types of nails: 20 Penny, 16 Penny, 12 Penny, 8 Penny, 6 Penny, Finish, Brad, Roofing, Screw Nail, Sinker, Common, and Galvenized ==

;Penny: The '''penny''' size is written with a number and the abbreviation d for penny (e.g. - 10d). D is an abbreviation for denarius, a Roman coin similar to a penny; this was the abbreviation for a penny in the UK before decimaliation. A smaller number indicates a shorter nail and a larger number indicates a longer nail. Nails under 1-1/4 in., often called brads, are sold mostly in small packages with only a length designation (e.g. 1/2" (12 mm), 1-1/8" (28 mm), etc.).

{| border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="4"
|-
|6d
| 2" (~50 mm)
|-
| 8d
| 2-1/2" (~65 mm)
|-
| 10d
| 3" (~75 mm)
|-
| 12d
| 3-1/4" (~80 mm)
|-
| 16d
| 3-1/2" (~90 mm)
|-
| 20d
| 4" (~100 mm)
|}

;Finish nail: A '''finish nail''' is used for interior woodworking. Size varies, but the head of the nail is only slightly larger than the nail's shaft. A finish nail is ''set'' by driving its head below the surface of the wood using a ''nail set''. The head can then be covered with putty (for a natural finish) or with caulk (for a painted finish). If done well, this makes the nail effectively invisible.

;Brad: '''Brad''' nails are small and often made of brass. They are often used to hold small pieces of trim in place. Rather than attempting to hide the nail, brads sometimes have decorative heads, so that the nail head becomes part of the decor.

;Roofing nail: A '''roofing nail''' is short with a large, flat head. It is also coated with zinc to prevent rusting. Roofing nails are used for attaching shingles to a roof.

;Screw nail: A '''screw nail''' has a twisted shank for extra holding power.

;Sinker: A '''Sinker''' nail's head is tapered on the underside, so that the nail can be driven flush with the surface of the board. These are used in general construction.

;Common: A '''Common''' nail has a flat head and is used for general construction, carpentry, and framing.

;Galvanized: A '''Galvanized''' nail is a nail that has been coated with zinc to inhibit corrosion. Galvanized nails are often used in work that will be exposed to weather.

== 4. Assist in erecting a building not less than 6x8 feet in ground dimensions with a gable roof and at least one door and one window, demonstrating ability to measure and use tools from requirement 2. ==
This requirement is just ''begging'' you to build a shed, though other options are certainly possible as well. Many Pathfinders go on mission trips to help build churches or schools, and if your group is planning to do this, you have the perfect opportunity to earn this honor.

In the United States (and in most developed countries) the local government will require a building permit for a shed, even one as small as this. Check with the local government and review the building codes before starting this project. They will usually want a drawing showing what you plan to build before issuing a permit.

If building a small shed, you may be able to use a "floating" foundation - that is special concrete blocks in the shape of a trapezoid (wider at the base than on top). The blocks sit on the ground, and beams are placed in notches on top of these. The floor joists and headers (which join to the end of the joists) are built on top of the beams. Once the floor is built, the walls can be framed (including openings for the doors and windows). At this point, the walls can be sheathed and the roof can be framed, sheathed, and shingled as well. Then the doors and windows are installed, the siding is put on, and the finish carpentry begins on the inside (though this step can be skipped on a shed).

Be sure that your Pathfinders each use all the tools called out in requirement 2. It might be a good idea to make a checklist for each Pathfinder, and have them compare their activities to it as the day progresses to be sure they use all the tools required.

== 5. When building the above project, use all of these features: ==
[[Image:Carpentry_construction_details.png|thumb|500px|right|1:cap plate, 2:top plate, 3:cripple stud, 4:header, 5:stud, 6:shoe plate, 7:jack stud, 8:subfloor, 9:joist.]]
 
=== Floor Joist ===
A floor joist is a board that supports the floor. Depending on how large an area the floor covers, and how far the joists span, the floor joist can be anywhere from a 2x6 to a 2x12, or even bigger. Floor joists are installed edgewise, and they are attached to headers which attach to the foundation of the building.

=== Sub Floor ===
The sub floor is usually made from plywood, particle board, or oriented strand board (OSB), and is nailed (or screwed) to the floor joists. The finished floor (carpeting, hardwood floor, laminate floor, linoleum, vinyl, tile, etc.) is then laid atop the sub floor.

=== Shoe Plate ===
More commonly known as a bottom plate or a sole plate, a shoe plate is the bottom board in a framed wall. Studs are nailed into this board, and it is nailed to the floor. Some local building codes require that the shoe plate be made of pressure treated lumber to resist rot if water pools on the floor (for whatever reason).

=== Top Plate ===
The top plate is the board running along the top of a framed wall. Like the shoe plate, the studs are nailed to this board, and it is attached to the ceiling.

=== Double Plate ===
For added strength, two top plates are used, most commonly on a weight-bearing wall. The upper top plate is called the cap plate.

=== Conventional Roof or Trusses ===
A ''conventional roof'' is made from rafters which are beams that run from the roof's ridge to the ceiling joists. A ''truss'' is an engineered, pre-built structure consisting of triangles. Trusses are lighter, stronger, and cheaper than rafters, but they form a web of lumber inside the roof rendering the attic space unusable. Rafters are positioned in line with the studs in a wall and are fastened to both the top plate and the ceiling joists. A pair of rafters (joined to the opposite sides of the ridge board) are sometimes tied together with a collar beam which is a horizontal member.

=== Felt Roof ===
Felt roofing material is not like the felt sets used in the children's Sabbath School classes. Rather, "felt roofing" is just another name for tar paper. Before installing the felt roofing, you should first nail a drip strip to the edges of the roof. Then the felt paper is rolled out over the entire horizontal length of the roof (not top to bottom!) and stapled onto the sheathing. If the felt is not wide enough to cover the roof from the eaves to the peak, you will need another layer. The first layer should be along the eaves, and subsequent layers should overlap previous ones by a couple of inches. If the roof has a ridge vent, do '''not''' cover it. The purpose if a ridge vent is to allow heat to escape from the attic. Covering it with tar paper defeats this feature completely. The roof is now ready to shingle.

=== Shingles ===
Shingles are laid on top of the felt roofing, starting with the bottom row. Use roofing nails to attach asphalt shingles directly to the felt roofing. The next row of shingles should be offset from the first so that the boundary between two shingles and the notches that make up the tabs in one shingle are completely covered by the tab of another - not by another boundary or by a notch. The shingles should overlap such that only the tabs show, and not the solid portion on the upper part of the shingle. It helps tremendously to mark parallel lines on the tar paper with a chalk line so that the shingles do not creep uphill. You want the line to be level.

=== Window with Weight-bearing Header ===
A window opening must have a weight-bearing header. The header is a pair of 2x4's which are turned on their edges and nailed to a stud. A pair of studs (called ''jack studs'') run from the bottom of the header to the floor to help support the weight. Short studs (called ''cripple studs'' then run from the header to the top plate. The cripple studs supply a support for the wall's sheeting.

=== Door with Weight-bearing Header ===
As with windows, doors also require a weight-bearing header. It is built exactly the same way a window opening is made.
=== Fascia on Eaves ===
Fascia is a "finish" board that covers the ends of the rafters.

=== Siding ===
The purpose of siding is to keep water out of the building. Vinyl siding is, in general, easier to work with than aluminum siding, but there are other options too, including asphalt, weather boards, and plain old plywood with felt paper beneath and with furring strips covering the joints.

==Note==
Participants must be 16 years old or older to use power tools.

==References==
*Much of the material in this section was taken from the Wikipedia articles on the various tools presented here.
*[http://www.redbrand.com/products/nail/index.asp Redbrand.com] - description of various nails.
*[http://www.hammerzone.com/archives/roof/maintenance/reshingle/prep/dry.htm Hammerzone.com] - roofing.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Bookkeeping/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1937|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. What is the difference between bookkeeping and accounting?==
Bookkeeping refers only to the actual posting of financial transactions into the various journals and account ledgers (e.g., collecting the raw financial data). This provides the underlying foundation for a system of accounting, which accumulates and organizes the raw data into useful information.

==2. Define the following terms:==
===a. Asset===

An '''asset''' is an economic resource owned by a person or company that is expected to provide them future benefits. Examples include, but are not limited to, cash, accounts receivable, supplies, furniture, land, and buildings.

===b. Liability===

A '''liability''' is an obligation that will have to be satisfied at some time in the future. Satisfaction of the liability may be by payment of money, transfer of other assets, or the performance of a service.

'''Example:'''
Company A bought $10,000 worth of widgets from Company B. Company B says that
Company A has until the end of the month to pay the $10,000. Company A has a $10,000 liability to Company B.

'''Example:'''
Amy sends $25 to Reader's Digest for a year's magazine subscription. Reader's Digest then has a liability to Amy to send her a year's worth of magazines.

===c. Credit===

A '''credit''' is an entry on the right side of an account. It represents an increase in a liability, owner's equity, or income and represents a decrease in an asset.

===d. Debit===

A '''debit''' is an entry on the left side of an account. It represents an increase in an asset or expense and represents a decrease in a liability or owner's equity.

===e. Posting===

Information about transactions is collected in journals. Typically a business will have a Cash Receipts Journal, a Cash Disbursements Journal, and a General Journal (where transactions affecting accounts other than cash are accumulated). ''' Posting''' is the process of transferring the debits and credits recorded in the journals to individual accounts.

'''Example:'''
At the end of the week the Cash Disbursements Journal is totaled. Checks totaling $3,694.32 were written that week. $2,075.00 of those checks were written to pay bills (Accounts Payable) and $1,000 was written in salary checks to employees. The remaining $619.32 was used to purchase office supplies. The bookkeeper would post a debit of $2,075.00 to Accounts Payable, a debit of $1,000 to Salary Expense, a debit of $619.32 to Office Supplies Expense, and a credit to Checking Account of $2,075.00.

===f. Trial balance===

A '''trial balance''' is a listing of all the business's accounts with their balance at a specific date and time. It is used as a check to determine that both sides of each double-entry transaction have been posted. Asset and expense accounts (accounts that normally have a debit balance) are added together in one column. Liabilities, owner's equity, and income accounts (accounts that normally have a credit balance) are added together in another column. If the bookkeeper has added and subtracted properly, the two columns should have equal totals.

===g. Voucher===

A '''voucher''' is basically a "permission slip" authorizing a transaction. It details the transaction approved and is signed by one or more company officials with authority to approve the transaction. At a minimum the voucher would show what item(s) may be purchased and at what price per unit.

===h. Invoice===

An '''invoice''' is an itemized bill with detailed list of goods shipped or services provided, each with their individual costs. For example, the invoice might show that a company bought 10 trashcans @ $15.00 a piece and 2 packages of trash can liners at $7.00.

===i. Interest===
'''Interest''' is a charge made for the use of money. It is usually expressed in an annual percentage rate (APR). One may pay interest (such as on a mortgage loan) or earn interest (such as from money deposited in a savings account).

==3. What is the difference between double-entry bookkeeping and single-entry bookkeeping?==

In single-entry bookkeeping, the effect of a transaction ''on one account only'' is recorded. For example, if a business spent $7 million to buy a new office building, a $7 million decrease to cash would be recorded. This could be compared to when an individual writes a check and records it in his or her checkbook.

Single-entry bookkeeping is '''not''' a prevalent method used in business. All definitions in the section above presume that double-entry bookkeeping is being discussed.

Double-entry bookkeeping recognizes that a transaction has several effects. While the purchase of the office building mentioned above did decrease the business's cash by $7 million it also increased the business's assets by $7 million -- they now own an office building that hopefully is worth $7 million.

(Note that it is more likely that the business would not have $7 million cash on hand and would obtain a mortgage loan for the purchase. Cash was used in this example for simplicity's sake.)

==4. What education is necessary to be a bookkeeper? What other education is helpful to a bookkeeping career?==

One could become a bookkeeper having only taken a high school bookkeeping course, given the computer software currently available. This would be especially true of a bookkeeping position at a very small business. A two-year degree at a technical college would probably open up bookkeeping jobs at a somewhat larger company or as a paraprofessional at an accounting firm. Other courses that further one's understanding of business are helpful in advancing in one's career. These would include economics and marketing, which are part of the course work needed to earn one's Bachelor's degree in accounting.

==5. What are some career fields that are related to bookkeeping?==

The jobs of Accounts Payable Clerk and Payroll Clerk would be quite similar to that of a bookkeeper. The difference is that the Clerk would be responsible for recording bookkeeping entries for one specific aspect of the company and would report to the Bookkeeper.

Some businesses, particularly very small ones, may have an employee whose duties combine those generally performed by a bookkeeper with those performed by a secretary.

A person who has enjoyed being a bookkeeper may well enjoy furthering their education and becoming an accountant. The job accountant can cover''' many''' different types of jobs including C.F.O. (Chief Financial Officer) of a company, a C.P.A. (Certified Public Accountant) auditing businesses' financial statements, a tax return preparer, or a financial advisor to wealthy individuals.

==6. Conduct an interview with your church treasurer, asking the following questions:==
*'''a. How much time do you spend each week at your job as church treasurer?'''
*'''b. What do you do with the money collected in the offering plates?'''
*'''c. How do you keep track of who contributed how much money?'''
*'''d. What money is sent to the conference?'''
*'''e. What money is kept in our local church?'''
*'''f. Are your records ever reviewed by an accountant? How often?'''
*'''g. How do you report the church finances to the church board?'''
*'''h. How do you report the church finances to the conference?'''

Make arrangements with your church treasurer well ahead of time so that she has plenty of time to work you into her schedule. Be flexible in scheduling your guest's time with your club. It may be necessary to have "honor time" earlier or later in the meeting to accommodate her schedule. Remember (and remind your Pathfinders) that she is doing you a favor by taking time out of her schedule to help you with this requirement. You may wish to provide the questions to her in advance so she doesn't have to come up with the answers on the spot. Write the questions down on index cards and pass them out to your Pathfinders so that they can take turns asking them.

==About the Author==

Virginia Thomas, C.P.A.,received her B.S. in Accounting from George Mason University in 1988. Her work experience includes public accounting firms Laventhol & Horwath and Hariton, Mancuso, & Jones.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Bookbinding/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1935|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Be able to identify the following terms: ==
# '''Foredge:''' the fore edge of a book, that is, the edge opposite the spine.
# '''Gutter:''' the inner margin of a pair of facing pages. This would be the right margin of an even-numbered page (which is always found on the left side) and the left margin of an odd-numbered page (which is always found on the right).
# '''Endsheet:''' a piece of often decorative paper glued to the inside cover of a book. Its purpose is to hide the raw edge of the cloth covering.
# '''Flysheet:''' the pages at the beginning and end of a book, not glued to the covers.
# '''Signature:''' a large sheet printed with several pages, intended to form four or more leaves in the finished book. The pages are arranged on the sheet so that all of the pages orient the same way and are in proper sequence after the sheet is folded.
# '''Mull:''' a coarse fabric used for lining the spine of a book.
# '''Backbone:''' the spine of a book. This is the edge of a book that shows when a book is placed on a shelf.
# '''Head:''' the top margin of a page.
# '''Foot:''' the bottom margin of a page.
# '''Deckle edge:''' the uncut and slightly irregular edge of a piece of paper.
# '''Guarding sheets:''' pieces of paper placed in a book in front of a plate (picture) to prevent ink from the picture from bleeding onto the facing page.
# '''Headbanding:''' a strip of material between a book's spine and the pages. It usually protrudes slightly above the top edge of the spine.
# '''Casing-in:''' the process of attaching the bound pages of a book to the cover by gluing the endsheets to the inside covers.
# '''Buchram:''' the cloth used on the outside of a book cover.

==2. Describe the difference between the following binding methods: ==
# '''Perfect binding''' A paperback or soft cover book consists of a number of signatures or individual leaves between covers of much heavier paper, glued together at the spine with a strong flexible glue; this is sometimes called perfect binding. Mass market paperbacks and pulp paperbacks are small (16mo size), cheaply made and often fall apart after much handling or several years.
# '''Hard bound''' A hardbound or hard cover book has rigid covers and is stitched in the spine. Looking from the top of the spine, the book can be seen to consist of a number of signatures bound together. When the book is opened in the middle of a signature, the binding threads are visible. Modern hardcover books are typically of octavo size, though they are often smaller or larger.
# '''Single signature''' A single signature binding is one in which only one signature and the cover are sewn together at the spine.
# '''Spiral (metal and plastic)''' A spiral-bound book is made of individual sheets, each with a line of holes punched near the bound edge. A metal or plastic spiral wire is fed through the holes to hold the sheets together. Spiral binding allows a book to be disassembled and reassembled by hand without damage.
# '''Saddle stitch''' Stapling through the center fold, also called saddle-stitching, joins a set of nested folios into a single magazine issue. Most American comic books fall into this category.

==3. Perform the following==
===a. Bind a single signature hand binding "manuscript".===
A '''manuscript''' is an original copy of an author's work. Manuscripts are often submitted in the form of typewritten (or computer printed) sheets of paper. Sometimes the manuscripts are two-sided, and sometimes they are single-sided.

In order to bind a manuscript, it must be converted into a form suitable for folio binding - that is, the binder needs at least two leaves per sheet. So instead of 8.5" x 11" sheets of paper, the binder needs 11" x 17" sheets. This is accomplished by pasting the sheets together in what will form the ''gutter''. Once the sheets are pasted together, they can be sewn though the overlapping section and bound normally.

In binding a 16-sheet single-sided manuscript, the right edge of sheet 1 is pasted to the left edge of sheet 16. Similarly, sheets 2 and 15 are pasted together, 3 and 14, 4 and 13, etc. An even sheet number is always pasted to an odd so that the middle sheet is not left standing alone. If there are an odd number of sheets, the first sheet should be pasted to a blank sheet.

When a book is opened, the page on the left side always has an even page number, and the page on the right has an odd page number. Care should be taken to observe this convention when pasting double-sided sheet together. Again, for a 16-sheet, 32-page manuscript, page 1 should be laid on the table face down. Page 32 should be laid face down to the right of it, and the bookbinder should then see pages 2 and 31. These are then pasted together.

Once the paste has dried, each sheet is carefully folded along the center of the overlapping sections. The manuscript will resist folding at this seam because the paper is double-thick there. Nonetheless, this is where the fold should be made. A bone folder makes this task easier. The folded sheets are then nested together to form a ''signature'', and the signature is then ready to sew to a cover made of a single sheet of heavier paper.

===b. Bind a blank book using at least four signatures and a permanent cloth hard board binding, using a "case" method. ===
Follow the steps outlined and illustrated in requirement 7, using four signatures of blank pages.

===c. The proper way to "break-in" a new binding.===
A new book should be opened first a few pages from the front cover and the pages should be pressed down. Then it should be opened near the back cover and again, the pages should be pressed down. Finally, it should be opened in a few places near the center. If it is opened near the center first, the book's spine may be broken, and if this happens, the book will always want to open to that page.

===d. Make a "slip case" for your blank book of at least four signatures.===
A slip case can be made from a piece of poster board. The first step is to measure the book and then draw the layout on the poster board as shown in the illustration:

[[image:Slipcase.jpg|thumb|600px|left|Layout of Slipcase]]
 
You will want to make the slip case slightly larger than the book's dimensions so that it can be easily inserted and removed. Once the layout has been drawn on the poster board, cut it as shown in the drawing. Then carefully make creases where the dotted lines are drawn. You may use a bone folder to help in doing this, or you may use a ruler. The folds must be crisp and accurate.

The design shown here calls for an extra fold-in which makes the slipcase walls double thick. Apply a thin coat of glue to the inside surface of the fold-in, then fold it on top of the slipcase wall. You may wish to let the glue dry at this point.

Next, apply a light coat of white glue to the back side of tab 1, and another thin layer of glue to the back side of tab 3. Do the same for the bottom tabs. Then assemble the slip case by gluing tab 3 to tab 1, and then gluing tabs 1 and 3 to tab 2. Clamp the tabs with clothes pins while the glue drys. Do not insert your book into the slip case until the glue is completely dry, or you may transfer glue to your book!

Once the glue dries, the slip case is finished. You may decorate the slip case using decoupage (see the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Arts and Crafts/Decoupage|decoupage chapter]] for instructions) if you like, or some other method as you see fit.

==4. Identify and describe the uses for the following binder's tools:==
# A '''Bone folder''' is a tool for folding and creasing paper. They are traditionally made from the leg bone of a cow or deer, but synthetic bone folders are also available. Bone folders resemble letter openers.
# '''Kick press:''' a foot operated device used for tightly holding and compressing objects upon which work is being performed. Presses have many uses in bookbinding. A text block (that is, the bound pages that have yet to be attached to a cover), is held in a press when the spine is glued up. It is returned to the press when the cover is attached, and the spine is shaped.
# '''Folding needle:''' a steel needle with a wooden handle sometimes used for working in tight spaces on book covers, such as on decorative corners made of metal (miters). It is sometimes also used for scoring.
# '''Awls''' are tools with a sharp point at the end of a long shaft mounted in a handle. They are used for making holes in various materials such as leather (used for book covers) and multiple layers of paper (as in a signature).
# '''Sewing frame:''' a structure upon which books are held while they are being hand-sewn.
# '''Squared card:''' a sheet of heavy stock with two cut edges which together make a 90° angle. These are used in the same way a carpenter's square is used, that is, in making right angles.
# '''Punch:''' a device for punching holes in material. These are like sharp tubes driven into the material and removing a usually circular portion. The waste material goes inside the tube and is sometimes ejected out the top when completely filled.

==5. Define the difference of paper weight in relationship to a ream of paper.==
In countries that use United States paper sizes, a less direct measure known as '''basis weight''' is used in addition to or instead of grammage. The basis weight of paper is the density of paper expressed in terms of the mass of a ream of given dimensions and a sheet count. In the US system, the weight is specified in avoirdupois pounds and the sheet count of a paper ream is usually 500 sheets. However, the mass specified is not the mass of the ream that is sold to the customer. Instead, it is the mass of the uncut "basis ream" in which the sheets have some larger size. Often, this is a size used during the manufacturing process before the paper was cut to the dimensions in which it is sold. So, to compute the mass per area, one must know

* the mass of the basis ream,
* the number of sheets in that ream, and
* the dimensions of an "uncut" sheet in that ream.

The standard dimensions and sheet count of a ream vary according to the type of paper. These "uncut" basis sizes are not normally labeled on the product, are not formally standardized, and therefore have to be guessed or inferred somehow from trading practice. Historically, this convention is the product of pragmatic considerations such as the size of a sheet mold.

By using the same basis sheet size for the same type of paper, consumers can easily compare papers of differing brands. 20 pound bond paper is always lighter and thinner than 32 pound bond, no matter what its cut size. And 20 pound bond ''letter size'' and 20 pound bond ''legal size'' papers are the same weight paper having different cut size.

However, a sheet of common copy paper that has a basis weight of 20 pounds does not have the same mass as the same size sheet of coarse paper (newsprint). In the former case, the standard ream is 500 sheets of 17 by 22 inch paper, and in the latter, 500 sheets of 24 by 36 inch paper. Here are some basic ream sizes for various types of paper. Units are inches except where noted.

:{| class="wikitable"
|-
|'''Paper Type'''
|colspan="2"|'''Paper Size'''
|'''- Number of sheets'''
|-
|Bond, writing, ledger ||17 ||× 22 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Manuscript cover ||18 ||× 31 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Blotting ||19 ||× 24 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Box cover ||20 ||× 24 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Cover ||20 ||× 26 ||- 500 or 1000 sheets
|-
|Bristol and tag ||22½ ||× 28½ ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Tissue ||24 ||× 36 ||- 480 sheets
|-
|Newsprint ||24 ||× 36 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Hanging, waxing, bag, etc. ||24 ||× 36 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Book, Text, Offset ||25 ||× 38 ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Index bristol ||25½ ||× 30½ ||- 500 sheets
|-
|Paperboard (all types) ||12 ||× 12 ||- 1000 sheets (1,000 square feet per ream)
|}

Sheets 17 by 22 inches can be cut into four 8½ by 11 inch sheets, a standard for business stationery known conventionally as ''letter sized paper''. So, the 17 by 22 inch ream became commonly used. The 25 by 38 inch book-paper ream developed because such a size can easily be cut into sixteen 6 by 9 inch book-sized sheets without significant waste.

Early newsprint presses printed sheets 2 by 3 feet in size, and so the ream dimensions for newsprint became 24 by 36 inches, with 500 sheets to a ream. Newsprint was made from ground wood pulp, and ground wood hanging paper (wallpaper) was made on newsprint machines. Newsprint was used as wrapping paper, and the first paper bags were made from newsprint. The newsprint ream standard also became the standard for packaging papers, even though in packaging papers kraft pulp rather than ground wood was used for greater strength.

Paper weight is sometimes stated using the "#" symbol. For example, "20#" means "20 pounds per basis ream of 500 sheets".

When the density of a ream of paper is given in pounds, it is often accompanied by its "M weight". The M weight is the weight (in pounds) of 1000 cut sheets. Paper suppliers will often charge by M weight, since it is always consistent within a specific paper size, and because it allows a simple weight calculation for shipping charges.

For example, a 500-sheet ream of 20# copy paper may specify "10 M". Therefore, 1000 sheets (or two reams) will weigh 10 lb (≈4.54 kg).

==6. Describe the color and properties of three types of adhesives using in the binding process and where they are used:==
# '''Hot melt animal glue''' has a brown to amber color range. It is made from animal hide or bones and is often sold as crystallized flakes. These flakes must be dissolved in hot water before they can be used. The mixture must be heated to about 140°F, and will cool quickly. Once the glue is removed from the heat source, it will become unworkable in about one minute. However, animal glue can be reheated even years after its initial application and it will return to a workable state. Thus, a book bound with animal glue can be repaired or rebound years later, as is often done with antique books. Animal glues are often used in gluing up a book's spine.
# '''Casing-in paste''' is also known as PVA, white glue (such as Elmers), or carpenters glue (which is yellow). These glues have a much longer working time than animal glues, but they also have disadvantages as well. If a surface needs to be reglued, PVA must be completely removed from the surface first, because this type of glue will not stick to itself. This type of glue is used to bond a text block to its cover.
# '''Resin glues''' also range from dark brown to amber, and are more commonly known as epoxies. Epoxy is a two-part glue consisting of a resin and a hardener. When mixed together in the proper proportions, the two compounds react chemically to form an incredibly strong bond. This bond is often stronger than the materials being glued, and thus the saying, "an epoxy joint is forever." Resin glues can be used to finish the grain side of leather or impregnated in buckram covering materials.

==7. Know and list the five principal stages of hand binding: ==
===Preparing the Signatures===
To begin, make up the signatures. This is done by folding the pages into halves, quarters, eighths, or sixteenths. Folding standard 8.5"x11" pages into quarters works well, as does folding 11"x17" into eighths.

If making a non-blank book, you need to print the pages in a certain way so that they appear in the proper order and right-side up. Folding a sheet of paper into quarters will produce eight pages. Try this on a blank sheet of paper first, number the pages, unfold, and look at how the pages orient themselves on the unfolded paper. When making a blank book, this step can obviously be skipped. You can also use the pictures below as a guide. Note that with the quarto folding scheme, some of the pages need to be printed upside-down.
<gallery perrow=3 widths=200px>
Image:Zinemaking-folding-quarto.png‎|<center>Quarto (one sheet, 8 pages)</center>
Image:Zinemaking-folding-folio4.png‎|<center>Folio (four sheets, 16 pages)</center>
Image:Zinemaking-folding-folio1.png|<center>Folio (one sheet, four pages)</center>
</gallery>

Once the folding is done, the bone folder or a knife can be used to cut the folds apart at the top, bottom, and outer edge of the pages. Do not cut the fold along the spine! The signatures are then ready to be sewn, and the sewing will bind them to a cloth ''tape''. An even number of signatures will place the final stitch on the same end of the book as the initial stitch, and this will help when it comes to tying it off.

[[image:Bookbinding_fold_signatures.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Folding the Signatures]]
[[image:Bookbinding_cut_folds.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Cut the Folds]]

===Sewing up the Signatures===
====Prepare the ''Tapes''====
Make three to five cloth strips about a half inch wide. The length of these cloth strips should be a bit less than twice the width of the pages. The cloth itself should be a fine cotton or linen. An old pillowcase has been suggested, but any thin cloth will work. These strips of cloth are called ''tapes''. Fewer tapes will make the sewing process go faster, but more tapes will yield a better book.

====Stitching====
Mark one of the outside signatures to indicate where the tapes will lie as shown in the photograph.

[[image:Bookbinding_mark_signatures.jpg|300px|thumb|Mark the Signatures]]

Note that the photographs show a very dark thread being used. This was done to make the thread easier to see for the purpose of illustrating the techniques. When binding ''your'' book, you will want to use white thread so that it ''won't'' be easy to see in the finished book.
Begin stitching by passing the needle and thread through the fold from the outside to the inside. It will be easier to make the hole from the inside of the fold with either an awl or the needle, but the thread should pass from the outside to the inside. This stitch should be made near the edge of the page, but not ''too'' near the edge. Leave a couple of inches of thread so you can tie it off when all the sewing is done. Then pass the needle back through the fold so that it comes out on the other side of the cloth tape. Do not run the thread through the tape. Pass the thread over the tape and back into the fold again. Repeat this process until all the tapes are sewn to the signature. Then slip the next signature between the tape and the first signature. Catch the previous stitch as shown in the photograph, and begin stitching the second signature.

[[image:Bookbinding_initial_stitch.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Making pilot holes in the signature]]
[[image:Bookbinding_catch_stitch.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Catching the Previous Stitch]]

Use the same technique for it as for the first signature. Stitch in the rest of the signatures, tighten the thread, and tie it off.

===Gluing up the Back===
Once the signatures have been sewn together, pull the tapes tight and apply a thin layer of glue to the spine. You can use a small artist's paint brush for this. Work the glue into the cracks between the signatures, but do not let it go too deep or the pages will stick together when you try to open the finished book. The book is then placed in a press, but you can use a heavy weight, two wooden boards and a few C-clamps, or a shop vise to get the same effect.

If you use weights to compress the signatures, be careful not to glue the weights to the book's pages. The idea is to squeeze the pages together as tight as possible while the glue sets.

If you use wooden boards and C-clamps, sandwich the pages between the two boards and clamp them together with the C-clamps.

If using a shop vise, be sure to pad the vise's jaws so you do not damage the pages. The glue will strengthen the spine and adhere the threads to the pages.

[[image:Bookbinding_glue_spine.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Glue-up the Spine]]
[[image:Bookbinding_press_text_block.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Pressing the Text Block]]

The finished product from this stage is called a ''text block''.

===Attaching the Boards===
====Make the Boards====
The "boards" are the book's covers. Use either a very stiff non-corrugated cardboard or eighth-inch mason board (available at most lumber yards). [http://guidemagazine.org Guide Magazine] is usually shipped with cardboard liners, so if your church subscribes to it, ask your Junior Sabbath School teacher to save them for you. Cut the boards such that they are slightly larger (about an eighth inch) than the text block on three sides. Make sure the boards are square.

Next, get some heavy cloth or heavy paper - whatever you want to use as the outside surface of the book cover. The remainder of this discussion assumes a cloth cover. Lay the boards on the cloth with a gap between them. The width of this gap should be equal to the width of the text block's spine plus triple the thickness of the boards (three eighths of an inch). Mark the cloth around the boards leaving about a one-inch border. Cut the cloth, and then clip the corners to within a quarter inch of the corners of the boards:

[[image:Bookbinding_cover_layout.jpg|300px|thumb|left|Laying out the cover]]

Coat the outside surface of the boards with a ''thin'', even layer of glue, lay them on the cloth, and stretch the cloth smooth. Be sure the gap between the boards is as wide as the text block's spine plus three times the thickness of the boards. Glue a strip of cloth across the spine, bridging the two boards. You may also glue a piece of card stock on top of this strip of cloth to further strengthen the spine. If you do not have card stock, a manila folder or an index card can be pressed into service instead. This strip of card stock should be as long as the text block's spine. Be careful not to glue the cover to your worktable. Ideally, you do not want any of the glue to penetrate the cloth cover, but just in case, you may wish to place a large piece of plastic beneath the cloth when doing this (use the lid from a large plastic storage tub, a plastic bag, or cellophane wrap). Now place as much weight on the boards as you can muster and leave it there until the glue dries.

====Attach the Covers====
When the glue dries from the previous step, remove it from the press (or remove the weights from the cover) and apply another thin layer of glue to the inside of the book cover. Then fold the top of the cloth cover over and glue it in place. Do the same for the bottom, and then fold over the left and right sides.

Get some wax paper or some plastic and insert two layers of it beneath the first page of the text block. Apply a thin layer of glue around the edge of the paper using a small paint brush. It's OK to brush the glue onto the wax paper. Cover all four edges of the text block, and then add a little more glue to hold down the tapes. Spread out some more wax paper and turn the text block over onto it. Repeat the processes for the back of the book, adding glue to the edges of the page. When you have coated the edges of the back page with glue, remove the layer of waxpaper that the glue was brushed onto, but leave the first layer of waxpaper in place. This layer will prevent the glue from bonding to the next page and keep moisture out of the rest of the book.

Now carefully lift the text block and place it on the back cover. Be sure to center it well. If you misalign it, carefully lift it off and make another attempt. Now fold the front cover closed onto the front page and make sure the text block is well centered. Finally, place the book back in the press again (or under a heavy weight) and shape the spine as best you can. Then let the glue dry. Don't be impatient at this point. If the book still smells like glue when you're ready to remove it, it is still too soon, and removing it will cause the pages to wrinkle and curl.

===Finishing===
The "finishing" step in bookbinding pertains to books with leather covers. The first step in finishing a leather-bound book is to go over the covers with a polishing tool to smooth out any irregularities. The book can then be placed in a finishing press with a set of embossing plates which will embed a pattern in the cover. (Alternately, the cover can be tooled by hand in the same way that a leather worker decorates leather.) When the book comes out of the finishing press, it may be gilded - that is, have a design tooled into it with gold leaf. Finally, the leather may be varnished.

==Historical Notes==
The Bookbinding honor was introduced in 1935, and discontinued in 1951. It was reintroduced as an ''Antique Honor'' in 1986. It was revised and returned to the Vocational category in 2002.

==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

==References==

*[[w:bookbinding|Wikipedia Article on Bookbinding]]
* [http://www.mothteeth.com/bookmaking/ How to make a simple hardcover book]
* [http://www.aboutbookbinding.com The Art of Bookbinding 1897 online]
* [http://www.aboutbookbinding.com/Bookbinding-20.html Bookbinding and the Care of books 1902]
* [http://www.ioba.org/terms.html glossary of book terms]
* [http://palimpsest.stanford.edu/don/don.html Bookbinding and the Conservation of books, A Dictionary of Descriptive Terminology]
* [http://www.aboutbookbinding.com/binding/Main.html Bookbinding for Beginners]
* [http://www.philobiblon.com/slipcase.htm Ten-minute Slipcase]

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

[[pt:Artesanato/Encadernação artesanal]]

AY Honors/Bible Evangelism/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}

==1. Be in at least the eighth grade. ==
This honor requires the maturity level of a typical 8th grade student. Please note that requirement 2 very closely coincides with an activity in the Voyager AY class. It would be good to follow this honor with the [[Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Outreach/Personal Evangelism|Personal Evangelism]] honor.

==2. Go on a visit with your pastor to a Bible study, a hospital visit, and a visit to a church member. ==
Though your pastor is a very busy person, it is likely that he will welcome you as he visits others. Ask him well ahead of time so that he can choose the day when you may join him. Be patient - he may not have anything lined up right away. Trust his judgment - he is a professional. There is no need to make all of these visits on the same day - they can be spread out over multiple trips. Remember your manners during the visits, and that you are a representative of your club, your church, and your Savior.

Before you go, see the notes on requirement 6 and requirement 7c.

==3. Arrange with your pastor to attend a church board meeting and a church business meeting. Make a written report of your visits to both meetings. ==
Church boards usually meet once per month. Again remember your manners and that you are representing your club. Be sure that you do make arrangements with your pastor to attend - do not just show up. Church boards often deal with sensitive, confidential matters, and you may be asked to dismiss yourself during part of the meeting. If this happens, handle yourself with grace.

Also keep in mind that unless you are a ''member'' of your church board, you will not be able to vote on any of the business that comes up during a church board meeting. If you are a baptized member of your church, however, you may (and should) vote during a church business meeting.

==4. List the steps in church organization from the member to the General Conference and know their relationship to each other. ==
A person's membership in the Seventh-day Adventist Church is with a particular church, mission, or company. Sometimes, an individual's membership will be with the local conference rather than with a church (such is the case with conference employees and their families, for instance). The local church is an independent body invested with the authority to make most of its own decisions. The pastor of the local church, however, is an employee of the local conference, and will answer to the Conference President. The local church forwards all tithe money it collects to the conference, and these funds are used to pay the salaries of all pastors and conference administrative employees. School teachers are also conference employees, but their salaries are paid from tuition rather than from tithe. Conference officers (President, Vice Presidents, Treasurer, etc.) are voted into office at a Conference Constituency meeting. Each church, mission, and company in a conference selects and sends its own delegates to the these meetings.

Several local conferences in a region make up a Union. Each Union has its own administrative staff and a slate of officers. Adventist colleges are usually associated with a Union and funded at the Union level.

Unions are grouped into Divisions, and each Division also has its administrative staff and officers (President, Vice Presidents, Treasurer, etc.). Again, the officers are voted into their positions at a constituency meeting. There are twelve Divisions in the Seventh-day Adventist Church, and together they form the General Conference. This is the highest level of government in the Adventist Church. Every five years the General Conference holds a constituency meeting to decide matters important to the denomination and to elect its officers (a President, several Vice Presidents, Treasurer, etc.).

==5. Find out what your church spends money on and what percentage of the budget goes to what expenses. ==
You should be able to find this information by talking to your church treasurer. Any member of your church's Finance Committee (if your church has one) will also be able to help you with this. Some churches budget fixed percentages of their income for certain expenses, while others budget fixed amounts. Still others will use a combination of these two approaches, paying fixed costs first, and then budgeting the remainder by percentages. If your church budgets fixed amounts, you can calculate the percentages yourself as follows:

<math>Percentage = \frac{budget\ for\ item}{total\ budget} \times 100</math>

==6. Write a report of an interview with your pastor in which you asked him the following questions: ==
;a. What is your daily routine like?
;b. What is your weekly routine like?
;c. What education is required to become a minister?
;d. What education outside of theology would complement a minister?
;e. From what source is the pastor paid?
;f. What is the most rewarding part of your ministry?
;g. What is the hardest part of your ministry?
;h. What are beneficial vocations for a pastor's wife to have?
;i. How did you know that God called you to the ministry?
;j. How would I know if God were calling me to the ministry?
;k. How do you do soul winning?
;l. How does evangelism enter into your soul winning?
;m. What advice would you give to someone who was thinking about becoming a minister?

If you are traveling with your pastor to meet requirement 2, this would be an excellent time to ask him these questions. Otherwise, you will need to set up an appointment with him. Be sure to take notes during your discussion so you can refer to them as you write your report.

==7. Do two of the following: ==
===a. Participate in the presentation of a youth evangelistic series.===
If your church is presenting a youth evangelistic series, volunteer to help out. If not, perhaps you could organize a series yourself or with other members of your Pathfinder club or AY Society.

Participating in the presentation can mean leading out in front of the congregation or working behind the scenes. Both are important.
;Leading out: This could be preaching, presenting special music, or providing testimony about your own Christian experience.
;Behind the scenes: This could be running the PA system, controlling a slide show, operating a spot light, videotaping the program, or even podcasting the series over the Internet.

===b. Give two Bible studies. ===
{{:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Bible study}}

===c. Make four hospital visits, presenting a devotional thought and prayer at each one. ===
A well-functioning church publicly prays for hospitalized members. Pay close attention to the prayers in your church to find out who is sick. It is also totally acceptable to visit non-church members who are hospitalized.

Talk to your pastor, an elder, a deacon, or a deaconess in your church to find out if they are going on a hospital visit and ask if you can come along. If they are not going, offer to go yourself. If they do not think it wise that you join them, respect their judgment.

Do not arrive unannounced. It is better to call ahead. Talk to either the patient or someone close to the patient about scheduling your visit. Do not put the visit off for too long either, as hospital stays are getting shorter and shorter all the time. It is not unusual for a patient to be sent home within two days of having major surgery. For this reason it may be better to be on the lookout for a person scheduled to be admitted to a hospital rather than for someone who has already ''been'' admitted. They could easily be discharged before you can arrange a visit.

When you get to the hospital you may need to turn off your cell phone. Look for any notices to that effect and comply with them.

It is best to not bring a large number of people with you when making a hospital visit. The rooms are small, and the hospital will limit the number of visitors allowed in the room. Furthermore, sick people are often not comfortable visiting with a large crowd. Be sure to obey any direction given to you by the hospital staff. Do not make noise. Remember that there are other patients there who need their rest.

Keep the visit brief and be alert for any signs that the patient wants you to leave. the patient may be too polite to make such as wish known to you. If you detect any hint that you should leave, do so graciously and do not take offense. Hospitalization is not a pleasant experience, and people frequently prefer to maintain their privacy. The patient may also tire easily and not be in a mood to visit. It is difficult to get a good night's rest in a hospital, as it buzzes with activity 24 hours a day, seven days a week.

Because your visit may be short, it is best to begin presenting your devotional thought as soon as you can. Be polite and ask how the patient is doing before diving in, but don't chit-chat for very long before getting started. When the devotional is finished, close with a prayer ''and leave'' while the presence of the Holy Spirit still lingers. It is better to say your goodbyes ''before'' having the prayer.

===d. Give a sermon of at least 20 minutes in length. ===
This can be done during any number of events including:
* Pathfinder Sabbath
* Camp out
* Induction Ceremony
* Investiture Service
* Regular Sabbath worship service

You can turn almost any Bible study into a sermon, as they generally present a thought or an idea in an organized manner. Make notes on index cards and take them to the pulpit with you. If you are uncomfortable, practice your sermon ahead of time. Open and close your sermon with a short prayer, and pray with another person in private before taking the pulpit. When citing Bible texts, give the congregation time to find the passage - repeat the book, chapter, and verse a couple of times. Speak clearly, with plenty of volume, and enunciate your words. Remember that no one in the congregation is there waiting for you to fail - they all want you to succeed! They are on your side.

===e. Give two evening and two morning devotionals for a camp out.===
Make arrangements with your Club Director well in advance of the camp out. If you can connect all four of these devotionals with a common theme, all the better. Consult a daily devotional book for ideas. Many are available at the [http://www.adventistbookcenter.com/ Adventist Book Center].

===f. Give devotional worships for five days at a school. ===
This is an ideal option if you attend or live near an Adventist school. These devotionals can be presented to the entire school, to a single classroom, or to a small group that meets before, during, or after school. They need not last more than 10 or 15 minutes.

Talk to the school principal or a teacher well ahead of time. She may want to know exactly what you are planning before approving it, so go in knowing what you are going to say. Better yet, have an outline of your program prepared ahead of time.

===g. Earn the Pathfinder Evangelism Award. ===
These are the requirements for the Pathfinder Evangelism Award:
====1. Be a Pathfinder or Staff Member.====
====2. Attend at least ten meetings. (Evangelistic meetings, Daniel or Revelation Seminars. If less than 10 are conducted, attend at least two-thirds of them.)====
====3. Participate at each of the meetings attended.====
====4. Wear your Pathfinder full-dress uniform (including scarf & sash) while participating.====
====5. Participate in at least four of the following: a. Be an usher. b. Pick up the offering. c. Assist in the children's meetings. d. Have scripture or prayer. e. Assist in the set-up/take-down of the meeting hall. f. Hand out the evening programs, brochures, etc. g. Give a testimony of what Jesus has done recently for you. h. Be a greeter. i. Help operate a Pathfinder booth showing what the church has for its young people. j. Invite a guest (non-SDA) to attend the meetings and host him throughout the evenings. k. Prepare a baked-goods table (breads, etc.) to share as gifts or samples for the attendees. l. Contact at least ten (10) individuals by phone or in person inviting them to attend the meetings. m. Participate in at least two Bible studies with at least one "interest." ====

;For your choice of the above, a thorough preparation is needed. Where applicable, outlines or memorized material should be used. A reading of the presentation is not permitted.

==8. Through Bible and the writings of Ellen G. White study and learn how Jesus treated crowds of people in ministering to them. ==
Read [http://www.biblegateway.com/passage/?search=Matthew%205-7&version=31 Matthew chapters 5-7], which cover the Sermon on the Mount, and [http://www.whiteestate.org/books/da/da31.html chapter 31] of ''The Desire of Ages'' which contains Mrs. White's commentary on it. You should also read [http://www.whiteestate.org/books/mb/mb.asp ''Thoughts From the Mount of Blessing''].

==9. Show that you have a personal daily devotional life for at least six months.==
One way to show this is by keeping a devotional journal. Summarize what you have read, making sure to record any Bible verses or other reading material studied. Be sure to record the date as well.

If you like, you can record your journal on a blog so that others may read it on the Internet. You may even plant a seed this way without knowing it!

==References==
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

==About the Author==
{{:User:Jomegat/About the author}}

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Barbering and Hairstyling/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Spend a minimum of five hours observing a licensed master barber/hairstylist while at work.==
==2. Name three essentials in the care of hair.==
1. Washing
2. Brushing

==3. Demonstrate the ability to give a shampoo correctly.==
==4. Be able to explain and demonstrate at least two methods of cutting hair.==
==5. Explain and demonstrate the purpose of at least two different kinds of combs used in cutting hair.==
==6. Explain and demonstrate the purpose of two different kinds of scissors.==
==7. Explain and demonstrate at least two purposes for the use of a clipper.==
==8. Write 500 words on what you learned during your apprenticeship.==
==Historical Notes==
==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Automobile Mechanics - Advanced/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1964|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Have the Automobile Mechanics Honor ==
{{ay prerequisite|Vocational|Automobile Mechanics}}

==2. Disassemble, inspect, and reassemble an automobile or light truck engine. Replace any defective or worn parts. Rebuild, start, and operate the vehicle. Keep a complete log of events during the overhaul. ==
==3. Remove and replace a standard or automatic transmission assembly. ==
==4. Rebuild the brake assembly on an automobile or light truck, following proper safety procedures. Demonstrate proper brake bleeding and adjustment. Properly repack a wheel bearing. ==
==5. Perform a minor tune-up, including the replacement of spark plugs and visually checking the electrical system.==

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Automobile Mechanics/Answer Key

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|2|1928|Vocational|General Conference}}
==1. Properly start an automobile or light truck engine with an automatic transmission and one with a standard transmission. Explain why it is necessary for the engine to have the proper oil, water, fuel, and battery pressures and levels for proper engine operation.==
===Starting an Automatic===
To start a vehicle with an automatic transmission, sit in the driver's seat and make sure the vehicle is in ''Park''. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. The engine should crank. Do not depress the gas pedal. As soon as the engine starts, release the key. To turn it off, turn the key counter-clockwise.

===Starting a Manual===
To start a vehicle with a manual transmission, sit in the driver's seat and push the clutch pedal all the way in with the left foot. The clutch pedal is the third one from the right, and this is often the one farthest to the left (although some vehicles have the parking brake to the left of the clutch).

Make sure the parking brake has been applied. Inexperienced drivers should also shift the vehicle into neutral so that if the foot slips off the clutch after the engine starts, the car does not move. Even with the vehicle in neutral, it is still important to depress the clutch, as many autos have a switch in the clutch which prevents the engine from starting unless the clutch is depressed. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. The engine should crank. Do not depress the gas pedal, but leave the clutch pedal depressed. As soon as the engine starts, release the key. To turn it off, turn the key counter-clockwise.

===Importance of Proper Pressures and Levels===
'''Oil''' keeps the engine lubricated and reduces friction between the moving parts of the engine. Friction causes heat, so if there is insufficient oil pressure in the engine, it will quickly overheat. Running an engine without oil for any amount of time will damage it, and doing so for an extended period will destroy it.

'''Water''' circulates through the engine to cool it. Running an engine too hot will damage it.

'''Fuel''' is what makes the engine go. If the vehicle has insufficient fuel pressure, the fuel will not flow into the combustion chamber at the proper rate.

The '''Battery''' provides energy to run the engine's starter. If the battery's voltage level is low, it may not be able to turn the starter.

==2. Explain the principles of four- and two-cycle engines and the difference between gasoline and diesel engines. Explain the major differences between carburetor fuel systems and fuel-injection systems.==
=== Four-cycle Engine===
[[Image:4-Stroke-Engine.gif|right|Four-cycle engine]]
A four-cycle engine is so named because it makes four strokes to generate power. These strokes are as follows:
# '''Intake Stroke:''' During this stroke, the piston draws a mixture of fuel and air into the cylinder. The fuel and air enters through an intake valve which opens during this stroke.
# '''Compression Stroke:''' Once the fuel and air have been drawn into the cylinder, the intake valve close and the piston returns towards the engine's head. This compresses the fuel.
# '''Power Stroke:''' When the piston reaches the top of the cylinder, the spark plug fires, igniting the compressed fuel and air mixture and causing an explosion. This explosion causes the gases to expand which powers the piston downwards again. This is where the engines power (and noise!) comes from.
# '''Exhaust Stroke:''' When the piston reaches the bottom of the cylinder, the exhaust valve opens, and as the piston returns to the top of the cylinder again, the exhaust gases are pushed out. When the cylinder reaches the top again, the four cycles are ready to repeat.

=== Two-cycle Engine===
[[Image:Two-Stroke_Engine.gif|right|Two-cycle engine]]

'''Power and Exhaust Stroke:''' In a two-cycle engine, the spark plug fires every time the piston reaches the top of the cylinder. This is the beginning of the power and exhaust cycle. As in the four cycle engine, the spark plug firing causes a compressed air/fuel mixture in the cylinder to explode, and the expanding gases drive the piston downward. As the cylinder goes down, it compresses another air/fuel mixture inside the ''crankcase'' - not inside the cylinder as in the four-stroke engine. The crankcase is the area beneath the piston, and the cylinder is the area above the piston. When the piston nears the bottom of this stroke, it uncovers an exhaust outlet and it also uncovers a passage between the crankcase and the cylinder. The compressed air-fuel mixture in the crankcase then rushes through this passage-way into the cylinder, forcing the exhaust gases out of the cylinder though the exhaust outlet. Some of the air/fuel mixture is ''also'' forced out the exhaust outlet, and this unfortunately decreases the engine's fuel efficiency and increases its pollution output. The piston's head is shaped in such a way as to minimize this waste, but it does not entirely eliminate it.

'''Intake and Compression Stroke:''' After the piston reaches the bottom of the stroke, it begins traveling upwards again, compressing the air/fuel mixture that rushed into the cylinder from the crankcase during the previous stroke, and simultaneously drawing ''more'' air and fuel into the crankcase. By the time the piston reaches the top of the cylinder, the air/fuel mixture is very highly compressed - much more compressed than it was in the crankcase. It is at this point in the cycle that the intake valve closes and the spark plug fires.

Because the crankcase is opened to the cylinder during its operation, oil in the crankcase makes its way into the cylinder where it is compressed and combusted along with the fuel. If this situation were ignored, the engine would soon burn up all its oil, leaving itself unlubricated. The engine would soon get so hot that its parts would fuse together and destroy itself. This is addressed by adding oil to the fuel (often one part oil to sixteen parts fuel). Thus the engine's oil supply is refreshed on every stroke of the piston. This unfortunately increases the pollution levels generated by two-stroke engines.

===Gasoline verses Diesel Engines===
In many respects, the four-stroke gasoline engine and the four-stroke diesel engine are very similar. They both follow an operating cycle that consists of intake, compression, power, and exhaust strokes. They also share in the same system for intake and exhaust valves. The fuel and air mixture is ignited by the heat generated by the compression stroke in a diesel engine versus the use of a spark ignition system on a gasoline engine. The diesel engine needs no ignition system. For this reason, the gasoline engine is referred to as a spark ignition engine and a diesel engine is referred to as a compression ignition engine.

The fuel and air mixture is compressed to about one-twentieth of its original volume in a diesel engine. In contrast, the fuel and air mixture in a gasoline engine is compressed to about one-eighth of its original volume. The diesel engine must compress the mixture this tightly to generate enough heat to ignite the fuel and air mixture.

The gasoline engine mixes the fuel and air before it reaches the combustion chamber. A diesel engine takes in only air through the intake port. Fuel is put into the combustion chamber directly through an injection system. The air and fuel then mix in the combustion chamber.

The engine speed and the power output of a diesel engine are controlled by the quantity of fuel admitted to the combustion chamber. The amount of air is constant. This contrasts with the gasoline engine where the speed and power output are regulated by limiting the air entering the engine.

===Carburetor verses Fuel Injection Systems===
'''The carburetor''' serves the following basic functions:
#The carburetor mixes fuel and air Into the correct proportions for the most efficient use by the engine. The carburetor also must constantly vary the mixture proportions to meet the engine’s needs as Its speed and load requirements vary.
#The carburetor regulates engine speed and power output.
#The carburetor atomizes the fuel as it mixes it with the air.

'''Fuel injection systems''' are an increasingly popular alternative to the carburetor for providing an air-fuel mixture. They inject, under pressure, a measured amount of fuel into the Intake air, usually at a point near the intake valve. Fuel injection systems provide the following advantages.
#Fuel delivery can be measured with extreme accuracy, giving the potential for improved fuel economy and performance.
#Because the fuel is injected at the intake port of each cylinder, fuel distribution will be much better and fuel condensing in the manifold will not be a problem.
#The fuel injector, working under pressure, can atomize the fuel much finer than the carburetor, resulting in improved fuel vaporization.

==3. Describe the construction of a typical gasoline engine and explain briefly the function of these units:==
===a. Engine: crankshaft, connecting rods, pistons, camshaft, valves, oil pump, carburetor, fuel injectors, ignition distributor, fuel distributor, electrical system including alternator, battery, and regulator===
[[Image:Cshaft.gif|thumb|300px|Crankshaft, connecting rods, and four pistons]]
As can be seen in the diagram to the right, the '''pistons''' drive the '''crankshaft''' via the '''connecting rods'''. The connecting rods and crankshaft convert the back-and-forth motion of the pistons into rotary motion.

The '''camshaft''' is a smaller rotating shaft with small "bumps" on it called cams. As the cams rotate, they lift and lower the valves at just the right time to allow gasses to either flow into the cylinder or escape from it.

The '''oil pump''' moves oil through the engine to keep the internal parts well lubricated.

The function of the '''carburetor''' and '''fuel injector''' were covered in requirement 3.

The '''ignition distributor''' has several jobs to do in the ignition system. First, it must close and open the primary circuit to produce the magnetic buildup and collapse in the ignition coil. Second, it times these actions so the resultant high-voltage surges from the secondary will be produced at the right time. Third, it must establish a timing sequence to direct the high-voltage surges to the proper spark plugs.

The distributor injection system used in automotive diesel engines is classed as a low-pressure system in that pumping, metering, and distribution operations take place at low pressure. The high pressure required for injection is built up by the injector at each cylinder. A suction pump lifts fuel from the tank and delivers it to the float chamber. From here a second low-pressure pump delivers the fuel to the '''fuel distributor'''. Fuel passes through the distributor to the metering pump, where it is divided into measured charges. The fuel charges then are delivered back to the distributor, where they are sent to the injectors in the proper sequence.

====Electrical system====

The '''alternator''' is an electrical generator. As the engine turns a shaft in the alternator, it generates electricity to run everything in the car's electrical system, including the headlights, on-board computers, radio, and more. It also recharges the battery.

The '''battery''' is used primarily for starting the vehicle. When the car is not running, the alternator cannot generate any electricity, so the battery must do this. It will also power the headlights, radio, and a few other things. The most common way a battery "dies" is when someone leaves the headlights on for too long with the engine off.

The '''regulator''' evens out the voltage coming out of the alternator before it is fed to the rest of the electrical system. The voltage from the alternator can vary depending on a lot of different factors, and it is the regulator's job to make sure that none of the other components have to deal with varying amounts of power. Without the regulator, the headlights would brighten and dim as the alternator's voltage varied.

===b. Difference between standard transmission and automatic transmission and how the engine torque is transmitted to both kinds of transmissions; the purpose of overdrive===
The transmission couples the engine to the drive shaft and has two main functions:
#Control direction of travel (forward or revers)
#Provide the operator with a selection of gear ratios between engine and wheels so that the vehicle can operate at best efficiency under a variety of driving conditions and loads.

In a vehicle with a '''standard transmission''' the driver selects the desired gear manually. In a vehicle with an '''automatic transmission''' the transmission makes the gear selection itself depending on throttle position, vehicle speed, and the position of the shift control lever.

In both cases, engine torque is transmitted to the wheels via a clutch. Automotive clutches depend on friction for their operation, whether it be solid friction as in the conventional clutch (found on a standard transmission), or fluid friction and inertia as utilized in the fluid coupling and torque converter (found on an automatic transmission).

'''Overdrive''' can refer to two different things. An overdrive is a device which was commonly used on rear-wheel drive automobiles to allow the choice of an extra-high overall gear ratio for high speed cruising, thus saving fuel, at the cost of less torque.

It also refers to a combination of gearing inside a transmission or transaxle which results in the output speed being greater than the input speed. In the latter case, "overdrive" does not refer to a physically separate identifiable part/assembly.

===c. Difference between rear wheel drive and front wheel drive===
If you put a car on a hydraulic lift, raised all four wheels off the ground, turned on the engine, and put it in gear, the rear wheels of rear-wheel drive vehicle would turn, while the front wheels of a front-wheel drive vehicle would turn. In a four-wheel drive vehicle, all four wheels would spin. The terms simply indicate which wheels are connected to the engine via the transmission.

===d. Difference between drum brakes and disk brakes, standard brakes and power brakes, and the parking brake===
[[Image:Drum Brake parts.jpg|thumb|400px|Drum Brakes]]
The diagram on the right shows the parts of a '''drum brake''' system. The brake is taken apart in this photo showing the brake drum on the left, and the brake shoes on the right. In operation, the shoes fit inside the drum. The drum rotates with the wheel, and the shoes are held stationary. When the brakes are applied, the shoes press against the inside surface of the drum, and the friction produced slows the wheels, stopping them ultimately.
 
[[Image:Disk brake dsc03680.jpg|thumb|400px|Disc Brakes]]
The diagram on the right shows the parts of a '''disk brake''' system. Here, the disk (gold) rotates with the wheel, and a stationary pair of ''calipers'' (red) squeeze both sides of the disc.
 
In '''standard brakes''' the energy supplied by the operator’s foot in pushing down on the brake pedal is transferred to the brake mechanism on the wheels by various means. A mechanical hookup has been used since the earliest motor vehicles, but hydraulic pressure is used most extensively at the present time. Mechanically operated braking systems are obsolete on today’s automobiles, but these systems may be used for a portion of the braking systems in many vehicles.

'''Power braking''' systems are designed to reduce the effort required to depress the brake pedal when stopping or holding a vehicle stationary. Most power brake systems use the difference in pressure between intake manifold vacuum and atmospheric pressure to develop the additional force required to decrease brake pedal pressure. When a vehicle is powered by a diesel engine, the absence of intake manifold vacuum requires the use of an auxiliary vacuum pump. This type of pump usually is driven by the engine or by an electric motor.

The '''parking brake''' usually is operated by an auxiliary foot pedal or hand lever located in the driver compartment. This brake mechanism is designed to keep the vehicle stationary when the operator is not present. It is usually integrated into the disk or drum brake system (which ever is used) and locks in place until released by the operator.

==4. Perform typical automotive maintenance as listed below:==
===a. Check engine and transmission oil levels.===
There are usually two dipsticks in the engine compartment for checking the engine oil and transmission oil levels. Once the dipstick is located, simply pull it out, wipe it clean on a rag or paper towel, reinsert it, pull it out again and check the level. The dipstick will be wet with oil up to the level of the fluid, and fluid levels are marked on the stick itself.

===b. Check water/anti-freeze level. Change and flush the cooling system.===
The coolant level (also known as antifreeze) can be checked by looking in a plastic reservoir off the dise of the engine. This reservoir is usually mounted on the fender or on the front grill. It has markings on the side and an overflow area. It is also semi-transparent so that you can see the level of the coolant inside.

====Flushing the cooling system====
#The first thing you will need to do is make sure the engine is cool. It is very dangerous to open the cooling system on a hot engine, as serious burns can result. While you're waiting for the engine to cool, get a container that will hold at least two gallons. You will drain the coolant into this. Apply the parking brake.
#Set the vehicles temperature control to ''Hot''. This opens a valve in some vehicles, connecting (or isolating) the car's heater and the cooling system.
#Open the radiator cap and locate the valve at the bottom of the radiator. If there is no valve, you may have to disconnect the hose at the bottom of the radiator. Get the catch container ready, open the valve, and maneuver the catch container into position to catch the coolant which should begin flowing as soon as you open the valve.
#Allow the radiator to drain. This may take a while. When coolant stops coming out, close the valve again.
#Fill the radiator with water - not with coolant. Turn on the engine, let it run until the engine's cooling fan turns on. This means the thermostat has opened and has allowed the coolant to flow into the engine. Turn off the engine. Drain the water out using the same steps as outlined above.
#Add a 50-50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the radiator until it is about an inch from the fill neck. Add more coolant to the reservoir, filling it to the "full" line. Then - with the radiator cap off - turn the engine on again while monitoring the coolant level. Add more coolant as the level drops, until it quits dropping. Replace the radiator cap.
#Take the waste coolant to a service station for recycling.
#After driving the vehicle for the first time after flushing the cooling system, let it cool and check the coolant level - both in the reservoir and by removing the radiator cap. Add coolant if it is necessary.

===c. Change engine oil and filter.===
When an engine is not running, the oil collects in an oil pan or sump at the bottom of the crankcase. There is an oil drain plug normally screwed into a drain hole at the bottom of the oil pan which is accessible from underneath the vehicle. To change the oil in a vehicle's engine, the drain plug is unscrewed to let the oil drain out of the oil pan and into a container. After the used oil drains out, the plug is screwed back into the drain hole. Some drain plugs have a replaceable washer to prevent leakage due to corrosion, rust or worn threads in the drain hole. The removable oil filter can be unscrewed at this time, often with the help of an oil filter removal tool, or in some cases, by hand. Then a new oil filter screwed back in after applying fresh oil to the sealing surface of the new filter. Then new oil is poured in through an otherwise capped opening at the top of the engine. For many cars, 4 to 5 quarts or liters of oil are needed to fill the engine. Take the old motor oil to a service station for recycling. '''It is illegal to dispose of used motor oil in the trash or dump it into the environment!'''

===d. Change a tire/wheel assembly, following proper safety procedure.===
#Locate the point on the car designed to take the jack. This is usually illustrated in the owner's manual, and is often a point on the chassis a few inches behind the front tire, or a few inches in front of the rear tire.
#Place ''chocks'' around two of the car's tires. If changing a front tire, place the chocks on the two rear tires. If changing a rear tire, place them on the front tires. Chocks are brick-sized blocks that prevent the car from rolling. Indeed, you can use about anything for a chock, so long as it will stand up to the pressure of a car being parked on it, and if it is tall enough to prevent the car from rolling over it. Bricks, blocks, blocks of wood, or even large rocks can be used as chocks, or you can use store-bought ones.
#Set the parking brake.
#Loosen the lug nuts, but do not remove them yet. It is easier to loosen them before jacking up the vehicle because the tires will remain stationary. Once the vehicle is jacked up, the wheels will easily rotate, making it more difficult to loosen the lug nuts. It may be necessary to remove the hubcap to get at the lug nuts. The hubcap usually prys off with a screw driver or with the end of the jack handle. Be careful not to damage the hubcap.
#Place the jack beneath the jack point and use it to lift the vehicle. '''Do not ever lift more than one tire from the ground at a time!''' This is a very dangerous thing to do, because it makes it ''very'' easy to knock a car off the jacks.
#Stop lifting the vehicle as soon as the tire is lifted from the ground.
#Finish removing the lug nuts.
#Once all the lug nuts have been removed, you may pull the tire/wheel assembly towards yourself and off the wheel mount. Once it's off, you can carefully roll it out of the way and get the new tire (or the same tire since this is likely an exercise, and there is likely nothing wrong with the tire in the first place).
#Lift the new tire onto the wheelmount, aligning the holes in the wheel with the bolts on the wheel mount. Push the tire into position and quickly put a lug nut or two in place. Get them all on, and finger-tight first, and then get the lug wrench out and begin tightening the first lugnut.
#After the first lug nut is tightened, move to the one on the opposite side of the wheel (or as near to opposite as you can get) and tighten it. Continue tightening the other nuts, going to opposite sides of the wheel each time so that they are tightened evenly. When they are all right, lower the jack.
#Remove the jack.
#Go around the lug nuts again, tightening them further. With the car's weight preventing the tires from rotating, you should be able to tighten them a little more (but don't overdo it).
#Congratulate yourself on a job well done.

===e. Lubricate the chassis according to the vehicle service manual.===
[[Image:Grease Gun US Dep. of Labour.jpg|thumb|200px|Grease gun]]
Lubrication of the chassis is accomplished by using a grease gun. Grease guns have a tube on them through which the grease is forced. At the end of this tube is a fitting that attaches to a grease nipple. The vehicle service manual will show you where to find the grease nipples. First wipe any dirt or foreign material from the grease nipple. Then place the grease gun on the grease nipple and force grease into it. Remove the grease gun and wipe the grease nipple clean so that no dirt accumulates there. Do this to all the grease nipples on the vehicle.
 

==5. How often should the engine oil, transmission oil, and cooling fluid be changed?==
The manufacturer specifies how often the '''oil changes''' should be made. For example, most people believe that the oil change frequency should be every 3000 miles or every 3 months, whichever comes sooner. This 3000 mile oil change interval has been relentlessly promoted by oil changing companies for decades. It had a scientific basis when engines used non-multi-weight, non-detergent oil. It no longer has any scientific basis, but it is still being promoted by certain entities, most notably the oil change industry in the United States (including car dealerships). Most manufacturers recommend oil change intervals of 6,000 miles or more for modern cars. For convenience, the oil filter is usually also replaced at the time the oil is changed.

'''Transmission fluid''' change frequency is specified in the owner's manual, but is most often every 15,000 miles.

How often the '''coolant''' should be flushed and changed is also spelled out in the owner's manual. 30,000 miles or three years is typical.

==6. Give some pointers on proper care of the vehicle and its finish, both interior and exterior.==
The owner's manual has a service schedule in it, telling you how often to change the oil, various filters, and other maintenance items. You also need to check tire inflation and tread wear on a regular basis. If you have ever pedaled a bicycle with low tires, you know that it requires ''much'' more effort to propel a vehicle with improperly inflated tires.

Keep your vehicle clean, and wax it at least once per year (in the autumn is best so the car's finish is protected from any road salt). Vacuum the interior as often as you change the oil, as any dirt that stays in the carpet will accelerate carpet wear. Wipe vinyl and leather seats down with an appropriate cleaner and vacuum cloth seats. You should also clean the dashboard and interior door panels regularly.

==References==
Some of the material for this answer book was taken verbatim from [http://www.tpub.com/content/automotiveenginemechanics/TM-9-8000/ Principles Of Automotive Vehicles], U.S. Army Manual TM-9-8000. As an original work of the U.S. Federal Government, this document is in the public domain, so it is perfectly legal and ethical to include portions of it here.

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Completed Honors|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

AY Honors/Accounting/Answer Key 2

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

{{honor_header|3|1938|Vocational|General Conference}}
==Complete a high school or college course in accounting or the following requirements:==

==1. Show transactions necessary for acquisition or deposit of assets, and acquisition and disposal of liability. Show transactions necessary to close income and expense accounts at year end.==
==2. Be able to correctly classify balance sheet items with short term asset, long term asset, contra asset, short term liability, long term liability, and equity.==
==3. Be able to write an income statement from a trial balance.==
==4. Be able to reconcile bank balance to book balance in checking accounts, including deposit in transit, service charge, returned NSF, interest on account, and checks in transit.==
'''[[W:Bank_reconciliation|Bank reconciliation]]''' is the process of matching and comparing figures from accounting records against those presented on a bank statement. Less any items which have no relation to the bank statement, the balance of the accounting ledger should reconcile (match) to the balance of the bank statement.

It allows individuals to compare their personal bank account records to the bank's records of the individual's account balance in order to uncover any possible discrepancies.

===History===
When ledgers were written manually, regular checks were important to ensure they remained in balance. It was important to have a reliable source against which to check the accounts ledger.

The statement of account from a bank would have been hand written by a clerk and checked carefully by the bank manager. The statement can be taken as a reliable source, as banks' primary business is to ensure their ledgers correctly tracked the flow of funds. Hence the bank balance at the end of a given period could be obtained from bank and matched to a bank ledger kept by a company's accountant.

==References==

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]

Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Vocational

2012-05-16T15:49:39Z

SU Admin: 1 revision

Although the Vocational Series Honors were once antiquated as a category they have again returned to regular use. Some of them use outdated forms and skills, their preservation however is excellent for the history and skill development of the youth. If you are considering submitting an updated version of one these Honors to the NAD, please consider creating an additional honor rather than a replacement Honor. Forms for submitting new honors are available through [http://www.pathfindersonline.org pathfindersonline] and [http://www.xtremeyouthresources.org Xtremeyouthresources.org], and submitting them for piloting through these resources can give them more public attention.

== Index of Vocational Honors (38) ==
{{AY_Stages}}
{| align=center style="background-color: #F7F7FF; border="0" cellspacing="4" cellpadding="4" width="100%"
|-
|width="33%" valign="top"|
{{stage short|No_work|5 Dec, 2006}} [[/Accounting/]] 
{{stage short|100%|8 Aug, 2006}} [[/Automobile Mechanics/]] 
{{stage short|No_work|5 Dec, 2006}} [[/Automobile Mechanics - Advanced/]] 
{{stage short|No_work|5 Dec, 2006}} [[/Barbering/]] 
{{stage short|100%|1 Jul, 2007}} [[/Bible Evangelism/]] 
{{stage short|100%|22 Feb, 2006}} [[/Bookbinding/]] 
{{stage short|100%|2 Aug, 2006}} [[/Bookkeeping/]] 
{{stage short|100%|13 Jul, 2006}} [[/Carpentry/]] 
{{stage short|00%|24 Dec, 2006}} [[/Christian Sales Principles/]] 
{{stage short|100%|6 Apr, 2006}} [[/Communications/]] 
{{stage short|100%|6 Apr, 2006}} [[/Communications Advanced/]] 
{{stage short|100%|21 Dec, 2005}} [[/Computer/]] 
{{stage short|100%|8 Feb, 2007}} [[/Computer - Advanced/]] 

|width="33%" valign="top"|
{{stage short|100%|16 Dec, 2005}} [[/Electricity/]] 
{{stage short|Blue Question|16 Dec, 2005}} [[/Forestry/]] {{division_honor|NAD}} 
{{stage short|Blue Question|8 Aug, 2009}} [[/Forestry - Advanced/]] {{division_honor|NAD}} 
{{stage short|100%|13 Jan, 2009}} [[/House Painting, Exterior/]] 
{{stage short|100%|13 Apr, 2010}} [[/House Painting, Interior/]] 
{{stage short|100%|19 Sep, 2006}} [[/Internet/]] {{division_honor|NAD}} 
{{stage short|100%|20 Sep, 2006}} [[/Internet - Advanced/]] {{division_honor|NAD}} 
{{stage short|75%|21 Apr, 2009}} [[/Journalism/]] 
{{stage short|100%|30 Aug, 2006}} [[/Masonry/]] 
{{stage short|No_work|5 Dec, 2006}} [[/Native Bush Construction/]] {{division_honor|SPD}} 
{{stage short|100%|25 May, 2007}} [[/Paperhanging/]] 
{{stage short|100%|10 Oct, 2006}} [[/Plumbing/]] 
{{stage short|100%|18 May, 2007}} [[/Printing/]] 

|width="33%" valign="top"|
{{stage short|25%|9 Feb, 2007}} [[/Radio/]] 
{{stage short|100%|5 Dec, 2006}} [[/Radio Advanced/]] 
{{stage short|100%|2 Jan, 2006}} [[/Radio Electronics/]] 
{{stage short|100%|19 Nov, 2008}} [[/Shoe Repair/]] 
{{stage short|00%|9 Jun, 2006}} [[/Shorthand/]] 
{{stage short|100%|10 Jan, 2007}} [[/Small Engines/]] 
{{stage short|100%|20 Sep, 2006}} [[/Teaching/]] 
{{stage short|100%|22 May, 2006}} [[/Typewriting/]] 
{{stage short|00%|27 Nov, 2007}} [[/Upholstery/]] {{division_honor|SPD}} 
{{stage short|100%|22 May, 2007}} [[/Video/]] {{division_honor|SPD}} 
{{stage short|25%|26 Feb, 2009}} [[/Welding/]] 
{{stage short|100%|28 Apr, 2006}} [[/Woodworking/]] 
|}

{{ay_honor_divisions_legend}}
__NOTOC__

==Index of {{SUBPAGENAME}} Honors by Skill Level==
===Skill Level 1 {{SUBPAGENAME}} Honors===
<DynamicPageList>
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/{{SUBPAGENAME}}
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Skill Level 1
order=ascending
namespace=0
</DynamicPageList>
===Skill Level 2 {{SUBPAGENAME}} Honors===
<DynamicPageList>
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/{{SUBPAGENAME}}
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Skill Level 2
order=ascending
namespace=0
</DynamicPageList>
===Skill Level 3 {{SUBPAGENAME}} Honors===
<DynamicPageList>
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/{{SUBPAGENAME}}
category=Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book/Skill Level 3
order=ascending
namespace=0
</DynamicPageList>

[[Category:Adventist Youth Honors Answer Book|{{SUBPAGENAME}}]]